In a recent Create with Me workshop, Blurb Brand Ambassador Zoë Sadokierski shared how she approaches book design through her work as a designer, writer, and educator. Sadokierski is an associate professor of visual communication at the UTS School of Design and the founder of Page Screen Books, an independent publisher focused on artists’ books and visual essays. Her work explores how design can help audiences engage with complex scientific and cultural ideas.

Throughout the session, Sadokierski spoke about the principles that guide her design process. Rather than focusing on step-by-step software instructions, she emphasized intentional decision-making. Format, structure, and the relationships between elements all play a role in how meaning is created on the page.

Below, we’ve gathered several of the book design principles Sadokierski discussed during the live workshop. Read the article, or watch the replay of the event.

Start with audience and intent

For Zoë Sadokierski, the earliest design decisions are not visual ones. They begin with audience, context, and purpose. “When you’re making a book, you’re making an object that’s going to live somewhere,” she says. 

Before thinking about layout, she considers who the book is for and how it will be encountered. Will it be picked up casually or read with focus? Is it meant to be shared widely or experienced in a specific setting? These questions help define what kind of object the book needs to become.

Approaching design this way keeps decisions grounded in use rather than personal preference. A book meant to be handled often may call for a lighter format. A project created for exhibition may require different pacing or scale. In each case, the audience shapes the design from the beginning.

Starting with intent also helps guide content decisions as the project develops. Once the reader is clearly defined, choices around sequencing, density, and emphasis become easier to navigate.

Rather than asking how a book should look, ask yourself how it should be experienced. That clarity carries through every design decision that follows.

Design for the way books are read

Sadokierski approaches book design through the body as much as the eye. She talks about reading as a physical act, shaped by how a book is held, opened, and moved through over time.

One of the first issues she returns to is friction. “If I’m trying to read a book and my thumbs keep going over where the content is and I have to keep moving my thumbs, I find it deeply annoying,” she says. 

For Sadokierski, that moment signals a design failure. The problem is not visual style, but placement. Content that sits too close to the edge or too near the gutter asks the reader to work harder than they should.

She also thinks in terms of duration. Books are rarely consumed all at once. They are read across time, often in long stretches. Dense layouts, strangely formatted images, cramped margins, or inconsistent pacing make sustained reading more difficult.

Lastly, rather than treating each page as an individual canvas, Sadokierski considers how spreads work together. The relationship between facing pages affects flow, emphasis, and rest. When layouts shift too dramatically from spread to spread, the reader must constantly reorient, breaking immersion.

These decisions are subtle, but cumulative. Small interruptions compound over dozens of pages. When comfort is prioritized, the reader can remain focused on the work instead of the layout.

As you design your book, pay attention to where friction appears. Give content room to breathe. Think in spreads, not single pages. If your reader can move through the book without adjusting their hands or their attention, your design is doing its job.

Build structure before you place content

Sadokierski begins by building the structure her pages will live inside. Before adding images or text, she defines a clear framework that can support the entire book.

The first step is setting margins. Margins establish where content can sit and how much space the page needs to feel comfortable. They also account for binding and how the book will be held, especially near the gutter.

From there, she creates layout guides that divide the page evenly into a nine-by-nine grid. This grid is not something the reader ever sees. It functions as a measuring system that helps maintain proportion and alignment throughout the book.

The grid allows elements to be grouped into thirds, halves, or larger spans. Images can stretch across multiple columns. Text can align consistently from spread to spread. Because the divisions remain the same, layouts can vary without losing cohesion.

Working this way prevents design decisions from becoming reactive. Instead of solving each page independently, the structure provides a shared logic that carries across the entire project. When alignment stays stable, pages relate to one another naturally. The layout feels intentional, even as content changes.

As you design your book, set up the structure first. Define margins before placing content. Use guides to establish proportion. When the framework is clear, every layout decision becomes easier and more deliberate.

Add content to test relationships

Once the structure is in place, Sadokierski begins adding content. Not to finalize pages, but to test how elements relate to one another.

At this stage, precision is not the goal. She uses content to understand scale, density, and pacing. Rough images and unfinished text are enough to reveal whether the structure can support the material.

Placing content early helps surface problems that are difficult to see in theory. A layout that feels balanced without content may become crowded once images and text are introduced. Spreads that seem generous on their own can quickly feel tight when multiple elements compete for attention.

Rather than refining details too soon, Sadokierski focuses on relationships. How much space does an image need to feel intentional? How does text sit beside it? Where does the eye go first when the page opens?

Working this way keeps design flexible. Early layouts are exploratory, not precious. By resisting the urge to perfect pages too early, she leaves room to adjust structure before small decisions become difficult to undo.

This phase is also diagnostic. As content moves into the grid, patterns begin to emerge. Some pages ask for more breathing room. Others reveal opportunities for emphasis or pause. The layout becomes a way to learn what the book needs.

As you add content to your own book, think of this stage as testing, not finishing. Use placement to understand relationships and pacing. Save refinement for later, once the structure has proven it can support the work.

Make typography about reading, not style

Sadokierski approaches typography as a system built to support reading over time. Her decisions focus less on expression and more on clarity, endurance, and cohesion across an entire book.

Choose typefaces designed for long-form reading

In the live design, Sadokierski selects Freight for Dan Milnor’s book because it is built for sustained reading. The writing itself is informal and observational, so the typeface provides structure and balance rather than visual personality.

She looks for typefaces that remain calm across many pages and do not draw attention to themselves. Decorative or novelty fonts may feel appealing at first glance, but they often become tiring in longer formats.

Look for depth within a type family

When evaluating a typeface, Sadokierski also prioritizes the size and quality of the family. She says that a well-designed family includes multiple weights, roman and italic styles, and related variations that allow hierarchy to be created without introducing additional fonts. This flexibility becomes essential when working with body text, headings, captions, and emphasis throughout a book.

Type families with limited options can quickly restrict design choices as a project grows.

Limit how many fonts you use

Sadokierski is deliberate about restraint. In her experience, more typefaces rarely improve clarity.

Across her practice, she almost never uses more than two typefaces in a single project. Often, one family is enough. At most, she will pair a serif and a sans serif when the design calls for a clear functional distinction.

Limiting the number of fonts helps maintain cohesion and keeps attention on the content rather than the styling.

Test font pairings structurally, not stylistically

If you are using multiple fonts, Sadokierski suggests looking at their structure.

One of her practical tests is to compare the lowercase “o” from each typeface side by side. If the shapes feel compatible, the fonts are more likely to work together across the book. If they clash at that basic level, the difference will repeat throughout the layout.

This approach shifts typography decisions from intuition to observation.

Consider accessibility as part of design

One of the biggest things to keep in mind is that typography shapes who can read a book comfortably.

Sadokierski references the work of her former student, Olivia King, who designed a typeface called Inclusive Sans. Originally created with accessibility and readability in mind, the open-source font has since been expanded and commissioned by Penguin Books for use as a custom brand typeface, reflecting their commitment to clear and inclusive design.

For Sadokierski, this example reinforces a broader principle. Typography is never neutral. Design choices determine who is included in the reading experience.

Create rhythm across pages

After the structure, content, and type are established, Sadokierski shifts her focus to how pages behave in sequence.

She emphasizes that readers learn a layout quickly. Even without realizing it, the eye begins to remember where elements tend to appear. When that placement remains consistent, the reader can move through the book with less effort.

This visual memory creates a sense of orientation. The reader knows where to look for text, images, or captions without consciously searching for them. Over time, that familiarity builds comfort and trust.

Consistency also creates contrast. When placement stays stable, small changes become more noticeable. A full-bleed image, a pause in text, or a shift in scale carries more impact because it breaks an established pattern.

Sadokierski evaluates rhythm by looking at pages together, not individually. She flips through spreads in sequence to see how the book moves, watching for moments where alignment drifts or placement becomes unpredictable.

Designing this way shifts attention from perfecting a single page to shaping the experience across many pages. Rhythm is not created by variation alone. It emerges from repetition first, then change.

As you design your book, look at pages in motion. Notice where your eye expects content to appear. Use repetition to establish familiarity, then introduce variation deliberately so it reads as emphasis rather than noise.

Experimentation, test books, and learning through making

Book design does not move in a straight line from idea to finished object. It unfolds through testing, revision, and physical trial.

Rather than waiting until everything feels resolved, Sadokierski prints work early and often. Test books become a way to think, not just a step toward production.

Seeing pages in their final scale reveals things that are impossible to judge on screen. Type that feels balanced digitally may appear dense in print. Margins that look generous on a monitor can feel tight in the hand. Page turns behave differently once paper and binding are involved.

Sadokierski often prints pages, trims them to size, and places them inside another book with the same dimensions. Experiencing the work in context exposes pacing issues, tonal shifts, and typographic problems long before a final version is created.

This kind of testing lowers the stakes. Early versions are not meant to be perfect. They exist to surface questions, not answers.

Iteration becomes part of the creative rhythm. A project may move through multiple versions, each clarifying structure, emphasis, or flow. Learning happens through making rather than speculation.

This approach reframes what it means to finish a book. Small runs and test editions allow ideas to evolve organically. So instead of treating the first version of your book as the final one, try treating each as a step toward deeper understanding. The book reveals what it needs as you build it.

Keep designing, and keep testing

Book design rarely reveals itself all at once. It emerges through structure, trial, adjustment, and attention to how the work behaves over time.

Sadokierski’s approach is a reminder that good design is not about perfecting individual pages. It’s about shaping an experience that unfolds spread by spread. From early decisions about audience and intent to the finer points of typography and rhythm, each choice builds toward a book that feels considered, readable, and grounded.

If you want to see these principles applied live, watch the full Create with Me session to follow Sadokierski’s process as she designs directly in Adobe InDesign. Seeing decisions made in real time offers insight that’s difficult to capture in static examples alone.

***

Blurb helps creators turn ideas into beautifully printed books, whether you’re working in BookWright by Blurb, uploading a PDF, or designing fully custom layouts in InDesign. Creating a free Blurb account gives you access to templates, printing options, and tools designed to support your process from first draft to finished book.

The post Book design principles from professional designer Zoë Sadokierski appeared first on Blurb Blog.

This might seem counterintuitive, but as someone who has made and continues to make dozens of test publications, I can promise you that creating test books will make your overall bookmaking experience far more enjoyable. 

But let’s get some facts straight first.

What’s a test book?

Great question. A test book does not have to be a replica of your finished book. A test book does not have to be expensive. A test book is not a one-off. 

A test book is simply a quick, early version of your project that you print to see how your images, type size, layout, and paper choices actually look in the real world. It’s a working draft you can flip through, mark up, and learn from. And it’s something you will use repeatedly. 

Why test?

Taking a step back to look at the creative world in general, we must ask ourselves: What creative project arrives perfectly on the first try? 

Does a painter reach perfection on the first pass? Does a novelist or screenwriter write the perfect novel or script on the first draft? Does a movie editor find that Academy Award winner after the first edit? 

No. Great work comes through revision. Our books are no different. 

We have our initial vision or idea, and we dream about what that vision will look like in print. Sometimes we obsess. We can see that final masterpiece, but when we begin to build, we discover that we have options, and that things might not be as straightforward as we first imagined. 

Maybe I shouldn’t mix color and black-and-white photographs. Maybe twelve-point text is too large, or maybe it’s just right. Maybe the images need borders instead of bleed. 

Maybe is a synonym for doubt. Doubt can prevent us from moving forward. 

In steps the test book. Your space for wild experimentation.

Remember, the only person who will see the test book is you. You need not worry about being judged, finding the perfect edit, or choosing the best cover photograph. It’s a test book. A practice swing before stepping to the plate. 

And you don’t need to make a large test book. You can print a small sample of what your final book will be. If your final publication is an 11×13 hardcover, your test book can be a 7×7 softcover. Play around. Have fun.

My very first experiment

When Blurb first arrived back in 2006, the first thing I did was download the software and make a test book. I was working on a project about Hawaii, so those photographs were in a folder on my desktop. I pulled black-and-white, toned black-and-white, and color imagery and quickly placed them in a layout. 

I didn’t worry about making anything perfect. Again, I was making a book to see what I liked or didn’t like about the Blurb offering. I also took a single line of text and printed it at 8pt, 10pt, 12pt, 14pt, and 18pt to see what looked best for captions, body copy, and headlines. 

I then printed the test book on multiple Blurb papers to see what I liked the best. I used these test books as a roadmap for years. 

How I use them now

Recently, I returned from teaching a workshop in Morocco. In my first week home, I created six test books from photographs I had made while teaching. I created samples ranging from a MagCloud Digest that cost me ten bucks to an 11×13 linen hardcover photo book with dust jacket using Mohawk proPhoto Pearl (140# Mohawk Photo Gloss, 190 GSM), which cost me well over one hundred dollars. 

You might think that after making three hundred different publications with Blurb, I would no longer need to make test books, but this couldn’t be further from the truth. 

Making these books is fun and strategic. After receiving the books and poring over the details, noting what I like and don’t like about each, I now know for sure what my final book will be. The pressure is off. I can now build toward my final vision. 

I now know what image works best for the cover. I know which paper is most suited to the photographs. I know what typeface works best with the story, and I know how to prep my files to get the desired look. All from taking the time to do the tests. 

Exactly how to make a test book

1. Start small. Choose a cheap format, a paperback (a.k.a trade book), a magazine, or a 7×7 softcover photo book. Small books lower the stakes.
2. Use a range of photos. Include a handful of black-and-white, toned black-and-white, and color images. Seeing all three on paper will tell you instantly how different styles respond to each paper type.
3. Add a quick type test. Take one line of text and print it at a bunch of different sizes. Use two or three fonts you’re considering (a serif, a sans-serif, maybe a monospaced option). This will show you what works best for captions, body text, and headers. 
4. Try several layout ideas. A full bleed spread. A bordered spread. A grid. A single image. Even one or two background color tests, if you’re curious. This is your lab.
5. Print multiples on different papers. Paper changes everything. For photo books, I like the Mohawk Superfine Eggshell and the Standard photo paper. For paperbacks and hardcovers, use the Standard Color paper with a matte and glossy cover. You’ll know immediately which direction feels right in your hands.
6. Review, refine, repeat. Circle what works. Cross out what doesn’t. Make notes in the margins. What works becomes your recipe for next time. And your jumping-off point for future project-based test books.

Using test books for actual projects

Once you’ve made a foundational test book and understand your materials, you can use test books as a creative tool for specific projects. Print a small slice of the real work, ten to twenty images, a bit of text, and a few unusual sequencing or layout ideas. Print several versions, trying different papers, covers, pacing, or type decisions. Each round brings you closer to the final book and takes the pressure off any lingering perfectionism.

In a nutshell

The creative process, at least for me, is as magical as the final product. How we get from start to finish is as much a part of the story as the ending itself. Test books are the natural stepping stones to great photography books, so next time you have a project in mind, visualize the puzzle pieces you think you need, assemble them in a small test book, and hit print. 

***

Dan Milnor is Blurb’s creative ambassador. He lives in the field, photographing, teaching, and making books and art alongside creators like you. Register for an account, and you’ll get his insights from over twenty years in the field in your inbox monthly. You can also find a long list of online events so you can learn from him in real time.

The post The joy of making test books (yes, Dan Milnor says joy) appeared first on Blurb Blog.

A Semester Abroad collects four months of images made during Bohdan’s exchange program in London, spanning eight countries and countless moments that would have otherwise lived unnoticed on a hard drive. Instead, Lee transformed them into a physical narrative—one that’s designed, sequenced, and printed with intention.

In this conversation, edited for length and clarity, Lee shares how the book came to life—editing on the road, experimenting with layout, hosting a launch event, and learning what it means to make art people can hold. Read the blog, or watch the YouTube video.

***

Want more inspiration like this? Sign up for emails to get a new Behind the Book delivered every month.

For anyone new to you, how do you describe yourself and your work?

I’m a 22-year-old photographer and travel filmmaker living in Vancouver, British Columbia. I just finished my undergraduate degree in marketing, and now the goal is to go full-time into creating—traveling, making videos, and taking photos.

Walk us through how you got started in photography and content creation.

The first time I realized I liked taking photos was when I got an iPod Touch at around 13 or 14. After a while, I decided I wanted a real camera. One of my friends had one, and I thought it was super cool, so I saved up all my money and bought a used Nikon. I used that for a few years until I realized I wanted to get into video, so I upgraded to a Sony. That’s when I started doing freelance and shooting events.

My friends encouraged me to post online, so I started posting on TikTok. I uploaded two videos and forgot about them. When I came back a few days later, they were doing decent, so I kept posting. I got to around 50,000 followers just doing it for fun—not making money, not getting brand deals. I enjoyed sharing my work and wanted to inspire people to get into photography.

One of the things I’m known for is my Lightroom series, where I explain each slider in one video. I hadn’t seen anything like that in short-form content before, so I thought it would be cool. It got a really good response. When I was getting into photography, I watched a ton of YouTube tutorials, so this series felt like a way of giving back using the platform I have.

When I went to university, I stopped posting because I wanted to focus more on my academics. After that first year, I realized I really missed creating content. Once I got consistent across both TikTok and Instagram, my channels started to pick up. After building a following and getting close to the end of my degree—and after a lot of events and freelance work—I felt pretty confident in my skills. Brand deals started coming in, and I worked with creative brands I still love working with today.

Why did you choose to study marketing?

I originally got into the University of British Columbia for the arts program, but transferred into business because I was already doing freelance photography. Marketing really helped me understand how the business world works and gave me an idea of how to market myself. You can be a great artist without business sense, but it’s harder to make money. 

How did you start with freelance work?

I first started doing freelance work by reaching out to companies and brands to see if they’d be interested in videos or photos. Eventually, I got into shooting events—especially events around Vancouver. I still do some freelance work here and there. 

I think it’s nice to mix content creation, which is mainly online, with in-person work because it’s more interesting to do both rather than just one. You can get bored with one easily, so I thought, why not do both? I still shoot events around Vancouver.

Tell us about how you decided to make a book. What sparked the idea?

Last September, I went on exchange to London as part of my university program and traveled to eight different countries. I really liked the images I created from those trips, but I knew most of them would just get lost on my hard drive, and maybe five percent would see my Instagram page. 

I wanted a way to make them more memorable, so I thought: Why not make a book? That’s how A Semester Abroad started. And it feels really meaningful because it’s a physical medium of my art that won’t get buried or forgotten the way digital files do.

How has your audience reacted to you releasing something physical when you’re primarily a digital creator?

The reaction was really good. A lot of creators are selling digital products, and I have some too, but I wanted to do something different and make a physical product. It stands out more because you can hold it and flip through it instead of just having it on your computer. 

I also hosted a launch event in Vancouver with a local café, and about 50 people came. It was amazing seeing people show up for the art, look through the book, buy it, and talk about photography. It created a real sense of community. I’m really glad my book was able to bring people together.

How did you choose Blurb and BookWright?

One of my friends showed me books he’d made with Blurb. He said you can also design the book in Blurb, which was cool, because I’m not really good at graphic design or InDesign. BookWright was pretty intuitive—I didn’t have to Google any tutorials. I just brought all my photos in, put them onto pages, and sorted them into chapters.

What was the design process like for you?

My girlfriend, who does graphic design, helped me brainstorm ways to make the pages more creative. After that, I got experimental and tried to make each page different, so the book wouldn’t feel repetitive. 

Importing photos, laying them out, designing, and writing the text took about five months. It was a process, but because it was my first book, I wanted to put in the time and effort to make it as good as possible.

How did you handle the culling and editing before designing?

I definitely had a lot of RAW images, but after each trip, I try to edit my photos as soon as possible because that’s when they’re most fresh in my memory, and I feel most inspired. By the time I started the book, I already had my selected, edited photos from those four months. The book includes around 300 edited photos.

What are some of your favorite design moments in the book?

The front cover took a while. Originally, I had the photo full-page, but didn’t love it. I changed to a minimalistic look: a photo centered on a white background with text above and below. 

Inside, I have a table of contents showing all the chapters. The beginning of each chapter has a small block of text at the top and a photo below it. I used the ruler tool to make sure everything aligned. 

Iceland is one of my favorite chapters—definitely one of my favorite trips. The landscapes were breathtaking, and the photos turned out really well. I love full spreads because you see details you don’t notice on a phone. 

I also liked arranging multiple images in ways you wouldn’t do digitally. On one page, I lined up several horizontal images across the spread. It draws your eye across the page in sequence, almost like an Instagram carousel but in print. 

On another, one page is normal, and the next is sideways, so you physically turn the book. The following page is vertical with horizontal images, so again, you interact with the book as an object.

Tell us about sequencing your work.

I tried to make pages that either contrast or complement each other. I’d put photos taken in similar lighting or at the same location together, or I’d pair two opposite colors across a spread to make it visually interesting and easier on the eyes.

There are also spreads where I used photos in ways I wouldn’t use them online. For example, one page pairs a wide shot of me walking under a tree with a close-up of a fern leaf. I’d never post the fern photo by itself on Instagram, but in the book, the blue and green colors complement each other, and the wide versus close-up contrast looks really good together.

What was it like seeing your printed proofs?

The colors look especially nice printed—matte but still pretty saturated—which makes them feel fuller than they do digitally.

I did two proofs, and I looked at the text size to make sure it was readable and checked how the photos were positioned, and made minor adjustments. I also read the book by flipping through it and changing some of the text so it flowed better. After that, I printed another proof before printing the 65 copies for my launch event and for selling to friends and family.

Why did you choose a 10×8-inch landscape softcover photo book?

Over the past year or two, I’ve started shooting a lot more landscape-oriented photos, so I wanted a landscape book that would make it easier to lay out full-page spreads and half-page spreads. I also like the feeling of it, as it feels more like an art piece.

I chose the 10×8-inch size because it’s similar to a sheet of paper and not too big. I went with standard paper and a softcover for affordability. I’m really happy with how it turned out, and choosing those options kept the price reasonable.

I wanted the book to be accessible and for as many people as possible to have it. I’m not focused on making a lot of money on the book—I just want people to enjoy the art.

How did you think about pricing?

The print cost was around $90, but with Blurb’s 50% deal, each copy ended up being about $65 after shipping and taxes. At my launch event, I sold copies to friends at cost and to others for $85. Online, it’s around $120. 

I only make about $20 in profit per book. I priced it that way to keep it accessible so everyone could get a copy.

What was your pre-launch and launch strategy?

I approached it the same way I promote my events or photo walks. I started by teasing the book a little on my Instagram Stories to get people intrigued. About three weeks to a month before the event—after I had secured the café I was collaborating with—I started posting about it on my feed and in Reels. 

I kept reminding people because it’s easy to forget something you saw once on social media. Constant reminders help, even if it feels annoying.

I also had an RSVP list so I could get an idea of how many people were coming. Collecting emails let me send reminders to the people who were most interested.

Now that the launch has happened, I’ll still promote it, but not as heavily. It’s nice to have the book in my portfolio of products, so when people click the link in my Instagram bio, they see everything I offer. I think it’s cool to show that I have a book because it’s not something a lot of social-media-based creators have.

What advice do you have for creators who want to make a book?

Have a body of work you want to highlight—something with a theme or story. Anyone can put a bunch of photos into a book, and it’ll look cool, but having a project with a narrative makes people more intrigued and invested. For me, the exchange semester naturally told a story.

What’s your advice for photographers who also want to grow as content creators?

Something I really stand by, even now, is: Always put your art first. A lot of people focus on making engaging videos, but not on improving their photography. The reason I started social media was because I loved photography and wanted to show people how cool the art form is. I prioritized shooting and improving my skills, and once I felt confident in my work, I shared it.

Even now, sometimes I could make a more “engaging” post with a catchy cover, but I’d rather post a photo as art because I love how it looks. Maybe it hurts the engagement a bit, but it feels true to me. When you stay true to your art, you find an audience that connects with it.

I also try not to put myself in one box. It’s easier to niche down, but I like experimenting with new techniques and different art forms. When I try something new, I share it because I want my audience to know what I’m doing, and I want them to like all the different kinds of work I make. When you make things that are true to yourself, you attract people who relate to that.

Find Bohdan Lee on Instagram, TikTok, and YouTube. Buy his book, prints, and Lightroom Presets too.

***

Blurb supports creators who see print as an extension of their practice. Whether you’re experimenting with a single copy or producing a full edition, Blurb provides the tools to design, refine, and bring your work to the page. Discover what you can make in print.

The post The photographer with a massive following proving not everything belongs on a screen appeared first on Blurb Blog.

In this post, we’ll show you how to use limited edition books to unlock new revenue and build brand authority. We’ll explore the psychology behind scarcity, the practical math of small-batch print runs, and the promotional tactics that help your limited edition sell out.

Why limited editions pay off 

The appeal of limited editions comes down to two powerful forces: human psychology and smart business strategy. We’re wired to want things that are scarce, unique, or collectible, and that desire makes small-batch books sell faster and command higher prices. 

But the benefits aren’t just emotional; they’re financial. Small runs reduce risk, improve margins, and give creators the freedom to experiment without the pressure of mass production. Put simply: Limited editions resonate with readers and pay off for the people who make them.

1. Scarcity drives value and urgency

Scarcity flips a switch in your audience. The moment someone knows there are only 50, 100, or 200 copies available, the energy shifts. A limited run turns a “maybe one day” purchase into a “get it before it’s gone” decision. Urgency accelerates demand and often leads to sellouts.

Blurb creator Jack Webster, creator of Racing Pilots (which we’ll talk about below), saw this firsthand when he released a limited-edition photography book to raise money for charity. With only 100 copies available, each signed by legendary Porsche race drivers, the edition didn’t just sell. It sold out in a week. His experience shows how a small-batch print run can generate rapid, decisive sales from the moment it’s announced.

2. Higher margins: limited editions compete on value, not volume

Here’s the good news: You don’t need thousands of copies to make a real profit. Small-batch book printing (runs of 50 to 200 copies) can be cost-effective and lucrative, especially with modern print-on-demand workflows. Once your book becomes an exclusive object, you’re no longer competing on volume but on value.

Premium touches also drive perceived worth. Every decision, from materials and format to packaging, helps justify a higher retail price and a healthier margin. Think linen covers, layflat pages, glossy dust jackets, or archival-feel papers. These aren’t just design choices; they signal a collectible artifact, not a mass-market product.

A quick margin example: A hardcover linen photo book with a dust jacket might cost around 32 dollars per copy to print. Because it looks and feels premium, it can retail for 75 to 100 dollars or more, especially when paired with numbering, signatures, or limited-run packaging. Even at low volumes, the margin holds. And volume discounts help stretch profit even further.

When you think like both artist and entrepreneur, limited editions become a smart business move.

3. Lower risk: Less overhead and zero dead stock

Another advantage of small runs? You’re not sitting on boxes of books in your garage.

Print in batches of 50, 100, or 200, and you’ll:

• reduce upfront costs
• avoid overprinting
• sell through faster (so you can move on to your next project more quickly)

As Blurb’s creative ambassador, Dan Milnor notes, the era of 5,000-copy print runs is largely behind us. Most creator-driven books today fall into the 200 to 500-copy range. And sometimes, the right placement matters more than raw volume. Milnor’s own single-edition journals have been placed in museum collections, which has significantly elevated his personal brand. 

His advice? “Print 200. Place fifty. Sell the rest. That’s a sustainable model for making books—and continuing to make more.”

4. Brand and collector appeal: Build credibility, loyalty, and long-term value

The payoff from a limited edition doesn’t stop when the last copy ships. These books do more than generate sales; they build equity in your brand. Every numbered, signed, or beautifully finished copy reinforces how your audience sees you: professional, premium, and worth collecting. A well-executed limited edition or series signals that you care about craft and detail, and those impressions compound over time. They strengthen your reputation and open new doors long after your initial run sells out.

Establish your brand as premium, artistic, and collectible: A limited edition positions your work as something to invest in, not just consume. It places your book in the same creative territory as fine art and high-end design—thoughtful, curated, and built to last. Over time, that perception influences everything else, your commissions, collaborations, demand, and pricing power.

Strengthen customer loyalty through exclusivity: Owning a signed or numbered edition feels intimate. Buyers become part of a small circle connected by shared taste and appreciation for your work. That sense of belonging turns customers into advocates; the kind who tell friends, post photos, and eagerly return for whatever you release next.

Create press-worthy moments: Limited editions make great stories. They’re inherently newsworthy, whether it’s a collaboration, an anniversary release, or a creative experiment. These small-batch drops offer built-in buzz and organic PR opportunities that cost nothing but creativity and good timing.

Build an archive of your brand journey: Each limited edition becomes a milestone, a snapshot of your evolution as a creator. Over time, these books form a visual record of your growth, your partnerships, and your shifting style. It’s tangible proof of your longevity, taste, and commitment to your craft.

5. Creative freedom: smaller runs encourage experimentation

Finally, limited editions give you permission to explore. Because you’re printing fewer copies, you can experiment more boldly with formats, materials, storytelling techniques, and packaging ideas that wouldn’t be viable at a mass-production scale.

Want to try an unconventional trim size? Archival papers? Hybrid photo-text formats? Hand-wrapped packaging or inserts? Small-batch printing makes that possible. You can innovate project by project, gathering real-world feedback without the pressure of distributing thousands of copies.

And when a limited edition sells out, you get to start again; smarter, freer, and creatively refreshed.

Real stories, real profits: limited editions in action

Creators across all disciplines are using limited edition books to tell their stories, build community, and generate new streams of income. From fine art and photography to design and architecture, these limited releases prove that when creativity meets exclusivity, the results can be both meaningful and profitable.

1. Studio Allotment: Behind the Scenes of Still Life by Allan Jenkins

Fine art photographer Allan Jenkins produced Studio Allotment: Behind the Scenes of Still Life as a limited edition of just 60 signed and numbered copies. Printed on Mohawk Superfine Eggshell paper in a Large Landscape format, the book brings a gallery-level, tactile experience to collectors.  For Jenkins, creating a limited run is central to how he shares his work. Being able to put a project into book form, he explains, allows him to “encapsulate each project and then promote the work to [his] collectors.”

By offering a small-run edition, Jenkins not only preserves the intimacy of his fine art practice but also gives his collectors something truly exclusive: a physical extension of the gallery experience that doubles as both portfolio and promotion.

2. Racing Pilots by Jack Webster

Motorsports photographer Jack Webster has created multiple limited edition runs of Racing Pilots – The Motorsports Photography of Jack Webster as both fundraising and promotional tools. Signed and numbered versions of his book allow him to support causes he believes in while offering something truly distinctive to partners and vendors. 

His latest edition of 500 books, sold exclusively through the International Motor Racing Research Center, comes with four signed and numbered photos and a certificate of authenticity. By making his editions collectible, Webster drives sales while also supporting a charitable cause, demonstrating how exclusivity can carry both artistic and social impact.

3. Washington, D.C. Historic Architecture Guide by Elena Tibbetts

Filmmaker and photographer Elena Tibbets created the Washington, DC Historic Architecture Guide as a printed extension of her broader DomoNaut project, translating her poetic documentary films into a more intimate, tactile format. 

Funded through a community-driven Kickstarter campaign, she printed a limited run of signed first editions for her backers, each one hand-wrapped in brown postal paper and finished with a handwritten note of thanks. The hardcover edition has since sold out, proof of how a small, thoughtfully crafted print run can become a highly sought-after collectible.

More creative ideas to inspire your next special edition book

Limited edition books aren’t just for photographers and artists, they fit nearly every creative niche. Whether you’re in food, fashion, design, or entertainment, there’s a way to turn your craft into a collector’s item. Here are some examples of how different industries can use limited runs to elevate their brand and open up new revenue streams.

Restaurants and food creatives

• Seasonal recipe books celebrating local ingredients and behind-the-scenes kitchen stories
• Anniversary “best-of” editions signed by the chef and filled with fan favorites
• Collaborative, numbered cookbooks created with local farms, wineries, or producers

Fashion boutiques and designers

• Capsule collection lookbooks printed in small, numbered editions
• Behind-the-scenes sketchbooks signed by the designer and filled with process notes
• Collector’s zines styled like luxury fashion magazines and released with each new drop

Tattoo artists and calligraphists

• Collector’s edition flash sheet books featuring your signature style
• Hand-lettered showcases that highlight your most intricate typography
• Story-driven portfolios that share client histories and creative process

Agencies and architecture firms

• Portfolio retrospectives that celebrate your studio’s standout projects
• Coffee-table books that showcase your design vision and authority
• Exclusive client gifts that spark conversation and keep your brand top of mind

Music and entertainment venues

• Photographic retrospectives that showcase the best moments from iconic live performances
• Artist-signed tour books that give fans a personal, collectible memento
• Special event books released with exclusive merch drops for extra hype

Wineries and breweries

• Seasonal harvest journals featuring tasting notes and vineyard stories
• Behind-the-scenes books that capture the people, process, and passion behind each batch
• Numbered editions bundled with special-release bottles or exclusive tasting experiences

Ready to design your own special edition? Bring your next project to life in print. Create a free Blurb account.

Create your own limited edition book

Ready to start? Here’s how to plan a small-batch project that looks beautiful, sells well, and feels authentically yours.

1. Choose the right content

Start by identifying the work that genuinely deserves a limited run. Ask yourself:

• What body of work do people consistently respond to?
• Is this a project with emotional, artistic, or cultural resonance resonance 
• Does it represent a milestone, a chapter, or a clear evolution in my practice?

Strong candidates might include your best photographic series, behind-the-scenes studies of a long-term project, or a gallery companion. 

Remember, limited editions benefit from focus. Choose one story or theme and build the book as a cohesive art object, not a catch-all portfolio.

Next, test your initial ideas with your audience. You could try:

• Sharing early concepts or spreads on your social channels to see what sparks the most engagement.
• Polling your followers or email subscribers to ask what sort of book they’d be most excited to own.
• Running a private preview for Patreon members or loyal buyers to gather specific feedback.

You can then use pre-orders or platforms like Kickstarter as a next-level validation of your concept. If your idea sells quickly, you’ve validated demand before printing a single copy. If interest is slow, you can refine, reposition, or refocus before committing to a run.

2. Set your pricing strategy and budget

Remember, limited edition books are competing on meaning, not price. Anchor your retail price around scarcity, craftsmanship, and perceived value, not just production cost. Premium features like linen covers and archival paper add cost, but they also justify higher prices and elevate the experience. Here’s how to price your limited edition book with confidence.

• Start with the base production cost. Use Blurb’s pricing calculator to work out the cost of printing one copy of your book with your chosen format, paper type, cover, and final page count. This will be the lowest you could charge while breaking even.
• Decide on your profit target. This is where you decide how much you’d like to earn per book. This will depend on the primary goal of your project. Is it a revenue driver or a visibility, portfolio, or archive piece? 
• Add a value-based markup. This is where limited edition books shine. People expect to pay more for something that’s rare and feels like an art object. Take into account the craftsmanship behind your book, its cultural relevance, the innate value and prestige of any contributors (including yourself!), and any extras you’re adding post-print, like signed pages, hand-numbered pages, or inserts. 
• Check the market. Look at how similar brands and creators price their work. You’ll also want to look back at your audience’s past purchasing history for reference. 

For more in-depth tips, check out our book pricing guide. 

3. Pick your format

Different formats suit different goals. Your choice should reflect both your creative intent and your buyer’s expectations.

Which book format for which project?

• Coffee-table / Large Landscape: Perfect for photography, architecture, portfolios, or cinematic imagery. Creates immediate premium perception.
• Layflat books: Ideal for double-page spreads, panoramic work, or detailed artwork. Higher print costs, but even higher perceived value.
• Classic paperback books: Great for narrative storytelling, poetry, or artist statements. Affordable and easy to share.
• Zines: Perfect for limited-run sketchbooks, reportage, field notes, or artist experiments. Collectible, approachable, and fast to produce.

4. Decide how to sell

There’s no one-size-fits-all model. Your sales strategy should match your target audience and your business goals. Here are a few routes to consider:

Print-on-demand

Print-on-demand gives you the flexibility to list your book for sale through a variety of online platforms, including:

• Your own website or online store
• In the Blurb Bookstore: list your book for free and send buyers there from your site, socials, or email newsletter
• On Amazon.com: set your book up for sale where people already shop. Just remember to include the listing fees in your pricing calculations 
• Through Ingrams’ global distribution network: This is a great way to get your book into independent bookstores and libraries around the world. Again, be sure to include the distribution fees in your costs. 

In-person experiences

When people can look through your book, talk to you, and even see more of the work behind it, the book becomes so much more than a product; it becomes an experience. Think gallery signings, exhibition launches, art fairs and book festivals, or pop-up events with local creatives and organisations. These environments are ideal for selling limited editions because the personal interaction elevates the perceived value and often leads to impulse purchases. 

This model works especially well for photographers, illustrators, designers, and documentary creators whose work benefits from being seen and discussed in person.

Partner-driven

Working with relevant partners to share and sell your book can help you reach new audiences and establish credibility by placing your project in environments where collectors and enthusiasts naturally gather. You could consider collaborations with museums, cultural centres, or nonprofits, or retail partnerships with independent bookstores.

This route is ideal if your long-term goals include visibility, prestige, or establishing your work within artistic or cultural communities.

Collector-only drops

Collector drops double down on the exclusivity of limited editions. By offering a limited edition only to your closest supporters, whether they’re patrons, clients, curators, or long-time fans, you reinforce the sense that your work is valuable, sought-after, and reserved for a select few. This approach often leads to fast sell-outs because buyers know access is limited by design.

Some creators release very small runs exclusively to:

• VIP clients
• Patreon patrons
• curators and editors
• existing collectors

This model rewards your most dedicated supporters and builds anticipation for your next release.

5. Market with story, not volume

People don’t buy limited editions just because they’re “books.” They buy them because they’re stories made tangible. When you tell that story well, the sales follow naturally.

Start by thinking about the inspiration and intent behind your project. Why does this edition exist? What makes it limited? Who is it for? What inspired the materials or format? What will the owner feel proud to display or keep?

Next, consider how you can bring that story to life across your marketing channels:

• Create behind-the-scenes reels or making-of videos
• Explain your material choices (paper, size, wrap, extras)
• Reveal edition numbers or signature pages
• Show the book being wrapped, packed, or signed
• Share early collector reactions or testimonials

Elena Tibbets (who we met above) leaned fully into this storytelling-first approach while promoting her Washington, D.C. Historic Architecture Guide. She focused on the kind of content she knew her audience already loved: short behind-the-scenes videos, slow-paced reels, and honest glimpses into her creative process. Instead of pushing a promo-heavy campaign, she built her Kickstarter around authenticity and obsession, showing the hours, the detail, and the emotional investment behind her project.

As Tibbets puts it, the most effective marketing is simple: show your process, not just your product. Let people see why you care, and they’ll care too.

Marketing tactics: How to promote limited edition books

You’ve poured your time and talent into creating a beautiful limited edition, now it’s time to make sure it gets seen (and sells out). The right marketing tactics can turn a limited run into a moment: something that feels exciting, exclusive, and worth talking about. 

Whether you’re promoting your book online, in person, or both, these tactics help build anticipation, drive urgency, and connect your audience emotionally to your work.

Pre-orders: Build anticipation while funding your print run

Announce early and bring your audience along for the ride. Show sneak peeks of spreads, materials, or finishes, and give early buyers a small reward, like low edition numbers or a signed insert. Pre-orders create early buzz, help you gauge demand, and can even fund your production costs before the books arrive.

Countdowns: Create a sense of urgency

A simple countdown goes a long way. Build a launch rhythm: announcement, behind-the-scenes, proofs, unboxing, final reminder. Each moment keeps your audience engaged while reinforcing that this edition won’t be around forever. Clear deadlines help people act now rather than later.

Invite-only launch events: Make it feel special

Nothing sells a limited edition like an experience. Host a small gallery evening, pop-up, or studio event where people can flip through the book, meet you, and see the process behind it. If you’re launching online, do a live video walkthrough: show the texture, the weight, the detail. Limited edition books deserve a personal touch, and your audience will remember that moment.

Giveaways and collaborations: Build buzz through community

Partner with other creators, local businesses, or influencers whose audiences overlap with yours. A giveaway (like a signed book plus a small print) spreads awareness organically and introduces your work to new fans. Collaboration also brings credibility; you’re connecting creative worlds in a way that feels authentic and generous.

Bundles: Add value through experiences

Create bundle tiers that feel thoughtful rather than salesy. Offer the book alone, the book plus a signed print, or a premium bundle with extras like a behind-the-scenes zine or digital content. Bundles increase perceived value, boost average order value, and make the buying experience more memorable.

With a clear plan and a few creative touches, your launch can feel like an event that people want to be part of, not just buy from. Discover more ideas to help you plan, promote, and share your work. 

Ready to keep the buzz rolling after launch? Dive into our integrated marketing guide for stackable tactics that build momentum.

Turn your next project into a collectible experience

Limited edition books let you unlock untapped revenue while elevating your work into a timeless, collectible piece that cements your brand as premium. With small-batch print runs, thoughtful finishes, and a defined story, you sell fewer copies at higher margins, and give people something they’re proud to own and love to show off.

Reimagine your next project as a collectible experience: numbered and signed, beautifully made, and launched with intention. Let it carry your craft further, build loyalty that lasts, and signal the quality your brand stands for.

***

Blurb makes it easy to bring that vision to life with premium materials, intuitive design tools, and print-on-demand that fits your workflow. Ready to put your best work in print? Create your free account and get started today.

The post <strong>How to make limited edition books your next big revenue stream</strong> appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Whether you’re an illustrator looking to stretch your storytelling muscles, a designer ready to build your own world, or a hobbyist doodler with characters who won’t stay on the page, making and self-publishing a graphic novel is more accessible than ever.

In this guide, we’ll walk you through how to make a graphic novel from first sketch to finished book, sharing the creative process, practical tools, and professional tips to help you bring your story to life and into print.

What is a graphic novel?

A graphic novel is storytelling through art, where words and visuals work together to create an immersive, emotional, and entirely unique experience. Using illustration, dialogue, and design, it draws readers into a world where every brushstroke, panel, and pause carries meaning.

Unlike traditional novels, the visuals don’t just accompany the story—they are the story. Each panel, color choice, and expression shapes pacing, emotion, and tone, transforming reading into a visual experience that feels alive on the page.

So, what makes a good graphic novel? Here are some of our top tips:

• Panels and layouts guide the rhythm and flow of the story. Panels set the pace, controlling how time moves and how readers experience each moment. Wide panels can slow the action and draw attention to detail, while smaller frames build energy and momentum. Thoughtful layouts guide the reader’s eye naturally, creating rhythm and emotion through design alone.
  
• Expressive storytelling that conveys mood, action, and emotion. Graphic novels rely on imagery to do the heavy lifting. Through color, composition, and gesture, you can instantly communicate tension, intimacy, or atmosphere. A single panel can reveal more than pages of prose when your visuals carry the emotion, pace, and depth of the story.
  
• Dialogue and narration that merge seamlessly with the visuals. In a great graphic novel, text and art work as one. Dialogue, captions, and narration should feel integrated, never competing for attention. The tone, placement, and flow of your text help shape how the story reads, ensuring words enhance the visuals rather than interrupt them.

Graphic novels vs comic books

It’s a question that comes up often: What is the difference between graphic novels and comic books?

They share the same visual language, but their goals and the experiences they create differ a little. Graphic novels are usually self-contained stories, complete with a beginning, middle, and end. They invite you into a fully realized world and let you stay there, no cliffhangers required.

Comic books, on the other hand, are often serialized. They’re shorter, episodic chapters (typically 20–40 pages) that build toward a larger story across multiple issues. They’re the weekly rhythm of a saga, not the full symphony.

And while both can span any genre, graphic novels often lean into deeper or more complex themes, from memoir and history to politics, identity, and love, showing just how versatile visual storytelling can be.

Think of it this way: comic books are the chapters, but a graphic novel is the whole film, directed, drawn, and written by you.

Leaning toward an episodic format? Explore our guide on how to start a comic book.

Why create a graphic novel?

A graphic novel is one of the few media where visual art and storytelling meet on equal ground. It’s where imagination finds structure, and emotion takes form, giving you the freedom to tell stories that words alone can’t capture.

• Tell a personal story: Graphic novels let you explore themes, emotions, and memories, turning them into something intimate and expressive.
• Explore your creativity: For visual creators, a graphic novel is pure freedom. You already think in shapes, colors, and motion, and now you can use those instincts to build a story shaped by your own unique style.
• Make a cultural statement: Graphic novels have the power to move culture and redefine storytelling. Works like Maus, Persepolis, and Fun Home show how illustration can carry history, identity, and emotion to make an impact that lasts.
• Let your artwork take the lead: In a graphic novel, your art takes the spotlight, driving the story from the very first frame. Your drawings lead the narrative, guiding tone, mood, and meaning, while the words follow your visual rhythm.
• Create professional opportunities: By self-publishing a graphic novel, you can grow an audience that connects with your work, sell directly to your fans, and use it as a standout portfolio piece that opens doors to new clients and collaborations.

How to make a graphic novel: your step-by-step guide

So, how do you turn an idea into a finished book? Whether you’re creating your first indie project or producing something ready for clients, here’s a creative roadmap to help you go from concept to completed graphic novel, one step at a time.

1. Brainstorm

Every great graphic novel begins with an idea: a story, a feeling, or an image that won’t leave you alone. This is your chance to explore what excites you creatively before structure comes into play.

Ask yourself: What story do I need to tell? What themes resonate with me?

Collect everything that sparks inspiration. Create a moodboard filled with sketches, notes, photos, or Pinterest references. Let visuals, textures, and colors help shape the tone of your story.

Pro tip: Think about the visual hook of your novel; the element that makes it instantly recognizable. It could be your art style, a distinctive character design, or an unexpected setting that draws readers in from the first page.

2. Define your audience, purpose, and publishing goal 

Before you dive into scripts and storyboards, pause and think about who your graphic novel is for, why you’re making it, and how you’ll publish. Clarity here gives your project a foundation to grow from. It shapes how your story looks, feels, and connects, and keeps you grounded when creative decisions start to multiply. 

Here are a few top tips to save and come back to: 

Know your audience

Who will connect most with your story? Teens seeking adventure, adult readers drawn to memoir, fantasy lovers, or designers who love visual storytelling?

Understanding your audience helps you make creative choices with intention, from your color palette and panel style to your dialogue and tone. Think about what experience you want your readers to have: excitement, nostalgia, introspection, or escape. Then design every element to deliver exactly that.

Clarify your purpose

Every great creative project starts with a “why.” Are you telling a personal story? Exploring a new artistic style? Building a professional portfolio to attract clients or collaborators?

Knowing your purpose keeps your project focused. It’s the thread that ties together your story, design, and even how you share your work once it’s complete.

Set a publishing and marketing plan early

Think early about how your book will live in the world. Will you self-publish, crowdfund, or pitch to a publisher? Each path shapes how you prepare your artwork and connect with readers.

Start building your audience as you create. Share sneak peeks, sketches, or process shots on social media, newsletters, or creative platforms like DeviantArt, Webtoon Canvas, or Reddit’s r/comicbooks. The more people follow your journey, the more invested they’ll be when your book is ready. 

From there, build a pre-launch, launch, and post-launch plan. Talk to other creators to see how they did it or your publisher to make sure your marketing plan is setting you and your book up for success. A little marketing mindset now saves a lot of time later, and helps your story reach the right hands.

Pro tip: The most successful indie creators grow their audience alongside their art, before they publish. Sharing your creative process not only builds anticipation but also builds connection. This turns your community into your biggest supporters when your graphic novel finally launches.

3. Outline your story

Understanding how to write a graphic novel starts with structure and character development, so before you even start sketching, map out the framework of your story. 

Map the beginning, middle, and end

Start by defining the arc of your narrative: How it begins, what challenges unfold, and how it resolves. Even a simple structure gives your creativity direction and helps you see the big picture.

Identify story arcs: conflict, climax, resolution

Think about the turning points that drive your characters and shape the emotional journey. Where does tension rise? What moment changes everything? Where does it land? These beats give your story rhythm and depth.

Create an outline of major events and milestones that shape character development

Sketch out the key scenes that mark growth, struggle, or transformation. This roadmap doesn’t need to be perfect—it just needs to keep you grounded as your world takes shape, panel by panel.

4. Write the script

Your script is the bridge between story and art—part screenplay, part visual roadmap. It helps you plan how your narrative will unfold on the page and decide what to show, what to say, and what to leave unsaid.

Break down your story into pages and panels

Think of each page as a scene and each panel as a moment within it. This structure helps you manage pacing, tension, and flow.

Write dialogue, narration, and stage directions

Include what characters say, what they think, and any visual cues or movement you want to capture, just like a film script. Keep it concise and purposeful, allowing space for your artwork to carry emotion and tone.

Use tools that suit your workflow

Whether you prefer Scrivener, simple spreadsheets, or Word docs, find a system that keeps your script organized by scene and page. The clearer your plan, the smoother your creative process will be once you start illustrating.

5. Storyboard

This is where your story truly comes alive on the page. Ideas move from imagination to structure, and your narrative begins to take visual form. 

Plan your flow

Start by creating rough sketches of each page to plan how your panels will flow and how your reader’s eye will move through the story. Think of this as your blueprint; the first look at how your narrative will feel visually.

Experiment with layout and emotion

Play with panel size, shape, and angles to set the rhythm of your story. Wide panels can slow a scene and build atmosphere, while smaller or overlapping frames create momentum and tension. Each layout choice shapes mood and pacing, helping you guide the reader’s emotional journey.

As you design, remember to keep page gutters and print-safe areas in mind, especially if you plan to print your graphic novel. Important details like text, faces, or key visual elements should stay clear of the trim edges to avoid being cut off. A little foresight here ensures your layouts look just as polished on paper as they do on screen.

Refine your visual storytelling

Storyboarding lets you see how your pacing feels visually and spot gaps in your narrative before committing to final artwork. It’s your opportunity to refine flow, balance, and clarity early on.

6. Choose your size and format

Before you dive into sketching layouts or final artwork, pause and think about the physical shape your story will take. 

Your book’s size and format set the tone for your reader’s experience, so think about your audience and how they’ll engage with it. Are they collectors who’ll treasure a premium edition to display, or casual readers who’ll appreciate something light and portable they can take anywhere?

• Standard comic size (around 6.625×10.25 inches). The traditional choice for Western comics is perfect for bold action, sharp pacing, and that familiar page-turning rhythm.
  
• Manga size (Tankōbon, slightly smaller, 5×7.5 inches). Compact and portable, great for intimate or character-driven stories that readers can slip into a bag and take anywhere. (Try Blurb’s 5×8-inch paperback book.)
  
• Square or landscape formats. Ideal for experimental or art-led work where visuals take center stage. These formats invite readers to linger on each panel, making them perfect for children’s stories or design-focused narratives. (Our softcover photo books make a beautiful match.)

Orientation and layout

Your orientation shapes not just how your story looks, but how it feels to read. It defines the rhythm of your panels, the energy of your pacing, and the way your reader’s eye moves across the page; so take a moment to choose what best fits your creative vision.

• Portrait keeps the focus on vertical panel flow, making it perfect for traditional narratives, dialogue-heavy scenes, and emotional storytelling.
  
• Landscape creates a wide, cinematic feel; ideal for expansive worlds, detailed environments, and stories that unfold like a film reel, full of visual depth and atmosphere.

7. Design and artwork

Now your creative vision really comes to life. Whether you prefer the tactile feel of traditional media or the precision of digital design tools like Adobe Illustrator, this stage defines how to create a graphic novel that feels cohesive and professional. Before you dive in, map out a workflow that keeps your process organized and your art consistent.

• Start with character studies to explore expressions, body language, and overall style.
• Define your color palette early to maintain a unified tone and mood throughout the book.
• Begin with rough sketches to establish composition and pacing.
• Refine with clean line work, whether with ink on paper or vector/brush tools in your chosen digital software to create expressive, polished artwork.
• Add color and finishing touches to bring each scene to life, using paint, markers, or washes for hand-drawn work, or layers, textures, and effects in digital programs. 

To move from paper to digital, scan your artwork at 300 dpi for print-quality results that preserve every detail. And for the best possible color accuracy, calibrate your monitor before editing or preparing files, so the hues you see on screen match what appears in print.

Learn more about color precision in our color management and printing guide.

No matter your approach, choose a consistent art and illustration style that reflects your story’s tone. Cohesion in color, line work, and design helps your world feel unified and professional from the first page to the last.

Pro tip: If illustration isn’t your strength, consider collaborating with an artist whose style complements your vision. A creative partnership can bring new energy and perspective to your project, blending your storytelling with their visual voice to create something truly distinctive. 

Popular graphic art styles

Each art style creates a distinct visual identity, so make sure to choose one that complements your story’s tone, genre, and message.

• Line art and ink-heavy: A classic comic look defined by high contrast, strong outlines, and dramatic shadows. Perfect for action, noir, and superhero stories where bold visuals drive intensity. Read: Sin City by Frank Miller and Watchmen by Alan Moore.
  
• Painterly / watercolor
  Soft, textured, and atmospheric, this style conveys emotion through brushwork and tone. Ideal for introspective or character-driven stories where mood matters as much as plot. For inspiration, explore Blankets by Craig Thompson and Daytripper by Fábio Moon and Gabriel Bá.
  
• Minimalist
  Simplified shapes, limited palettes, and deliberate design choices focus attention on symbolism and composition—a great fit for experimental, conceptual, or abstract storytelling. Take a look at Persepolis by Marjane Satrapi or Scott Pilgrim by Bryan Lee O’Malley.
  
• Manga / anime-inspired
  Expressive character designs, dynamic paneling, and heightened emotion create a cinematic, fast-paced feel. Works beautifully across fantasy, romance, drama, or action genres. Akira by Katsuhiro Otomo and Death Note by Takeshi Obata are classic examples of this style.
  
• Digital / vector-based styles
  Clean lines, flat colors, and scalable design make this a modern choice for indie creators and web-first publishing. It’s crisp, contemporary, and easy to adapt across platforms.

8. Lettering and text placement

When mastering the craft of making a graphic novel, typography matters. It shapes how your story feels and how smoothly readers move through it. 

• Choose fonts that suit your art style, but always prioritize readability. Clean sans-serif fonts are modern, versatile, and unobtrusive, while hand-lettered styles can add warmth and personality to match your tone.
• Consider using different styles for dialogue, narration, and sound effects to help readers differentiate between voices and moments. You can even assign distinct fonts to individual characters for subtle personality cues.
• Place word balloons and captions strategically so they follow the natural movement of the reader’s eye, supporting, not interrupting, the flow of your panels. Every placement choice affects rhythm, pacing, and emotional impact.

Pro tip: If lettering isn’t your strong suit, consider collaborating with a professional letterer or typographer. A skilled collaborator can help balance text with imagery, ensure readability across formats, and elevate the overall look of your book.

Learn more about the art and craft of typography in our typography guide.

9. Edit, refine, and proof

Once your pages are complete, take time to step back and view your graphic novel as a whole. Review the pacing, consistency in your artwork, and clarity of your story. Does each scene flow naturally? Do your visuals and dialogue work together to keep the reader engaged?

Seek feedback from peers, beta readers, or creative communities who understand visual storytelling. Fresh perspectives can reveal pacing issues, character inconsistencies, or design details you may have missed after working closely on the project.

Even small refinements, like tightening dialogue, adjusting panel balance, or fine-tuning colors, can elevate your book from a great idea to a professional, cohesive final work.

10. Formatting for print 

You’ve done the creative work, now it’s time to get your graphic novel ready for print. Paying attention to the technical details means your final book looks as sharp and professional as it deserves to. 

Technical requirements:

• Image resolution: 300 dpi for print-quality images
  
• Book size: Use standard comic or graphic novel formats, or set custom dimensions that suit your design
  
• Bleed and trim: Follow your printer’s bleed and trim guidelines to make sure artwork extends cleanly to the edge of the page
  
• Building your book: Create print-ready PDFs from your preferred design tools and upload to print. Or use a book design software like Blurb BookWright or the Blurb plugin for Adobe InDesign. 

Pro tip: Blurb’s PDF Uploader tool makes it easy to make a graphic novel online, ensuring your layouts appear just as you designed them: clean, accurate, and high quality.

11. Set up for self-publishing 

It’s time to share your story with the world. Publishing your graphic novel is where creativity meets possibility, turning your passion project into something readers can buy, hold, and treasure.

Choose how to sell your book

With print-on-demand, you decide how your story reaches its audience. Here are your options:

• Distribute through Ingram to put your graphic novel in independent bookstores and libraries across the globe. You’ll need to include distribution fees in your cost calculations above.
  
• List on Amazon so readers everywhere can discover and purchase your book with ease. Don’t forget to account for listing fees in your pricing strategy.
  
• Sell for free directly through the Blurb Bookstore or on your own website—a simple, creator-friendly way to share your work with your community and fans.
  
• Sell in person at events. Comic cons, book fairs, and artist markets are ideal venues for connecting directly with readers and making sales. If you’re planning to sell at multiple events, consider a larger print run to take advantage of volume discounts and lower your per-copy cost.
  
• All of the above!

Each option gives you the freedom and flexibility to launch a small, limited-edition run for collectors or build a broader audience for your creative brand. This is your moment to take your story beyond the page and into readers’ hands.

Add an ISBN

If you plan to sell your graphic novel, you’ll need an ISBN: your book’s unique identifier in the publishing world. It helps bookstores, libraries, and distributors catalogue and sell your work professionally. Adding one gives your book a traceable identity and positions it alongside other published titles.

ISBNs are automatically added to paperback and hardcover books made with Blurb. Learn more about adding an ISBN to your Blurb book.

Set your price

Pricing your graphic novel is both creative and strategic, where your artistry meets entrepreneurship. Start by factoring in:

• Printing costs (your chosen size, format, and paper type)
  
• Listing or distribution fees (if applicable)
  
• Your desired profit margin

Then, think about your audience. Are you creating a premium collectible for devoted fans, or a beautifully designed zine meant to reach a wider audience? And what price are they willing to pay for your book? Your pricing should reflect the story you’re telling and the value you’ve built into every page—and what the market can support.

For more advice and guidance on how to price your book, check out our book pricing guide. 

12. Launch and market your graphic novel

Publishing your book is just the beginning. Launching it is where the magic happens. Marketing doesn’t have to feel overwhelming or overly salesy. It’s simply about sharing your passion and letting others experience the world you’ve built. 

With a little planning and consistency, you can build real momentum before, during, and long after release.

1. Build buzz before you publish

Start talking about your project early! Readers love seeing the creative process unfold.

• Share sketches, behind-the-scenes moments, and snippets of your story on social media.
• Start a simple email newsletter to share progress updates, concept art, or creative insights.
• Post teasers or character reveals that reflect your unique art style to build intrigue and anticipation.
• Invite your audience into the process: share a few cover concepts or title options and ask for their input.

Pro tip: Small, consistent updates beat one big announcement. Posting once a week keeps your project on people’s radar and your audience invested in the journey.

2. Create a professional launch plan

Treat your release like a creative event: something worth celebrating.

• Pick a launch date and plan backward, giving yourself at least 4–6 weeks for teaser content.
• Create a press kit that includes your synopsis, short bio, and a few sample pages.
• Send early review copies to bloggers, YouTubers, or reviewers who spotlight indie comics and graphic novels.
• Announce your launch across every platform you use, from your newsletter and website to online creative communities.

This is your moment to build excitement and give your book the professional debut it deserves.

3. Tap into social media and creative communities

Your readers are already out there—you just need to reach them. Here’s how:

• Join creative spaces like Reddit (r/comicbooks, r/IndieComics), Discord servers, or Facebook groups where artists share work and feedback.
• Collaborate with other creators on cross-promotions, interviews, or livestreams. Community builds momentum a lot faster than a solo effort.

Use each platform for what it does best:

• Instagram & TikTok: Show process videos, time-lapse drawings, or panel reveals.
• X (Twitter): Engage with other artists, reviewers, and fans.
• YouTube: Share your process, “making-of” videos, or reflections on your creative journey.

4. Build long-term visibility

A successful launch is just the beginning. Keep your story alive by continuing to share:

• Behind-the-scenes sketches, deleted scenes, or art studies.
• Insights from your process: what you learned, what you’d do differently next time.
• News about events, festivals, or indie comic awards you’re submitting to (Blurb offers volume discounts for event-ready prints).

For more tips on how to promote and market your book, check out our blog. 

Graphic novel examples (and what makes them great)

1. Mixed Up by Clare Conteh-Morgan 

In Mixed Up, Clare Conteh-Morgan explores identity, privilege, and belonging through the lens of her lived experience as a white-presenting biracial woman. This beautifully illustrated mini-memoir is both introspective and universal; a journey of self-discovery told through expressive artwork and candid reflection. Each page invites the reader to pause, think, and feel, capturing the layered complexities of race and identity with quiet power.

2. Nudes Nudes Nudes by Edgar Alanis

Playful, irreverent, and surprisingly educational, Nudes, Nudes, Nudes (In Art History) is a witty retelling of some of art history’s most iconic depictions of the nude. Originally created as part of Edgar Alanis’s MFA thesis at the Fashion Institute of Technology, this graphic novel uses comics to make fine art feel fun, fresh, and accessible.

With humor and heart, Alanis “lowbrows the highbrow,” blending academic insight with everyday language to make centuries-old masterpieces come alive. His work celebrates curiosity, queerness, and culture: a reflection of his voice as a Mexican American illustrator who believes art should be both honest and relatable.

Explore more of his work at honestlyedgar.com.

3. – by Lauren Cohen

Set in Brooklyn’s Greenwood Cemetery, – follows a female artist navigating love, loneliness, and creative life in New York City, with the ghost of composer Leonard Bernstein as her unlikely confidant. Lauren Cohen’s introspective, sensual drawings capture the surreal mix of chaos, beauty, and vulnerability that defines both art and modern womanhood. Her hand-drawn self-portraits, raw and relatable, have evolved into a visual diary of emotion, feminism, and self-exposure, where the personal becomes universal. Her art channels influences from The Little Prince to Shel Silverstein, inviting readers into a space that feels at once whimsical and deeply human.

FAQs

How long does it take to make a graphic novel?

Every project has its own rhythm. A solo creator working part-time might spend 6–18 months or longer bringing a full-length graphic novel to life, while smaller zine-style projects can come together in just a few weeks.

Set yourself realistic milestones, like 10 pages per month, to keep your momentum steady and your creativity flowing.

How many pages are in a graphic novel?

There’s no single rule. Most graphic novels fall between 50 and 250 pages, but the best length is the one that suits your story.

Shorter works (under 80 pages) often feel like visual novellas or art books; perfect for personal projects or creative experiments. Longer works (200+ pages) give you the space to build rich worlds and layered narratives.

How much does it cost to make a graphic novel?

If you’re illustrating and writing the book yourself and self-publishing digitally, your main investment is your time, plus any tools or software you prefer to create with. If you hire artists, colorists, or letterers, your budget will naturally increase. For example, the cost to hire an illustrator can range from $2,000 to $10,000, depending on their experience and the nature of your project. 

For printed editions, the cost depends on your book size, paper type, and print quantity. Blurb makes it simple to make a graphic novel online and publish it affordably through print-on-demand. You can order a single copy to test your design, then scale up confidently once you’re ready to sell.

What’s the best print format for a graphic novel?

Standard comic dimensions (around 6.625×10.25 inches) will feel familiar to readers, but don’t be afraid to experiment. Square or landscape formats can give your book a more art-forward, gallery-style feel, which works well for designers, illustrators, and photographers exploring storytelling through visuals.

From idea to ink: your graphic novel in print

You’ve discovered what a graphic novel is, why it matters, and the creative steps to bring one to life, from your first sketch to the final printed page. The tools, the vision, and the story are already yours. And remember: You don’t need a publisher or anyone’s permission to tell your story. Your creativity, your art, and your vision are more than enough.

Start sketching, experimenting, and shaping your story panel by panel until it feels alive on the page. With the right tools and a clear creative vision, you can turn your imagination into a finished book that reflects your craft, builds your brand, and stands out in print.

And when you’re ready to bring it into the world, there’s a community waiting for you to turn your graphic novel into something tangible, beautiful, and entirely your own.

***

Blurb empowers everyone to turn their stories and creativity into beautifully made books: premium-quality print-on-demand, built for creative control. Ready to bring your graphic novel to life? Create your free account and start today.

The post <strong>How to make a graphic novel: a step-by-step guide</strong> appeared first on Blurb Blog.

How to enter:

1. Make a DIY book.
2. Post 1–3 photos or a short video showing your book on Instagram by February 27, 2026.
3. Add a caption with your idea or process. Tag @BlurbBooks and use #DIYBook and #Contest.
4. Bonus: (a) Show work-in-progress shots or (b) Share what helped you get started or surprised you during the process.

Our judging panel will select three winners based on creative exploration, presentation, and use of the handmade format. They’ll award one-time-use Blurb promo codes for a $150 grand prize, $100 second-place prize, and $50 third-place prize.

The contest runs from February 9 through February 27, 2026. Winners will be DMed on March 3, 2026. U.S. only.

*Make sure your profile is public so that we can see your entry! Tags and hashtags must be included in the text caption of your caption to be valid.

**If you’re unable to enter via Instagram, email socialmedia@blurb.com with your photos or video and description for alternative entry during the contest period.

***

OFFICIAL RULES (“Official Rules”)

NO PURCHASE NECESSARY TO ENTER, WIN OR CLAIM PRIZES. A PURCHASE OR PAYMENT WILL NOT INCREASE AN ENTRANT’S CHANCES OF WINNING. THE PROMOTION IS IN NO WAY SPONSORED, ENDORSED, ADMINISTERED BY, OR ASSOCIATED WITH INSTAGRAM.

THESE OFFICIAL RULES CONTAIN AN ARBITRATION AGREEMENT, WHICH REQUIRES THAT ALL DISPUTES BE RESOLVED SOLELY BY BINDING ARBITRATION, AND ENTRANTS AGREE TO ONLY PURSUE CLAIMS AGAINST SPONSOR AND SPONSOR ENTITIES AND/OR SEEK RELIEF ON AN INDIVIDUAL BASIS, AND ENTRANTS WAIVE THE ABILITY TO BRING CLAIMS IN A CLASS ACTION FORMAT, OR AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR REPRESENTATIVE ACTION OR PROCEEDING.

VOID WHERE PROHIBITED OR RESTRICTED BY LAW.

Blurb’s DIY Book Contest (“Promotion”) is sponsored by RPI Print, Inc., (“Sponsor”), 3325 S. 116th Street, Suite 161, Tukwila, Washington 98168.

1. PROMOTION PERIOD: The Promotion begins February 9, 2026, at 12:01 AM Pacific Standard Time (“PST”) and ends on February 27, 2026 at 11:59 PM PST (“Promotion Period”). The Sponsor’s computer is the Promotion’s official clock. The Promotion is structured as a contest with three (3) Promotion winners who will be selected by a judging panel at the end of the Promotion Period.

2. ELIGIBILITY: This Promotion is offered only to individuals who are at least eighteen (18) years old at the time of entry and are legal residents of the fifty United States or the District of Columbia, excluding Rhode Island. Employees of Sponsor, and any of its owners, parent companies, affiliates, directors, subsidiaries, franchisees, representatives, advertising, promotion and production agencies, agents (collectively, the “Promotion Entities”) and their immediate family members (i.e., spouse, parent, child, sibling, and the “steps” of each) and persons living in the same household of each (whether related or not) are not eligible to participate in the Promotion. Void where prohibited or restricted by law. All federal, state and local laws apply. Participation constitutes entrant’s full and unconditional agreement to these Official Rules and Sponsor’s decisions, which are final and binding in all matters related to the Promotion. Winning a prize is contingent upon fulfilling all requirements set forth herein. Entrants and/or potential winners may be required to provide proof of identification and eligibility as required by Sponsor. If it is discovered or suspected that an entrant has registered or attempted to register for the Promotion using multiple identities, all of that entrant’s entries will be declared null and void and any prize such entrant might have been entitled to win will not be awarded to and may be revoked from such entrant. Use of any automated system or any like methods to participate in the Promotion is prohibited and will result in disqualification of any entrant attempting such use.

3. HOW TO ENTER: Sponsor will publish one (1) post and one (1) Story on the @BlurbBooks Instagram account (Instagram.com/blurbbooks), with directions on how to enter the Promotion (a “Promotion Post”). To participate, entrants must complete ALL the following steps during the Promotion Period: 

(i) Post 1–3 photos or a short video showing their book on Instagram;

(ii) Include an original caption on their post (each, an “Entry” collectively, “Entries”) that:

    a. Includes both hashtags #DIYBook and #Contest

    b. Tags @BlurbBooks

    c. Includes a description of their idea or process.

(iii) Bonus: 

    a. Show work-in-progress shots or

    b. Share what helped them get started or surprised them during the process.

Alternate Method of Entry: If an entrant is unable to enter via Instagram, they may submit their Entry by emailing socialmedia@blurb.com during the Promotion Period. Email Entries must include the same materials and information required for Instagram Entries and will be judged using the same Judging Criteria. All eligibility requirements and entry limits apply.

The Entry must meet the following “Entry Guidelines”: (i) the Entry must not include text or subject matter that is deemed by the Sponsor to be obscene, profane, pornographic, libelous or otherwise objectionable; (ii) the Entry must not disparage Sponsor or any other person or entity; (iii) the Entry must not contain material that is political; (iv) the Entry must not contain material that promotes bigotry, racism, hatred or harm against any group or individual or promotes discrimination based on race, gender, religion, nationality, disability, sexual orientation, or age; and (v) the Entry must not contain material that is unlawful, in violation of, or contrary to the laws or regulations in any state. (vi) Each entrant’s social media account must be public to participate in the Promotion.

IMPORTANT: Entries must include both hashtags #DIYBook and #Contest in your caption to be eligible. Entries must tag @BlurbBooks. Entries that do not include both hashtags and the tag will be disqualified and ineligible to receive a prize. Instagram profile must be public to be valid.

Limit: one (1) Entry per person during the Promotion Period. If it is discovered or suspected, in Sponsor’s sole discretion, that an entrant receives or attempts to receive more than the stated number of Entries, all of that entrant’s Entries, in Sponsor’s sole discretion, may be declared null and void and any prize(s) he/she might have been entitled to will not be awarded to and may be revoked from him/her. In the event of a dispute as to the identity of an entrant, the Entry will be declared made by the primary account holder of the account associated with the email address designated in the social media account used to enter the Promotion. The “primary account holder” is the natural person assigned an email address by an Internet access provider, online service provider or other organization responsible for assigning email addresses for the domain associated with the applicable email address. The potential winner may be required to show proof of being the holder of the email address designated in the social media account used to enter the Promotion.

Sponsor’s Use of Entries: By posting, commenting, sharing, or uploading an Entry entrant consents to and hereby grants to Sponsor a royalty-free, irrevocable, perpetual, non-exclusive license to use, reproduce, modify, publish, create derivative works from, and display the Entry on a worldwide basis, and to incorporate it into other works, in any form, media or technology now known or later developed, including for promotional or marketing purposes. If requested, entrant will sign any documentation that may be required for Sponsor or its designees to make use of the non-exclusive rights entrant is granting to use the Entry. Sponsor reserves the right to remove (and to require that entrant remove) and to disqualify Entries that violate the guidelines outlined above, violate these Official Rules, or for which a DMCA notice or other infringement claim is received.

4. PRIZE: Three (3) winners will be selected by a judging panel to receive one (1) unique code each of $150 (grand prize), $100 (second-place prize), or $50 (third-place prize) to redeem towards their next Blurb book. The total ARV of all available prizes in the Promotion is $300.00. Prize codes must be redeemed in a single purchase within 6 months of issuance. The gift card value must be used in its entirety in one transaction and cannot be split across multiple purchases. Any unused portion of the gift card value in the transaction will be forfeited. Gift card codes cannot be combined with other promotional codes, offers, or gift cards. If the purchase total exceeds the gift card value, the winner is responsible for paying the difference.

There is no substitution for any Prize, except Sponsor who reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to substitute a prize or portion of prize of comparable value. Prizes are not transferable or redeemable for cash, except in the sole discretion of Sponsor. All Prize details are at Sponsor’s sole discretion. Incidental expenses and all other costs and expenses which are not specifically listed as part of a Prize in these Official Rules, and which may be associated with the award, acceptance, receipt, and use of all, or any portion of the awarded Prize are solely the responsibility of the Prize winner. All federal, state, and local taxes associated with the receipt or use of the Prize are solely the responsibility of the Prize winning entrant. In no event will more prizes than are stated in these Official Rules be awarded. Odds of winning depend on the number of eligible Entries received during the Promotion Period.

5. SELECTION AND NOTIFICATION: Assuming a sufficient number of eligible Submissions are received, at the end of the Promotion Period, a judge or group of judges selected by Sponsor in its sole discretion (in either case, the “Judging Panel”) will judge the entries received throughout the Promotion Period. For avoidance of doubt, the Judging Panel will only review and evaluate the entrant’s submitted entry, except as noted in the Judging Criteria (defined below). Decisions of the Judging Panel are final and not subject to appeal. 

Judging Criteria: The Judging Panel will select three (3) winners based on the following criteria: (i) Creative Exploration (33%); (ii) Presentation (33%); and (iii) Use of Handmade Format (33%) (the “Judging Criteria”). Entries with process storytelling will gain an additional 10 points. In the event of a tie between two or more entries, the tie will be broken in favor of the tied entrant whose Submission received the highest score for Creative Exploration in the initial scoring by the Judging Panel.

Potential winners will be notified via Instagram Direct Message (“DM“) from the @BlurbBooks Instagram account within five (5) business days following the judging. Potential winners must respond to the Instagram DM notification within 48 hours.

Before being declared a winner the potential winner may be required to execute an Affidavit of Eligibility, Liability Release, tax acknowledgment, and, except where prohibited, a Publicity Release (“Affidavit”). If requested by Sponsor, the potential Prize winner must return a fully executed Affidavit to the Sponsor or its authorized designee within seven (7) calendar days from the date it is sent to the potential winner or the Prize may (in Sponsor’s sole discretion) be forfeited. If a potential winner is disqualified, found to be ineligible or not in compliance with these Official Rules, declines to accept a prize, or in the event that the potential winner fails to return an executed Affidavit within the seven (7) calendar day deadline (if applicable), the Prize may be forfeited. If the Prize is forfeited, the Prize may be awarded to an alternate winner, who will be randomly selected from the eligible remaining Entries. Sponsor shall not be held responsible for any delays in awarding a prize for any reason. If, after three (3) good faith attempts to award the Prize to potential winners, Sponsor is unable to award the Prize, the prize may not be awarded.

ALL FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL TAXES IMPOSED ON THE ACCEPTANCE OF A PRIZE ARE SOLELY THE RESPONSIBILITY OF WINNER.

Sponsor will attempt to notify the potential winner as set forth above, but Sponsor is not responsible for any undelivered messages or other communications, including without limitation messages or other communications that are not received because of a winner’s privacy or spam filter settings which may divert any Promotion messages or other communications, including any winner notification message or other communication. Prizes that are unclaimed, unredeemed, or returned as undeliverable will not be awarded. All other costs and expenses not expressly set forth herein shall be solely the winner’s responsibility. Promotion Entities shall not be held responsible for any delays in awarding the Prize for any reason. The Prize will only be awarded to a verified winner.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: By participating in this Promotion entrants (and if 18+ but a minor in their state of residence, their parents or legal guardians) agree that the Promotion Entities, and their respective affiliates, parents, subsidiaries, representatives, consultants, contractors, legal counsel, advertising, public relations, promotional, fulfillment and marketing agencies, website providers, Web masters and their respective officers, directors, employees, representatives, shareholders, designees and agents (“Released Parties”) are not responsible for lost, late, incomplete, stolen, misdirected, postage due, or undeliverable notifications or mail; or for any computer, telephone, satellite, cable, network, electronic or Internet hardware or software malfunctions, failures, connections or availability; or garbled, corrupt or jumbled transmissions, service provider/Internet/website/use net accessibility, availability or traffic congestion; or any technical, mechanical, printing, or typographical or other error; or unauthorized human intervention; or the loss, access, or acquisition without authorization, or incorrect or inaccurate capture of registration information; or the failure to capture, or loss or disclosure of, any such information. The Released Parties are not responsible for any incorrect or inaccurate information, whether caused by any website users, tampering, hacking or by any of the equipment or programming associated with or utilized in the Promotion and assume no responsibility for any error, omission, interruption, deletion, defect, delay in operation or transmission, communications line failure, technical error, theft or destruction or unauthorized access or acquisition of the website, any Promotion-related website(s), or entrant information. The Released Parties are not responsible for any injury or damage, whether personal or property, to participants or to any person’s computer related to or resulting from participating in the Promotion and/or accepting or using a prize. The Released Parties shall not be responsible or liable for entries that are entered by any automated computer, program, mechanism or device, for any entries in excess of the stated limit or for entries that are late, forged, lost, misplaced, misdirected, tampered with, incomplete, deleted, damaged, garbled or otherwise not in compliance with the Official Rules, and all such entries may, in Sponsor’s sole discretion, be disqualified. If, for any reason, the Promotion is not capable of running as planned, Sponsor reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to cancel, terminate, modify or suspend the Promotion and/or proceed with the Promotion, including the selection of winner in a manner it deems fair and reasonable including the selection of the winner from among eligible Entries received prior to such cancellation, termination, modification or suspension. In no event will more prizes be awarded than are stated in these Official Rules. If for any reason, including but not limited to an administrative, printing, production, computer or other error or due to technical difficulties or incorrect announcements of any kind, more winning messages are distributed, or more prizes are claimed than are intended to be awarded according to these Official Rules, the intended prizes will be awarded among all verified prize claims received based on the judging criteria stated in these Official Rules. This Promotion is subject to all federal, state, and local laws and regulations.

By entering the Promotion, each entrant (and if a minor, his/her parent or legal guardian) agrees: (i) to be bound by these Official Rules and by all applicable laws and by the decisions of Sponsor, which shall be binding and final; (ii) to waive any rights to claim ambiguity with respect to these Official Rules; (iii) to waive all of his or her rights to bring any claim, action or proceeding against any of the Released Parties in connection with the Promotion; and (iv) to forever and irrevocably agree to release and hold harmless each of the Released Parties from any and all claims, lawsuits, judgments, causes of action, proceedings, demands, fines, penalties, liability, costs and expenses (including, without limitation, reasonable outside attorneys’ fees) that may arise in connection with: (a) the Promotion, including but not limited to any Promotion-related activity or element thereof, and the entrant’s Entry, including any information provided, participation or inability to participate in the Promotion, (b) the violation of any third-party privacy, data security, personal, publicity or proprietary rights, (c) typographical or printing errors in these Official Rules or any Promotion materials, (d) acceptance, attendance at, receipt, travel related to, participation in, delivery of, possession, defects in, use, non-use, misuse, inability to use, loss, damage, destruction, negligence or willful misconduct in connection with the use of a prize (or any component thereof), (e) any change in the prizing due to unavailability or due to reasons beyond Sponsor’s control, including but not limited to by reason of any acts of God, any action(s), regulation(s), order(s) or request(s) by any governmental or quasi-governmental entity (whether or not such action(s), regulation(s), order(s) or request(s) prove(s) to be invalid), equipment failure, threatened or actual terrorist acts, earthquake, war, fire, flood, explosion, unusually severe weather, hurricane, embargo, labor dispute or strike (whether legal or illegal), labor or material shortage, transportation interruption of any kind, work slow-down, civil disturbance, insurrection, riot or any other cause beyond any of the Released Parties’ control, or as otherwise permitted in these Official Rules, (f) any interruptions in or postponement, cancellation or modification of the Promotion, (g) human error, (h) incorrect, unauthorized, or inaccurate transcription, receipt or transmission of any part of any Entry , (i) any technical malfunctions or unavailability of the website or any telephone network, computer system, computer online system, mobile device, computer timing and/or dating mechanism, computer equipment, software, or Internet service provider, or mail service utilized by any of the Released Parties or by an entrant, (j) interruption or inability to access the Promotion, the website or any other Promotion-related websites or any online service via the Internet due to hardware or software compatibility problems, (k) any damage to entrant’s (or any third person’s) equipment used to access the Promotion and/or its contents related to or resulting from any part of the Promotion, (l) any lost/delayed data transmissions, omissions, interruptions, defects, and/or any other errors or malfunctions, (m) any late, lost, stolen, mutilated, misdirected, delayed, garbled, corrupted, destroyed, incomplete, undeliverable or damaged Entries, (n) any wrongful, negligent, or unauthorized act or omission on the part of any of the Released Parties, (o) lost, late, stolen, misdirected, damaged or destroyed prizing (or any element thereof), or (p) the negligence or willful misconduct by entrant.

Without limiting the foregoing, everything regarding this Promotion, including the website and prize components, are provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or non-infringement. Some jurisdictions may not allow the limitations or exclusions of liability for incidental or consequential damages or exclusions of implied warranties, so some of the above limitations or exclusions may not apply. Check local laws for any restrictions or limitations regarding these limitations or exclusions.

7. DISPUTES AND ARBITRATION; CLASS ACTION WAIVER: This Promotion is governed by, and will be construed in accordance with, the laws of the state of Washington without regard to any choice of law or conflicts of law rules, and the forum and venue for any dispute shall be in Seattle, Washington.

IF THE CONTROVERSY OR CLAIM IS NOT OTHERWISE RESOLVED THROUGH DIRECT DISCUSSIONS OR MEDIATION, IT SHALL THEN BE RESOLVED BY FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION ADMINISTERED BY THE AMERICAN ARBITRATION ASSOCIATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS ARBITRATION RULES AND PROCEDURES OR SUBSEQUENT VERSIONS THEREOF (“AAA RULES”). THE REMEDY FOR ANY CLAIM SHALL BE LIMITED TO ACTUAL DAMAGES, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL ANY PARTY BE ENTITLED TO RECOVER PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR HAVE DAMAGES MULTIPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCREASED, INCLUDING ATTORNEYS’ FEES OR OTHER SUCH RELATED COSTS OF BRINGING A CLAIM, OR TO RESCIND THIS AGREEMENT OR SEEK INJUNCTIVE OR ANY OTHER EQUITABLE RELIEF.

ENTRANTS AGREE THAT THE RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF ANY ENTRANT AND/OR PROMOTION ENTITIES AND/OR ANY OTHER PARTY SHALL BE RESOLVED INDIVIDUALLY, WITHOUT RESORT TO ANY FORM OF CLASS ACTION, AND ENTRANTS WAIVE THE ABILITY TO BRING CLAIMS IN A CLASS ACTION FORMAT, OR AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR REPRESENTATIVE ACTION OR PROCEEDING.

ANY DEMAND FOR ARBITRATION MUST BE FILED WITHIN ONE (1) YEAR FROM THE END OF THE PROMOTION PERIOD, OR THE CAUSE OF ACTION SHALL BE FOREVER BARRED.

8. PRIVACY POLICY: Any information collected during an entrant’s participation in the Promotion will be collected by Sponsor or designee and used by Sponsor, affiliates, designees, agents and marketers for purposes of the proper administration and fulfillment of the Promotion as described in these Official Rules and in accordance with Sponsor’s Privacy Policy as stated at https://www.blurb.com/privacy.

9. PUBLICITY RIGHTS: By participating in the Promotion and/or accepting a prize, each entrant (and if a minor, his/her parent or legal guardian’s) grants Sponsor and Sponsor’s designee the perpetual right to use his or her name, social media user name (handle), biographical information, photos and/or likeness, and statements for promotion, trade, commercial, advertising and publicity purposes on a worldwide basis, at any time or times, in all media now known or hereafter discovered including without limitation live television, social media, and on the World Wide Web and Internet, without notice, review or approval and without additional compensation, except where prohibited by law.

10. GENERAL: Any attempted form of participation in this Promotion other than as described herein is void. If it is discovered or suspected in Sponsor’s sole and absolute discretion that an entrant has registered or attempted to register more than once using multiple email addresses, accounts, multiple identities, proxy servers or like methods, all of that entrant’s entries will be declared null and void, and that Entrant will be ineligible to win a prize. Also, if it is discovered that any entrant attempts to receive additional entries in excess of the stated limitation, that entrant may, in Sponsor’s sole discretion, be disqualified from the Promotion. Sponsor reserves the right to disqualify any individual found, in its sole opinion, to be tampering with the operation of the Promotion, to be acting in violation of these Official Rules or to be acting in an unsportsmanlike manner or with the intent to disrupt the normal operation of a Promotion. Any use of robotic, automatic, macro, programmed, third party or like methods to participate in the Promotion will void any attempted participation affected by such methods and the disqualification of the individual utilizing the same. CAUTION AND WARNING: ANY ATTEMPT TO DELIBERATELY DAMAGE ANY WEBSITE OR TO UNDERMINE THE LEGITIMATE OPERATION OF THIS PROMOTION IS A VIOLATION OF CRIMINAL AND CIVIL LAWS. SHOULD SUCH AN ATTEMPT BE MADE, SPONSOR RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SEEK DAMAGES OR OTHER REMEDIES FROM ANY SUCH PERSON(S) RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ATTEMPT TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. If any provision of these Official Rules or any word, phrase, clause, sentence, or other portion thereof should be held unenforceable or invalid for any reason, then that provision or portion thereof shall be modified or deleted in such manner as to render the remaining provisions of these Official Rules valid and enforceable. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of these Official Rules or the prize documents will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision. Sponsor’s interpretation of these Official Rules is final and binding in all matters related to the Promotion. Sponsor or Released Party’s failure to enforce any term of these Official Rules shall not constitute a waiver of that provision and such provision shall remain in full force and effect. All Promotion Entries and/or materials submitted become the property of Sponsor and will not be returned. In the event of any conflict with any Promotion details contained in these Official Rules and Promotion details contained in any promotional materials (including but not limited to point of sale, television and print advertising, promotional packaging, social media, email communications, and other promotional media), the details of the Promotion as set forth in these Official Rules shall prevail.

11. SOCIAL MEDIA RELEASE AND DISCLAIMER. Each entrant acknowledges and agrees that this Promotion is in no way sponsored, endorsed or administered by, or associated with Instagram. By entering the Promotion each entrant hereby releases and agrees to hold harmless these entities completely from any liability in connection with the Promotion. Any questions, comments or complaints regarding the Promotion should be directed to Sponsor and not these social media platforms. By participating via any applicable social media platform, Entrants are also subject to such platform’s terms of use.

12. TO RECEIVE WINNERS LIST OR OFFICIAL RULES: The Official Rules (available during the Promotion Period) and Winners List (available after winner is confirmed) will be available on Blurb.com for a period of sixty (60) days after the close of the Promotion Period.

The post Blurb DIY Book Contest appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Self-publishing and print-on-demand make that possible. Anyone can publish on any topic, with no agent, no gatekeepers. You just need a strong idea, a defined audience, and a format that brings it to life.

In this post, we’ll show you how to find your niche and turn your focus into a business strategy, covering niche audiences and micro communities, real examples of niche book projects, simple research methods, and quick ways to validate your ideas before you invest.

Whether you’re planning a cookbook, an agency portfolio, coffee-table collection, or a design guide, think of this as your compact, confidence-building roadmap from focused idea to working revenue stream.

Niche audience definition: what it is and why it matters

What is a niche audience?

A niche audience is a focused group of people with specific needs, tastes, or goals that aren’t fully served by mainstream content. Think urban gardeners making balconies bloom, plant-based food enthusiasts dialing in nutrition, fermentation hobbyists chasing perfect cultures, or drone photographers mapping the world from above. They’re small by design, and powerful when you speak their language.

Why people gather in niche communities

Niche communities form around belonging, identity, and expertise. Members want to see themselves reflected, learn from peers who get it, and level up through shared knowledge. That creates a high-trust loop where recommendations matter and quality stands out (which is gold for anyone learning how to find a niche market or build a loyal following).

Why niches matter for self-publishers

Publishing into a niche gives you strategic advantages:

• Less competition: Your work cuts through faster.
• Stronger loyalty: When readers feel seen, they stay.
• Better engagement: The clearer the need, the deeper the response.
• Higher value per reader: When a book feels made for them, they’ll happily pay for it. 

Zoom in and find your micro-communities

Inside every niche are micro-communities: tight, highly engaged pockets of people with shared goals and tastes. You’ll spot them on Discord, Substack, Patreon, TikTok, and in Facebook groups. These are your living focus groups and early customers.

Why micro-communities are your launchpad

• Trust and credibility: Word-of-mouth here travels fast and sticks.
• Higher engagement and retention: People show up, get involved, and return.
• Actionable feedback: You’ll get clear notes you can build straight into the book.
• Organic growth: Advocates become amplifiers, turning readers into a street team.

Start by listening where these groups already gather. If you can speak to their exact needs with a clear, well-designed book, you won’t just reach a niche, you’ll become part of it. Even better, begin with a community you already belong to. Familiarity with their challenges and opportunities to add value will give you a head start. 

How to research niche markets: a simple path

Finding your niche isn’t a guessing game! It’s a creative process that blends curiosity, research, and connection. You start broad, follow the data, and then listen to the communities that care most about your subject. The ultimate goal is to understand what makes a specific group light up, and how your self-published project can meet that need.

Step 1: Start broad and brainstorm your niche topics

Begin with what’s already alive in you. Write down the subjects you can’t stop thinking about, the skills you return to again and again, and the stories you love to tell. Don’t overthink or edit, just get it all down.

Ask yourself:

• What do people naturally come to me for?
• What do I create when there’s no deadline or brief?
• Which communities or conversations do I keep coming back to online, and why?
• Why does this matter to me, and would I care about it even if it took time to grow?

Once you’ve poured it all out, circle the themes that feel both energizing and useful. That intersection, where passion meets purpose, is where most lasting niche market ideas begin. 

That’s exactly how The Comprehensive 6 Month Wedding Planner came to life. After planning her own ceremony in just four months, Kassidy Pitts realised there was nothing on the market for couples working to a tight deadline that was both beautiful and genuinely helpful. So she made the planner she had been searching for. 

Drawing on her own experience, she created a guide with practical checklists, monthly calendars, weekly planning pages, and space to journal. It’s the perfect example of how a personal experience can point you straight to a profitable niche. 

Step 2: Narrow with keyword research

Once you’ve got ideas on paper, it’s time to see what your potential audience is searching for. Keyword research helps you move from instinct to evidence and find a niche market supported by real search data.

• Amazon autocomplete: The phrases that drop down when you type are real buying signals, and they’re often the exact problems or curiosities readers want answered.
• Google Trends: This is how to find trending topics in your niche. Compare terms and spot when interest peaks, then plan your book launch around those moments.
• AnswerThePublic: Mine question-based searches (“how to…”, “best…”, “why…”) for possible chapter ideas or recurring themes.
• Pinterest: Track visual patterns, color palettes, and repeated language to understand the aesthetic of your niche.
• TikTok hashtags: See what’s trending within microtopics (#ZeroWasteKitchen, #FilmPhotographyForBeginners). Look for tags with steady, genuine engagement.

Focus on long-tail keywords (multi-word phrases that reveal specificity and intent). These smaller, focused searches are where niche audiences live.

Be realistic about your resources

You don’t need a huge budget to research well—you just need focus. Think about how much time, money, and energy you can commit right now, and build a plan around that.

• Free DIY tools (perfect for now): Amazon search and categories, Google Trends, AnswerThePublic, Reddit threads, and community polls. 
• Paid options (later, if needed):
  • Keyword software tools like Ahrefs, Ubersuggest, or Keywords Everywhere can help you see search volume, related searches, and competition more clearly.
  • Survey platforms like Typeform, Pollfish, or UserTesting can give you quick responses from your target demographic.

When to consider using paid tools?

Start small and scale slowly. Even the simplest test can tell you what’s worth pursuing. Move to paid options only when your idea is starting to take shape and you need higher-quality or more in-depth data to make a decision. 

A simple litmus test is: Will spending this money answer a question that’s blocking me? If a paid tool helps you confirm demand, choose between two concepts, or understand your audience more deeply, then it may be worth the upgrade. 

Step 3: Test early ideas in micro-communities 

Micro-communities are where you’ll connect with your truest, most engaged audience: the people already talking about what you love. It’s real-time niche audience research that shapes your book before it’s even printed. You’ll find them on Reddit, Facebook Groups, Discord servers, or Substack comments. 

Start by showing up with value, not promotion. Share early snippets, loose outlines, or early thoughts and ask exploratory questions:

• Post a useful stand-alone infographic or spread and ask, “What’s missing?”
• Offer a simple how-to tip and watch the reactions and follow-up questions.
• Share your expertise in an AMA and see what questions surface.

These spaces can be goldmines of honest, high-quality feedback and spaces in which you can spot patterns, test assumptions, and learn what sparks genuine interest. Listen closely, your next book idea might come straight from a comment thread.

Step 5: Run a competitor gap analysis

Now that you understand your topic and your audience, look around the market. Your goal isn’t to copy what’s working, it’s to spot what’s missing. This is how to find a niche for your business that feels fresh and needed.

• Scan existing titles: Look at Amazon, Bookshop, or Etsy. What formats, prices, and design styles are common?
• Read reviews: The 5-star comments show what readers love. The 1-star reviews show what’s missing (“great idea, but too basic,” “beautiful design, but not practical”).
• Map the gaps: Are visuals outdated? Is there a lack of beginner-friendly resources? No regional or lifestyle-specific options? Or, better yet, no books at all that meet the need you’ve identified?
• Differentiate with intention: Go niche-within-a-niche. Once you know who you’re creating for, look for the specific angle or use case that sets your idea apart. What’s the unique scenario or problem you’re solving for? And how can your content or design speak directly to that? 

How to validate your niche idea

Once you’ve found your niche, validation turns research into reality. It’s where you test your concept, measure demand, and confirm that your idea connects before you invest heavily in production. Think of it as a self-publishing check-in: proof that your book idea resonates beyond your own excitement for it. 

1. Read the landscape

Before testing, look again at your competition. If the space already feels crowded, refine your focus. Learning how to find your niche market often means going smaller and clearer, not broader. The tighter your angle, the clearer your message becomes. For example, instead of film photography, think film photography for beginners using thrift-store cameras. That microfocus instantly separates your book from the rest.

2. Test before you invest

Your goal here is light, fast, and honest evidence. Start small, listen closely, and build proof at every step so each decision is grounded in signal, not guesswork. 

Short-form content tests

Share quick, low-effort pieces like a how-to post, a behind-the-scenes reel, a TikTok tip, or a blog story. Watch the engagement. Saves, shares, and comments show interest. Silence means switch it up and pivot to something else. 

That’s exactly how London-based illustrator Ego Rodriguez shaped his art book LUX, a collection of illustrations curated through feedback from his followers on social media. The book became a direct reflection of what Rodriquez’s audience responded to most, built through ongoing, real-time feedback.

Pro tip: The words your audience uses in replies can guide your chapter titles, keywords, and marketing copy later.

Print pilots

Take your idea from screen to page with a tiny, tangible test. You’ll learn more in one week of real pages than in a month of theorizing.

• Short paperback: Perfect for practical how-tos, guides, or checklists.
• Mini photo book: Great for visual niches to help test sequencing and paper choice.
• Zine: Fast, affordable, and great for process pieces or creative deep dives.

Each gives you real-world feedback about what readers highlight, gift, or talk about most. And there are plenty of simple ways to test them in the wild. 

• Give them away to a select group in exchange for honest, structured feedback.
• Share them with experts in your niche and ask what they feel is missing, unclear, or especially useful.
• Run a ‘side-by-side’ test by printing two slightly different versions and note which one readers respond better to.
• Watch how people interact with it physically. Do they flip straight to a certain section? Do they share photos of certain pages? Are there natural drop-offs or sticking points?  

Small print pilots remove the guesswork. They help you see what lands, what needs refining, and what readers value enough to talk about long before you commit to a final, polished book.

Scale to your season

If time or budget is limited, adapt the format, not the idea. Low-content journals (trackers, sketchbooks, planners) are a great way to start small and still reach your audience. For budget-friendly tests, softcover photo books keep costs low and quality high.

3. Collect direct feedback

Bring your audience into the process early by asking for their direct feedback. This will give you two essential advantages: insights that improve your book and advocates who help it succeed. 

Early supporters will show you what’s working, what isn’t, and what would make your book genuinely useful. Practical ways to gather those insights could include:

• Poll your community on cover designs or titles.
• Share a preview spread or PDF sample and ask, “What would make this essential?”
• Offer early beta copies or digital proofs and reward participants with a discount or a credit in the finished book.

Your audience will tell you exactly what matters most, so listen carefully! And when people feel involved from the beginning, they feel connected to the work. That sense of ownership naturally turns early readers into supporters, ambassadors, and early customers. 

4. Look for commitment, not compliments

Kind words are great, but commitment is gold. Prioritize book launch signals that ask people to act or invest so your production calls are grounded, not guessed.

• Pre-orders: A simple landing page with sign-up and payment options gives you clear, upfront demand. It shows exactly who’s ready to buy, helps you forecast quantities, and builds early momentum before launch.
• Crowdfunding: Validation and buzz in one place, perfect when you want to offer premium finishes or special editions, as strong, early enthusiasm helps justify a higher price point.
• Limited edition first run: Launch a small, numbered batch ahead of your print-on-demand release to create urgency, reward early supporters, and give you real purchasing data before moving to wider availability.

These signals will help you size the print run, price with confidence, and set a realistic timeline.

5. Refine and release

Validation isn’t so much an endpoint, but an edit. Use what you’ve learned to sharpen the offer and deliver a version that truly fits your audience.

• Tighten the audience definition: Are you creating for beginners, advanced users, hobbyists, or professionals? 
• Adjust the format to solve practical needs: Select the structure that best supports how your book will be used, such as a layflat or Wire-O format for workbooks or a compact format for field guides.
• Update tone, visuals, and subtitles: Mirror the language your community actually uses. Keep what sparks DMs, pre-orders, and organic mentions. Let go of anything that doesn’t earn its place. 
• Re-release with confidence: Take your learnings and craft a new edition that’s clearer, cleaner, and closer to your reader than before.

Together, research and validation are the twin engines of a successful niche book. One helps you discover what matters, the other proves it’s worth making. Start small, learn quickly, and let your readers guide you toward a book that feels inevitable and one only you could have made.

You can see this process at work in the way language teacher Laura A. Wideburg developed her textbook SWEDISH: The Basics. She wrote the book to fill a very specific need within her own Swedish language program, where adult learners—mostly Americans visiting family in Sweden—needed practical vocabulary and concise, straightforward grammar explanations they could easily absorb. She went on to refine the book through eight editions, each shaped by real student feedback, before expanding the concept into a full seven-book series. 

Niche audience examples: from micro-community to market

The best niche books all start in the same place: where what you know, love, or create overlaps with what others are looking for but can’t quite find. That’s your opening. From there, it’s about translating your insight or craft into the right format (a guidebook, coffee-table book, planner, journal, or zine) that feels like it was made just for that audience. 

Here are a few niche market ideas that show how focus turns into opportunity.

Fermentation hobbyists

What they care about: Perfecting flavor, celebrating tradition, and sharing the joy of small-batch experimentation.
Publishing opportunity: A beautifully designed DIY guide that pairs recipes and techniques with photography that honors the craft.
Revenue hook: Makers love tangibility, so an aesthetic, functional book is something they’ll keep on the counter, reference often, and recommend widely.

Vintage typewriter enthusiasts

What they care about: Analog beauty, precision engineering, and the romance of manual creativity.
Publishing opportunity: A photo-rich coffee table book or repair guide capturing the character and history of classic machines.
Revenue hook: Collectors crave quality. Premium paper, clean design, and limited editions make this the kind of object they’ll treasure.

Need some inspo? Check out our post on coffee table book ideas. 

Urban gardeners

What they care about: Turning small spaces into green sanctuaries and living more sustainably in the city.
Publishing opportunity: A design-forward handbook for balcony and container gardening, balancing inspiration with step-by-step guidance, just like Reine Astra’s THE SEED: Garden Journal.
Revenue hook: A tool that is both beautiful and brilliantly functional, with actionable inspiration, helpful, practical tips, and usable space for planning.

Plant-based athletes

What they care about: Eating well, training smart, and staying true to their values.
Publishing opportunity: A performance-focused cookbook combining nutrition insights with fitness routines and personal stories.
Revenue hook: Combines two passionate markets of health and sustainability, creating a loyal audience ready for quality print resources.

Zero-proof connoisseurs

What they care about: Enjoying high-quality beverages without alcohol, exploring rich flavour and design in the zero-proof space, and celebrating mindful living.
Publishing opportunity: A beautifully designed recipe guide focused on zero-alcohol drinks, combining inspirational photography with practical recipes and presentation tips.
Revenue hook: A book that looks as good as its message feels, much like Zip. Zero. Zilch. The Zero-Proof Beverage Guide, a perfect match for readers who value both design and purpose.

Minimalist travelers

What they care about: Freedom, lightness, and experiences over possessions.
Publishing opportunity: A travel guide or journal that combines pared-back itineraries with storytelling and photography.
Revenue hook: Minimalist travelers invest in tools that make trips smoother and more intentional. A book with a simple, elegant layout that’s light, easy to use, and designed to carry effortlessly fits perfectly with their priorities.

Birdwatchers

What they care about: Connection to nature, conservation, and the quiet thrill of discovery.
Publishing opportunity: Regional field guides or illustrated journals organized by habitat or species.
Revenue hook: Lots of potential for small-run, location-specific editions sold through nature reserves, visitor centers, and gift shops.

Board game designers and role-play gamers

What they care about: Playtesting, mechanics, and turning ideas into tangible experiences.
Publishing opportunity: A behind-the-scenes sketchbook or concept anthology with notes, visuals, and creative process insights.
Revenue hook: Like The Hero’s Chronicle, it gives a professional polish to the highly popular Dungeons and Dragons niche and works perfectly for pre-orders or Kickstarter campaigns.

Retro arcade gamers

What they care about: Game history, nostalgia, and pixel-perfect design.
Publishing opportunity: A collectible zine or photo-driven series exploring the art and stories behind classic titles.
Revenue hook: Nostalgia sells, and serialized formats encourage repeat buyers and word-of-mouth within tight online communities.

Bring your niche to life in print

Finding your niche means pairing what you love with where the market is hungry; passion plus opportunity. When you focus on a specific audience and a clear problem you can solve beautifully in print, you unlock new revenue streams and build a stronger creative brand.

Make micro-communities your starting point. Listen, learn, and shape your concept around what those groups need most. Combine that insight with smart research and quick validation, and you’ll move from idea to a book people are ready to buy, again and again.

***

Blurb is where creatives turn their best work into high-quality books and magazines, on demand, without compromise. Ready to start? Create a free account and bring your niche to life in print. 

The post <strong>How to find your niche: turning passion into a profitable book project</strong> appeared first on Blurb Blog.

So this time, I’m looking forward. What trends are shaping the way we shoot, print, and share our stories? Here’s what I’m predicting.

What’s shaping photography in 2026

Film finds its footing again

Let’s start with photography. Can you say analog? Yes, film lovers, things are looking up! 

Kodak recently announced the release of two moderately priced color negative films, Kodacolor 100 and Kodacolor 200. Film prices have increased significantly in recent years, so having affordable film choices is step one in assuring film’s survival. 

A parallel trend is the widespread adoption of using a digital camera to “scan” film, rather than using traditional film scanners. There aren’t many good scanner options left, and using a camera to copy your negatives is much quicker, offering a high-resolution file that works wonderfully.  

Alternative processes go mainstream

Keeping with the analog theme, another trend of 2026 will be the continued use of alternative processes in photographic practice. Two alternative processes I’m seeing increase in popularity are cyanotypes and platinum-palladium prints. 

Cyanotype photography is a cameraless technique that involves laying an object on paper coated with a solution of iron salts before exposing it to UV light and washing with water to create stunning blue and white images. Cyanotypes are being used as book covers, exhibition prints, and even clothing made from the designs and patterns.   

Platinum-palladium printing is a traditional wet-chemistry process that dates to the mid-nineteenth century. It is a practice that yields archival prints with a subtle yet wide tonal range. Platinum-palladium prints are highly sought-after by photography collectors. Learning and experimenting with the process returns the photographer to an alchemical, hands-on practice far from anything in the digital space. 

AI becomes part of the workflow

The last photography trend I see continuing in 2026 is the increased acceptance of artificial intelligence. The speed at which AI entered the professional photography world is staggering. Not only will professional photography clients turn to AI for generating the images they require, but professional photographers will continue to use AI to assist with things like editing, contract writing, research, and more. 

So far, there are two camps: those who oppose and those who embrace this new technology. But the acceptance and increased refinement of AI will only continue to build. And with that rise, we will see increasing attempts by creators who want to ensure that customers know their work was created by a human and not by a machine. 

What’s next for books

Self-publishing keeps growing

When it comes to book trends for 2026, I’ll start with the continued rise of the self-published photobook. This is a perfect time to remind everyone that creators were self-publishing before they were traditionally publishing. In fact, there were no photobook-specific publishers when people first placed photographs in books. 

Today, traditional photobook publishers face a challenging economic model that often requires sizable monetary contributions from the creator. In some cases, the creator has to front the entire cost of the book. Consequently, many have turned to self-publishing. 

I also notice the trend of creators or collectives establishing their own imprint and then self-publishing under that imprint, making it appear as if a smaller, lesser-known publisher published them. To try this method, design a logo for your imprint and add it to your publication. Those who want to go further can build a site dedicated to the imprint, showing the full range of publications. 

Small runs, big impact

2026 will also see the trend of small book runs. The days of books being published in the 5,000 to 3,000 book range are mostly behind us. There are plenty of exceptions to this rule, especially when the book is story-driven and comes from a famous person, but most creator-driven books will see much smaller print runs in the 200 to 500-book range. 

It might seem counterintuitive, but small book runs can be much better for the creator. Selling through a short run means you’re not sitting on boxes in your garage—you can finish a project, learn from it, and move on to the next one. And for many creators, placement matters more than sales. Getting your book into the hands of the right curator or collector can do more for your career than selling a copy to a stranger. Print 200, place fifty, sell the rest—that’s a sustainable way to make books and keep making more.

The new standard is digital

The final book trend of 2026 will be the continued rise of digital printing. Most traditionally printed books are done on an offset press, but this is changing rapidly, especially due to the smaller print runs I mentioned above. 

Digital print quality is now extremely good, and digitally printed books can be produced much quicker than offset runs and can also be printed domestically as opposed to traditional, overseas offset locations like China, Italy, or Iceland, where you may need to wait eight to twelve weeks, or longer, for your book to ship. Yes, literally, a ship is involved. 

Decades ago, the difference between digital printing and offset was glaring and obvious, but today, the differences can be nearly imperceptible. Offset does offer a range of custom options that digital might not, so each offering has its benefits, and each publishing project should be considered on a case-by-case basis. 

Where it’s all headed

All trends are subject to change, but when I see and feel what’s happening out there in the big, bad world of photography and bookmaking, these are a few of the things I feel good about predicting. What a time we live in. So many choices, so many options, and an ever-changing theatre of vibrant creative vision. No matter what trends emerge, I hope you continue to create and share your work. I know I will.

***

Dan Milnor makes, writes, and teaches about photography and self-publishing. As Blurb’s creative ambassador, he helps creators turn ideas into something you can hold. Join Blurb to get Dan’s insights in your inbox and start printing your next idea.

The post Dan Milnor on how we’ll photograph, print, and publish in 2026 appeared first on Blurb Blog.

What makes a great travel photo book? It’s not just the location or the camera. A superior travel photo book is one part photographer’s eye, one part careful curation and editing, and one part thoughtful organization and construction. It doesn’t just collect images, it tells a story. A great travel photo book conveys the meaning of a place and may even tell you a little bit about the author and why they travel.

We asked four photographers for their travel photo book tips—a pretty international group, representing the United States, the Netherlands, Denmark, and Thailand. They told us about the books they made, the cameras they shoot with, and just what it is that they’re looking for when they hit the road.

What camera gear do you travel with?

Lindsay: I have a Canon t4i. I love to shoot with a 24-70mm/2.8 zoom lens, but that lens is heavy (and expensive!) and not practical for all travel. All the photos in magnifique were taken with an 18-55mm kit lens. I also rely on my iPhone 5 for a string of fast casual shots for Instagram.

Leon: For this travel photo book (travel done in 2005), I used an old analog camera, which was really very bad. After that, I used a Canon Powershot S80, a Canon G9, an EOS 7D, and today my Canon 5D Mark lll is my new best friend.

Neil: Usually, I try and keep things light, but in the DSLR world, that just does not happen easily. I use a Canon 5d Mark III with a 50mm f1.2 , 135mm f2, and a 24-105mm f4. Plus, a video tripod.

Flemming: I travel with a Fuji X-pro1 and various Fuji lenses.

Do you travel with ideas of what you’d like to photograph?

Lindsay: My style has matured significantly in the last several trips. These days I’m more interested in capturing people, scenes, motion, and interesting design. Since my appreciation of photography was born out of my love for food photography, I still take a fair amount of pictures of local cuisine.

Leon: Not really, but the last few years I’ve tried to make portraits of the inner soul of a country: Local people. For me it’s a big challenge every time. You have to make contact, gain confidence, and act quickly.

Neil: For me it’s all about photographing people and their surroundings. I tend to go off on an adventure and try and find people going about their everyday lives. In my experience using a 50mm brings you closer to subject, giving the viewer a more realistic—call it humanistic—connection. I definitely have an idea of what countries appeal to me, but once there I let things happen organically.

Flemming: No, no, really, all my personal work is shot on instinct, whatever makes my eye look.

About how many photos do you shoot for a particular book?

Lindsay: I take several hundred photos per trip. Usually, I end up liking around 75 to 100 of them.

Leon: It depends. Usually between 1,500 and 3,000 images. Let’s say around 100 a day.

Neil: Well, as This is China is my first book, I can tell you that I had about 600 images to chose from, and about 100 made it into the book. You have to be picky when you’re putting your work out there, plus the images have to work. I had some great photographs that were brilliant on their own, but just did not feel right in the book.

Flemming: This varies a lot, but at least 2,000 to 3,000 images.

Did you think about your book while you were taking your photos?

Lindsay: To me, travel is all about the emotions of being in an unfamiliar place. Chronicling a lot of these new experiences so that I could look back many years later and remember exactly how I felt in a particular moment (i.e. the first time I saw the twinkling Eiffel Tower at dusk)—that was the reason I wanted to document the trip. I did think about the photos because the images themselves become gateways to those memories.

Leon: Not that much—first things first. Concentrate on the image and worry back home about the art direction.

Neil: No, not at all. It wasn’t until I finished my trip to China that I felt compelled to create the book. China took me by surprise. I went there with an open mind having done no prior research and I was blown away by the place. I was getting some fascinating photographs of the Chinese people, their cultures, and the way they went about things—and after spending two months absorbing their culture, I knew I had to show the photographs in a way that was personal to me—but also captivating to an audience.

Flemming: No, not at all, I never have any end product in mind for my personal work.

How long did it take you to make your travel photo book?

Lindsay: Writing and editing the copy for magnifique took a few days. Pulling in the photos and customizing my layouts took a few more days. Realistically, I probably could have done the entire thing in a day or two, but I figure that I got to enjoy the process more since it was stretched over the course of about a week.

Leon: I really don’t want to know. For this particular book, I think about 60 hours. I’ve probably spent more than 120 hours on some other Blurb books. As I said, I don’t wanna know

Neil: Too long. I spent two weeks making the first one—then at the last minute completely redesigned it. Altogether it took about six weeks.

Flemming: It was a process that lasted a couple of months, from the initial image selection to editing the visual stories, writing the text stories, re-writing the stories, testing many different layouts, and finding all the elements that went into the limited editing. Photographer Charlene Winfred was the editor of both the visual and text stories and was invaluable—having a great editor is key.

From photo editing to adding captions, discover more tips for creating a great travel photo book. 

What have the reactions been to your travel photo book?

Lindsay: I’ve had a lot of people tell me how much they enjoy my writing style and photography. Net-net, that’s pretty fantastic feedback!

Leon: I’ve never had any reaction on Blurb itself,  but people who have seen the books “live” are generally enthusiastic.

Flemming: The reactions have been phenomenal, my 25 limited-edition copies sold in a week and the normal edition is still selling. I have received so much encouraging positive feedback from everyone who has seen the book and it seems to have taken on a life of its own.

Neil: Well, no one has actually bought it yet, but from the original copy (which I have still yet to see with my own eyes, as I was in Vietnam when it landed at my front door back in the UK) has had some great feedback, not just on the images but the book as a whole. The overall reaction I have had is it looks and feels very professional. Using your Mohawk proPhoto Pearl paper definitely makes a difference.

Where to next?

Lindsay: I’m desperate to get to Iceland for an abundance of waterfalls, hot springs, indie bands, Scandinavian cuisine, and maybe even an elf/gnome/troll sighting! Then I’d also like to see South Africa, New Zealand, and Israel.

Leon: Cuba…next week. And after that one we’ll keep on going to the other side of the horizon.

Neil: I will be off to Myanmar next month, just as soon as I get my 50mm and MacBook Pro repaired. Asia has been very hard on them.

Flemming: I live as a nomad, and have no home—or several should I say. I am presently in Copenhagen, one of my homes, going back to Singapore in April to another home, then Australia to visit friends, and then Europe for the summer.

***

Whether you’re curating a lifetime of adventures or capturing a single unforgettable journey, Blurb is the go-to tool for travel photographers who want to see their work in print. Create your free account and get started today.

The post Travel photo book examples: tips from 4 pro photographers appeared first on Blurb Blog.

The cost of self-publishing a book falls on a broad spectrum that varies from project to project. In short, it can range from several hundred dollars to several thousand. According to the latest data from Reedsy authors can spend anywhere between $500 and $5,000+ to self-publish, with the total cost varying widely.

What’s more relevant is the cost of each necessary publishing component. The overall cost of self-publishing is ultimately determined by the price of services like editing, formatting, cover design, and marketing. Also, the book’s genre and word count impact the final bill.

Let’s compare two polar-opposite books. Self-publishing a novel with a 90,000-word manuscript may require substantial professional editing, which could rack up several thousand in fees. On the other hand, a simple photo book you design yourself may be dramatically cheaper. 

Unfortunately, the unsatisfying but honest answer to this common question is, “It depends.” But by assessing what’s required to bring your book to life, you can figure out a rough estimate of the overarching cost.

Estimating the cost to self-publish your book: what’s involved?

Self-publishing differs from traditional publishing in that the barriers to entry have been knocked down, but the upfront costs to you as a creator are higher. 

So, how much does it cost to self-publish a book? There are four phases of the process where you’ll incur costs to publish a book.

• Development: In addition to actually creating and developing the content of your book, the bulk of the development costs involve phases of editing, cover design, and formatting your book for production.
• Production: The actual printing costs of publishing a book depend on whether you choose print-on-demand (POD) or offset printing. Thanks to technology, POD has made self-publishing far more accessible and affordable.
• Distribution: If getting your book out into the world is an essential part of your bookmaking endeavors, expect some degree of investment depending on your chosen distribution channels.
• Marketing: Perhaps the most variable factor in determining your publishing cost, yet entirely optional depending on your objectives, is how much you want to spend on promoting and raising awareness about your book.

Remember that, with indie publishing, you retain the rights to all your content, but you must pay to produce that content. Traditional publishing produces the content for free, but you have to get picked up by a publisher, which can be a long, arduous journey that may sacrifice your creative control. And then the publisher owns your content at the end. So, while each has its advantages, you’ll need to understand the costs involved and establish a self-publishing book budget if you decide to go that route.

Book development costs

Transforming your content into a professional, marketable book means you will incur costs. There is, unfortunately, no cheap shortcut for preparing a book for print, mainly because there’s so much competition. Most people who choose independent self-publishing don’t have the expertise to launch a book successfully. Even if you’re a practiced photographer or designer, you’re still competing in a market where books are professionally produced. 

Successful book sales have everything to do with quality. People won’t choose your book without a standout cover. And they won’t keep flipping through or buy your next one if your images aren’t stellar and your copy is riddled with errors.

Development costs of self-publishing a book are generally the most substantial, making up most of the overall investment. But they’re also the most essential to ensuring a quality finished product. In addition to the time and energy of creating your book’s content, the primary fees associated with book development are editing, cover design, and formatting.

Editing costs

To ensure your book is polished and professional, there’s no denying the importance of editing as a crucial step in the self-publishing process. Based on Reedsy’s data, the average cost of professional editing services for a text-heavy book ranges between $2,000 and $4,720 for an 80,000-word book. 

This range assumes one round of developmental editing as well as a combination of both copy editing and proofreading. These figures are also based on editing a literary novel, as 80,000 words roughly equate to a 320-page book. So, it’s worth noting that certain types of books require far more editing than others.

Editorial assessment

As an ideal launching pad for an author finalizing their book’s manuscript, an editorial assessment is a cost-effective service that shed light on what to rewrite or restructure. Here, an editor is hired to read and analyze the book’s manuscript and evaluate all elements, from the story and structure to the overall quality and commercial viability.

The high-end price of an editorial assessment for an 80,000-word literary novel is around $1,920.

Developmental editing

For authors who’ve gone as far as they can with their final manuscript, developmental editing involves a more in-depth, start-to-finish structural edit of the book. This editing service includes specific suggestions to enhance major components of the book, like its plot, characterization, pacing, etc. It also involves detailed edits to improve the overall accuracy and delivery of content.

Developmental editing is the most expensive editing service. Based on our 80,000-word novel example, the fees would total about $2,270.

Copy editing

Think of this editing phase as polishing or fine-tuning your book’s manuscript. Copy editors make direct edits on a sentence-by-sentence level, correcting inconsistencies, repetition, or awkward dialogue while improving tone, word choice, and clarity.

Copy editing fees can add up to $2,000 based on our 80,000-word novel example.

Proofreading

As a final stage in the editing process, proofreaders are recruited to help take a book’s manuscript across the finish line. Their services often involve correcting any overlooked grammar, spelling, and punctuation mistakes and making any final recommendations to ensure an optimal reading experience aligned with the publisher’s chosen style guide.

The cost of hiring a proofreader for our 80,000-word book is estimated at $1,440.

Other factors affecting the cost of editing 

Obviously, the length of your book is the most influential factor in determining the cost of editing it. And related to that is the genre, as a text-heavy literary novel will most certainly cost more to edit than a children’s book or photo book. 

Before investing in editing services, also keep in mind these cost-variable considerations:

• Where are you at with your book draft? An early-stage rough draft that hasn’t been reviewed for typos may require more of an editor’s time than a semi-polished draft that you’ve read and edited multiple times.
• How dense is your copy? Some creators, like textbook writers, need elaborate and detailed text, whereas others, like photographers with photo-only books, use only a few words. The former can often translate to more hours invested in copyediting.
• What level of editing experience do you need? As with any craft, hiring a seasoned editor with decades of experience will cost much more than an entry-level editor just getting their footing. 

Depending on what goals you’ve set for your book, investing in professional editing services can pay off. But also bear in mind that these development costs can be the most expensive. Find a happy medium that works within your budget and bookmaking objectives.

Photo editing

For visually-oriented books like portfolios and photo books, a significant portion of the editing fees can go toward hiring a photography editor. The cost of professional photo editing can be priced by hour or by word. Either way, the sheer number of photos will determine the overall workload or cost.

The talent pool is large, ranging from amateur freelancers to experienced editors who specialize in photo books. In turn, photography editors can charge anywhere between $30 and $150 per hour, with $90 being the sweet spot for professional-grade services. You can expect to pay between $3 and $50 per edited photo.

Cover design costs

The front and back covers are critical to your book’s overall presentation and can greatly impact its marketability. Based on Reedsy’s latest estimates, professionally-designed book covers can cost between $625 to $1,250, with most coming in at less than $880. But like editorial services, book cover design quotes depend on several variables.

Factors that can influence the cost of cover design:

• Complexity of design: The intricacy of the cover design can affect the cost. If your book requires a simple and minimalist design, it will likely be less expensive than a cover with detailed illustrations, custom artwork, or complex typography.
• Designer’s experience and expertise: Highly skilled and experienced designers typically charge higher rates due to their track record and reputation. Their understanding of book cover design trends and market expectations can contribute to a more professional and appealing cover and boost your book’s curb appeal.
• Custom artwork and imagery: Requiring custom artwork or illustrations specifically created for your book cover is generally more expensive than stock images. Custom artwork involves significantly more time and effort, while tastefully-curated stock images can be licensed at a much lower cost.
• Number of design concepts: Some designers deliver multiple design concepts for you to choose from and critique. It may increase the cost if you want a range of options to consider. Conversely, the price may be lower if you have a clear vision and provide specific guidelines.
• Revisions and iterations: Requiring several rounds of revisions or making major changes to the design concept will likely result in additional charges. Clarify the number of revisions included in the initial cost and be aware of any potential extra fees for subsequent changes.
• Licensing and copyright: If the cover designer needs to obtain licenses for specific images or fonts, the cost may be higher. It’s important to ensure the designer has the rights and permissions to use any elements in your cover design to avoid copyright issues.

Remember to communicate your vision, genre, and specific requirements to the designer for an accurate cost estimate. It also doesn’t hurt to request quotes from multiple designers, review their portfolios, and consider their experience and style before deciding.

Book formatting costs

Book formatting focuses on the layout and appearance of your book, including specific elements like the organization of chapters, page numbers, paragraph spacing, fonts, line spacing, image placement, and margins. While this might seem like a heavy and costly lift, there are a lot of tools that help streamline this process. 

Formatting your book may or may not require the guidance of a professional. If you want to hire a pro for this work, Reedsy estimates an average cost of $710 for interior design book formatting. These are services that are most applicable to books that are graphic-intensive, with a lot of images, such as cookbooks.

Most self-published authors can minimize book formatting costs by taking a DIY approach. Using tools like Blurb Bookwright, Blurb’s free bookmaking tool, allows you to design, format, and customize your book into a flawless, print-ready format. If you’re already familiar with Adobe InDesign or Lightroom, you can also use a plugin to turn your digital design into a print copy in a snap.

Between editing, cover design, and formatting, a lot goes into the development costs of self-publishing a book. Of course, all of this varies widely depending on the nature of your book and its industry. And we have data on that, too.

Average costs to self-publish a book by industry

Based on the various types of books by industry, self-publishing costs based on page count, editing, and printing are wide-ranging. For example, the cost of self-publishing a simple 20-page recipe book can be a fraction of the cost compared to an in-depth 200-page cookbook with lots of photos.

Here are general self-publishing cost estimates based on industry standards. 

As you can see, the cost of self-publishing a book varies greatly, ranging from under $1,000 to over $5,600. Total publishing costs depend on various book production expenditures, such as formatting, design, editing, etc. With services like Reedsy, you can add these additional book production services a la carte, depending on your self-publishing book budget. Once your final project is finished, you’ll have a file ready for print. And there are book printing options, too, which we’ll discuss below.

Book production costs

To get printed copies of your books, there are two paths you can take. The first is print-on-demand (POD), where books are printed only when ordered and can be ordered one at a time. The other printing option is volume or offset printing. Here we’ll show you the costs of both processes and the pros and cons of each.

The last ten years—even the last five—have seen game-changing developments in printing technology. Even if print-on-demand has been around longer than that, we’re now seeing exquisite quality coming from these digital machines. Advanced inkjet technology now creates pages and covers nearly identical to those made with traditional offset printing, offering incredible advantages to self-publishers.

Print-on-demand books

Print-on-demand (POD) has become a popular self-publishing model where books are printed after orders are placed, making it possible to print single or small quantities without committing to large orders. It’s a great way to minimize the cost of self-publishing a book, especially for aspiring authors or those pursuing bookmaking as a personal project.

POD books are usually printed at a fixed rate per copy, regardless of the order size. While this makes it possible to print small jobs quickly and cheaply, POD doesn’t offer the same level of bulk discounts that offset printing provides with large-quantity print runs. Yet, POD typically makes the most sense for most self-published authors.

Here’s how print-on-demand works.

• You choose your format. From coffee table books to magazines to trade paperbacks, print-on-demand is compatible with any format in a bookstore. The more copies you order, the more cost-effective customization becomes—a higher volume order makes it possible to try different end sheets, ribbon markers, or cover styles—but standard commercial sizes and papers are readily available across printers.
• You create a properly formatted book file. Your PDF or other print-ready files will stay on hand with the printer and can be called up whenever an order is placed for your book.
• Digital printers print and assemble your book. The newest machine innovations have consolidated printing and binding, so your book comes off the line ready to ship.

Print-on-demand advantages

It’s less expensive to self-publish a book upfront

In the past, self-publishing meant printing 1,000 copies and an expensive proofing copy. If there were errors with the first proofing copy, you’d pay again for the second. The book proofs alone could cost anywhere from $100 to $500, plus printing thousands of copies of your self-published book could outpace a down payment on a Ford Focus. For print-on-demand, your only upfront cost is the price of one copy of your book, which could be as low as $10. You’ll see the entire book, and you can do several rounds of proofing for a big order for the same price as one round offset.

It’s fast

Digitally printed books are created in the same facility without shipping blocks and covers to different sites for assembly. Not to mention, commercial digital printing machines are incredibly fast and getting faster. This means even larger orders could be done and in hand in as little as a few weeks, not a few months.

Storage and fulfillment are handled by someone else

Print-on-demand eliminates having thousands of books in the basement that you’ll need to address and ship yourself. The printer or retailer ships the books directly to your customer without effort from you.

Niche books stay in print longer

Digital printing allows for smaller runs, which means books that don’t sell to a wide audience can still come into being without printers suffering major losses. Small-run titles can stick around more.

No pulping waste books

This is better for the self-publisher, the printer, and the environment. Books are printed as they’re ordered, so there is no waste.

Offset printing books

Before POD’s emergence, offset printing was the gold standard in the publishing industry for many years. In addition to being the go-to production method for publishers needing large quantities of books, offset printing produced the highest quality finished product. 

Offset printing involves fabricating metal plates that transfer an image onto a rubber “blanket,” which then transfers the image onto paper. This method allows for a wide range of paper types and sizes and special inks and finishes. It’s called “offset” because the ink is not transferred directly onto the paper but the plates first.

Because offset printing is more analog and resource-intensive, it comes at a much steeper upfront cost. That’s why it typically requires a minimum order of several hundred or even several thousand copies, depending on the printer. For this reason, offset printing is not always feasible when self-publishing a book, especially for authors just starting. But offset printing provides significant advantages for experienced authors and trade publishing companies due to its economies of scale.

Offset advantages

So many variables affect the cost of an offset order, such as customizations and overseas printing, so comparing print-on-demand versus printing offset costs for the same book is challenging. However, printing offset can reduce your per-copy cost by as much as 40%. There are also more opportunities to design and shape the book in unique ways.

Lower cost per copy

Printing offset can mean ordering at least 1,000 copies of your self-published book. But this way of printing, especially with an overseas printer, is hands-down the lowest possible cost-per-copy. You just have to finance a large order. Without negotiating warehousing and fulfillment with your distributor, these tasks are also up to you. Printing offset means the highest possible margin, but you also bear the most significant burdens for up-front cost and distribution.

More customization

Printing offset follows the older printing methods of page creation, cover creation, and assembly. Your printing plates will be custom created, so the creation and setup of plates are factored into your book-proof copy.

Because the plates, trimming, covers, and even materials are individually set up, these large orders make it more cost-effective to make your self-published book look and feel exactly as you like since the setup fees have already been costed out. This means more possibilities for specialty trim sizes, paper types, and cover types. Cost-effectiveness (and therefore feasibility) for customizations increase as orders exceed 1,000 copies.

Brick-and-mortar consignment retail possibility

Self-published books come with their challenges when contending for shelf space, but an offset order creates enough inventory for stocking local establishments. You might not be able to get on the shelves of national chain brick-and-mortar stores, but you can approach local bookshops or other relevant stores to carry your book on consignment (for a portion of your sales).

Possibility for in-person and event sales

Offset orders yield the inventory to follow up speaking engagements or events with a printed-take home piece for your audience and a built-in bookselling opportunity for you.

Control over distribution

If you’d like more options to manage the distribution of your book, or if you would like to offer signed copies and do your own fulfillment, an offset order puts you in charge and stocks you up.

Is the offset price difference worth it?

People enjoy the customization capabilities of offset printing but are really compelled by its effect on the cost per copy. You can estimate the single copy price through Blurb with your paper type, page count, and cover type with the pricing calculator.

Print-on-demand has done many exciting things for bookmakers, creating more options for finding the best fit for your project. Don’t overlook self-publishing because of the high upfront costs for offset printing. And don’t overlook print-on-demand, which offers greater speed, quality, and innovation than what has been available at any other time in print history.

Book distribution cost

How you choose to print and sell your book will determine the cost. For the sake of comparison, we’ll work with the printing case studies above. But first, some terms you need to know.

• Base Price: This is the non-negotiable cost of producing copies of your self-published book. The first step when pricing your book is balancing cost and quality. What choices can you make to get the lowest possible base price while maintaining your vision? This may mean choosing cheaper paper, cover, or format types to control costs.
• Wholesale Discount: This is the cost of distribution—how the distributors make their money in distributing the book. The Blurb Bookstore doesn’t charge a distribution markup, but if selling your book online via Amazon or a consignment in a local shop means factoring the markup into the price.
• Profit: The Blurb system is unique in that you set your book price by how much profit you make. The lower your base price, the more room you have to put your book at a competitive price and keep more of that book price for yourself.

As you figure out your distribution costs, you’ll also need to figure out your book price. Check out our ultimate guide to pricing for self-published creators.

Distribution with print on demand

Printers like Ingram have relationships with Amazon and Barnes & Noble. Blurb’s trade books are printed and distributed with the help of Ingram. Amazon commands almost a third of book sales, so listing your self-published book there comes with its advantages and even credibility. You don’t have to convince customers to go to these sites, and once they do, getting your book into their hands is pretty simple.

• Your book is listed on major bookselling sites.
• Someone orders your book.
• The book is shipped to the retailer, who forwards it to your client.
• Your client pays the retailer, who sends net revenue to you.

Distribution through these sites doesn’t come free, however. Both Amazon and Ingram charge distribution fees and do their own markup, referred to as a “Wholesale Discount.” The “discount” is the markup amount distributors add to your book. It’s usually a percentage of your retail price and any fee.

Let’s look at what your cost might look like.

Example 1: Professional photography book 

Archival-quality photo books have the richest color printing and highest-grade papers and covers. A standard landscape photo book through Blurb, with an ImageWrap hardcover ImageWrap and 30 pages printed on Mohawk ProPhoto Pearl paper, will cost $60 to print. Amazon’s fees for that book are $1.35 plus 15% of the retail price. If your markup is $10.00, that photo book would be $60.38 on Amazon.

$60 print cost + $10 profit + $1.35 distribution fee + 15% wholesale markup = $82.05 retail price

Example 2: Children’s book

You have to balance quality printing with the cost for children’s books. Trade books offer the same quality of printing but more economical paper and cover options. For a portable 6-by-9-inch trade book with a softcover and economy color printing, the print cost is $4.99. Amazon’s fees are $1.35 + 15% of the retail price, as they were above. If your markup is $2, you’d sell your children’s book at a reasonable $9.59 on Amazon.

$4.99 print cost + $2 profit + $1.35 distribution fee + 15% wholesale markup = $9.59 retail price

Example 3: Hardcover novel

If you’re selling a novel, you likely want to start with a hardcover option and then do a softcover release. For your launch, a 6-by-9-inch trade book with an ImageWrap hardcover and 350 economy, black-and-white printed pages will cost $13.99 to print through Blurb. Ingram’s fees for that book are 36% of the retail price. If your markup is $5, your book would be $25.82 per copy in the Ingram catalog for book retailers.

$13.99 print cost + $5 profit +36% wholesale markup = $25.82 retail price

Distribution with offset

Distributing an offset run is as unique as the books it prints. Most of the time, authors who opt for a large print run estimate the number of copies they believe they can realistically sell. These distribution costs are harder to determine, but for large runs, part of the cost becomes warehousing and fulfillment unless you do the storing and packaging yourself.

Consider doing a smaller POD print run to test your market and get feedback. You must know your market well and how to reach them to effectively estimate distribution costs with an offset run.

Book marketing costs

The final step in the process also incurs self-publishing costs, but this is the most variable—and arguably most important if you’re trying to sell your book. As self-publishing becomes easier, the market becomes increasingly saturated. That’s why saving some funds to get your book promoted is a good idea. Start by figuring out where and how to sell your book with this definitive guide.

While it will take you a bit of time and research to have a good idea of your marketing costs, to begin you’ll want to factor in the costs of three things.

• Your creator website. This includes development, maintenance, and hosting. You can learn some of this without a web background, but as with a book cover, professional help is also recommended here. This can be upwards of $1,000.
• Your launch plan. Reedsy lists various services, but you can connect with a media plan and do a paid launch with a book launching service. This can range from $50 to $1,000, depending on how well you leverage social media and local opportunities. It involves Amazon paid ads, paid ads on social media, and paid search ads with Google. It might also include paying for advertisement design.
• Your launch events. Sometimes, cultivating a good relationship with an independent bookstore can give you space for a launch event. But if you do book promotion and launch events, speaking engagements, and more without a publisher, the costs are on you. They are great opportunities to distribute large offset orders, so be ready!

The bottom line

Independent publishing means you can call the shots and set your budget. There is so much freedom in self-publishing your book. If you don’t have the resources to purchase top-of-the-line help or promotion right now, you can get started and grow your following and sales organically. You can learn what works and what doesn’t for you, work through trial and error, and recycle earnings from your first round into your subsequent indie publishing. You will find your own way to streamline self-publishing costs and maximize profits. Know that most authors find their success after a few self-publishing tries, so whatever it costs today will be different next time around.  It’s a journey, so enjoy all the learning as you go!

Self-publish your book with Blurb

When you’re ready to self-publish your book, Blurb makes it easy to design, organize, and sell it across multiple distribution channels. Assemble your book using Blurb’s free templates and intuitive bookmaking tool BookWright, or use integrated software like Adobe InDesign, Lighthouse, or Photoshop. Blurb also has a PDF-to-book uploader that allows you to turn PDF content into publish-ready material.

Whether you’re creating a comic book, children’s book, or a photo book, the cost of self-publishing doesn’t have to be a financially-draining endeavor. Blurb simplifies the pricing model of publishing while taking the guesswork out of the creation process. Best of all, you receive a bookstore-quality finished product that rivals the books produced by major publishing houses.

FAQs

1. What is the cheapest way to self-publish a book?

You can keep production costs near zero dollars by utilizing free design software and taking a DIY approach to writing, designing, illustrating, and more. And with print-on-demand, you don’t have to pay upfront for large print runs—copies are only printed when a customer orders one, and the printing cost is included in what the customer pays. This means you have no printing fees at all, except for any proof copies you order as part of your creation process.

2. How can I self-publish a book on a limited budget?

If you’re working with a small budget, consider the following to keep your costs on track: 

• Focus your spending on the essentials. Professional cover design often offers the single best ROI.
• Engage early supporters or peers to support you with basic editing or proofreading.
• Choose print-on-demand instead of bulk printing.
• Leverage free DIY design tools like BookWright.

Reduce marketing expenses by focusing on organic content marketing, attending local events, and joining online reader communities. Discover more ideas to help you market your book.

3. What factors affect the cost of self-publishing a children’s book, photo book, or novel?

Self-publishing costs vary significantly by book type due to different production requirements:

• Children’s books: Professional illustration is the largest cost driver. The number of illustrations needed, the artist’s experience level, and the complexity of the artwork all impact your budget. Full-color printing throughout also increases production costs compared to standard black-and-white text books.
• Photo books: High-resolution images are best displayed with premium color printing. Paper quality becomes critical—heavier, archival-quality paper stock is often necessary to properly showcase photography. The number of images and whether you need professional photo editing services also affect costs.
• Novels: Black-and-white interior printing, standard paper stock, and text-focused editing keep costs lower. However, longer manuscripts may require more extensive (and expensive) editing services.

Beyond book type, these universal factors impact your final price:

• Page count: More pages increase both printing costs and editing time and fees.
• Trim size: Non-standard or oversized formats typically cost more to produce.
• Binding style: Hardcover, softcover, or specialty binding options all come at different price points.
• Paper quality: Choosing between standard, premium, or specialty paper stocks significantly affects printing expenses.
• Color vs. black-and-white: Full-color interior printing costs substantially more than black-and-white text.

4. Are there hidden costs in self-publishing that authors should be aware of?

Beyond the obvious costs, self-published authors sometimes overlook the cost of:

• ISBN purchases (if needed for distribution)
• Proof copies for final review
• Shipping costs for author copies
• Revisions after proof copies
• Promotional images or stock photography
• Marketing

These extras can add up, so it’s smart to include a buffer in your budget.

5. Can AI tools help reduce the cost of self-publishing a book in 2025?

AI tools can significantly reduce self-publishing costs across multiple areas. For editing, tools like Grammarly, ProWritingAid, and ChatGPT can handle initial proofreading and copy editing for 10 to 30 dollars per month, potentially cutting professional editing costs by 40 to 60 percent. AI image generators can create cover artwork for $20-30/month instead of $500-800, though you may still want to work with a designer for final polish. And when it comes to marketing, AI can write ad copy, social media posts, and email campaigns that would traditionally cost $500-1,000 from freelancers.

The most cost-effective approach is hybrid: Use AI for initial drafts and routine tasks, then invest in human expertise for critical elements like final editing passes and cover design refinement. Authors using this strategy can reduce total costs from $4,000-6,000 to $1,500-3,000 while maintaining professional quality. However, remember that AI can’t replace human creativity, market knowledge, and the nuanced judgment that makes a book truly stand out.

***

Ready to turn your ideas into a finished book? With Blurb, you can design, print, and publish with professional quality at a price that fits your goals. Create your free account and get started today. 

The post How much does it cost to self-publish a book? appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Zines have always been a playground for creative expression—part art object, part creative manifesto. Whether you’re stepping into self-publishing for the first time or expanding your creative practice, these 24 zine ideas blend history, culture, and imagination to help you find inspiration for your next self-publishing project.

What is a zine (and why should you make one?)

Zines are small, self-made publications created to share ideas, stories, or art outside traditional publishing channels. You could say that zines are the embodiment of self-publishing. From hand-drawn collages to carefully designed mini magazines, zines have long been a way for creators to express personal perspectives, celebrate niche communities, and challenge mainstream narratives.

Unlike commercial magazines, zines thrive on independence. They can be as simple or as experimental as you like. What matters most is the act of creation and connection: turning your voice, vision, or cause into something tangible that can be shared.

Want to dig deeper into the world of zines and how they evolved as part of the self-publishing movement? Read our full guide to zines and self-publishing.

24 zine ideas

1. Political persuasion

The zine’s beginnings can span back in time to pamphlets like Thomas Paine’s Common Sense in 1775. His 47-page piece of prose encouraged ordinary colonists to fight for independence and started the revolution—who knows what yours might do.

Why not try to create a persuasive political print argument of your own?

2. Black activist “little magazines”

Amid the Harlem Renaissance, a group of notable Black activists and authors gathered to create Fire, an influential literary magazine dedicated to spreading Black thought. This led to a proliferation of “little magazines” by other Black authors.

Continue the tradition with a little magazine of your own.

3. Sci-fi fanzine

The first time zines came to be known as zines was in the 1930s when “fan magazines” (shortened to “fanzine” and then “zine”) ran rampant. Famed authors like Ray Bradbury joined in the movement of small-run prints.

Follow in their footsteps by creating an intergalactic romance from your most cherished sci-fi book or an ode to your favorite sci-fi show.

4. Queer community building

In June 1947, Edythe Eyde typed out the first volume of Vice Versa, which she called “America’s Gayest Magazine.” While today there are far more avenues for LGBTQ+ ideas to spread, the zine remains an essential method of communication with small communities.

There’s no reason not to take after Edythe and mail or hand-deliver your queer declaration to friends.

5. Poetic license

Alongside the sci-fi and literary works of the 30s, 40s, and 50s came poetry zines—from collectives of niche artists that wanted to share their work but couldn’t access the traditional publishing methods. Printed with a mimeograph machine, producing copies by forcing ink through a stencil, they could print and distribute only 100 or so zines.

Create your short poetry collection—include all the work a traditional publisher would never print.

6. Seriously terrifying horror

Off the back of the sci-fi fanzine movement came creepy-crawly horror zines. With titles like Gore Creatures, Cinemacabre, and Black Oracle to draw inspiration from, there’s no end to the spooky creations you can create yourself.

Draw from your worst nightmares to create a horror piece made for a super short zine.

7. Underground art

During the 60s and 70s, art and literary zines spread through niche networks—aiming to share art the commercial art world refused to publish. Groups of artists, or single artists alone, turned their works into short prints to share.

We’re ready to see your collection of your weirdest friends’ weirdest art and illustrations.

8. Rock prozine

Sci-fi and comic zine creators in the 60s realized they shared an interest in rock music. Thus the music zine came to be. Most famous was a zine turned prozine turned magazine named Crawdaddy! One 17-year-old Swarthmore College student turned a collection of his own rock and roll criticisms into a mass-market magazine.

What’s stopping you from sharing your own opinions of your favorite artists?

9. Punk DIY

From the rock zine came the punk zine. In the late 70s and 80s, the grungy, DIY ethos of this iteration of the zine covered iconic bands like The Clash and The Ramones. The genre aesthetic took a turn with the increasing accessibility of copy machines and home printing tech—meaning scissors, glue, and xeroxing became the name of the game.

Go back to the punk roots with handwritten text and rough and ready comics (maybe even using pilfered sharpies).

10. Riot grrrl ruckus

A decade later, riot grrrls burst onto the scene, challenging the sexism in punk with its female empowerment values. The feminist practice of sharing personal experiences to build community meant that bands shared not only music but also musician-created zines.

Take a page from Bikini Kill’s book and take your band to the written page—with a healthy splash of women’s rights and revolutionary rage.

11. Graphic and comic zines

Throughout the century, zines spread to other countries, including a proliferation of Mexican comic books and graphic novels in the 2000s. The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill’s Mexican Comic Collection and La Maleta Fanzinera both have tons of excellent examples.

Try your hand at a visual zine by illustrating your work.

Loving these ideas? To get more inspiration and tips delivered straight to your inbox, create your free account today. 

12. Webzines turned print

The rise of the internet also meant a decline in zines. Some print publications made the jump to webzine, like Boing Boing. But much of the effort that would-be zinesters put into their art went into blogs, online journals, and (now) social media. Go in reverse and transform your blog, journal, or social media account into zine form.

What would your Instagram feed look like if it were a DIY print piece?

13. Mamazine

You’ve seen the mothering blogs with their (sometimes harsh) opinions, the parenting magazines with their (always endless) advertising. Well, here’s what every parent really needs: a simple, judgment-free and ad-free guide to carrying, birthing, and raising kids. Check out East Village Inky for an idea of what we’re talking about.

What do you have to show and tell about the experience of parenthood?

14. Travelogue

We like to think the travel zine came about to eradicate having to sit through the painstaking slideshows of someone else’s vacation. Booooring. Instead, travel zines become two-dimensional storytellers in photos and words.

What made your last adventure most memorable? Why not make an issue out of it?

15. Oddities zine

Humans all have their idiosyncrasies, and there’s no better way to share your love of taxidermy, seeing faces in random objects, or explaining the finer points of building your self-playing saxophone than by making an oddities zine.

Think it’s weird? Exactly the point. What makes you unique?

16. Chapters in mental health

Sometimes you can’t explain your thoughts and feelings, but it helps when you hear stories or see art that others have made to express themselves during hard times. Lina Wu’s 40-page zine For Girls Who Cry Often is a perfect example.

Check out more zines like hers. Use them as inspiration to make your own—for you or someone else.

17. Foodie and drinkie zine

Chinese Protest Recipes? A zine that’s part memoir and part menu? A title that introduces an entirely new word to your vocabulary: Chewn? They’re not just recipe books. These have all the ingredients—art, musings, content—of a well-balanced zine.

What topics would you like others to chew on and say cheers to over a shared meal?

18. Hand-lettering lovers

A simple phrase about life may be nothing on its own, but once you pack it with the power of hand lettering, it becomes a statement piece. Zines are confrontational in nature, thanks largely to alphabetic art. We’re especially inspired by artist Isabel Urbina Peña’s work.

If fonts are your love language, consider making your own—and making it into a zine.

19. Literary zines

Zines are often known for art. But don’t forget the art of the written word. We’ve all heard, “The pen is mightier than the sword.” Nowhere is this more true than in the world of literary zines. Fiction, essays, poetry, lyrics, manifestos: these are the hallmarks of self-publishing life.

Consider a few writing prompts and let your imagination take to the page.

20. Astrology vignettes

Imagine the volumes and issues of different stars aligning. What’s marriage like between a Gemini and Pisces? What if they have a Scorpio child? If you have the gift of fortune-telling or card reading, you could make your gift into a zine (heck, and a business!).

Tell the tale of your romance in a zine that maps the moons and the stars that brought you together.

21. Kid manifesto

Kids may be shy to speak their feelings, but chances are, they have a lot to say. Whereas some people make photo books for each year of a kid’s life, there’s also a lot to be said for encouraging them to make a zine of what’s going on inside their hearts and minds.

Challenge a kid you know to express something they feel strongly about through writings and pictures.

22. Petzine

The proper way to feed chinchillas? Everything you ever wanted to know about the ball python? For exotic pets, zines make excellent how-to guides that can be artfully told. The trick is to make it unique and unlike a regular handbook. Perhaps make it into a comic-book-style story. Or build top 10 lists of various topics—best names, coolest tricks, weirdest habits.

Is your pet zine-worthy? “Umm…yes,” they’d say if they could talk.

23. Tattoo mini-memoir

Tattoos were once the art of rebels only. Today they’re much more mainstream, but there’s still a story behind each and every one. Early tattoo artists put their work in handy zines for admiring and attracting clients—a portfolio of sorts.

What’s your ink have to say?

24. Interviews and musings

We love that author and artist Hannah Hightman interviewed all her heroes and made them into a zine that’s the perfect blend of artful punk and high school.

Who are the influencers that would make your interview list?

Ready to bring your zine idea to life?

Whether you’re drawn to collage, poetry, photography, or personal storytelling, zine-making is about translating your ideas into something you can hold, share, and celebrate.

From layout and design to printing and finishing touches, there are countless ways to shape your vision. Learn how to move from concept to creation with our step-by-step guide: How to make a zine: a beginner’s guide to getting started

Zine FAQs

1. What are the best zine ideas for beginners?

If you’re new to zine-making, keep things simple to start. Beginners often experiment with mini zines about music, travel, or daily life. Some great beginner zine ideas include:

• A mini art zine of sketches or doodles
• A short poetry or writing collection
• A collage-based DIY zine using recycled materials
• A photography zine capturing local life or travel memories

2. How do I come up with creative zine ideas?

Start by exploring your own personal interests, whether that’s music, fashion, nature, or community issues. Brainstorm DIY zine ideas that reflect your personality or creative skills. You could also remix old journal entries, art projects, or poems into new zine themes.

3. How many pages should a zine be?

There’s no strict rule, but most zines range from 8 to 40 pages. A mini zine can be made from a single folded sheet of paper, while larger art zines or literary zines often run longer. The right length depends on your theme, layout, and budget.

Blurb’s magazines start at 20 pages—perfect for a zine!

***

With Blurb, you can design, print, and share your one-of-a-kind zine using professional-quality tools made for creators like you. Create your free account and get started today.

The post 24 zine ideas for DIY creators and self-publishers appeared first on Blurb Blog.

More and more artists, designers, and companies are using notebooks as personal creative tools and giftable or sellable products. A beautifully made notebook can showcase your visual style, reinforce your brand, or serve as an entry point into selling your own printed work.

In this post, we’ll share Wire-O notebook ideas you can design, publish, and sell—from guided journals and planners to branded client gifts and leave-behinds. We hope each one sparks ideas for your next project, whether you’re creating for joy, for business, or a bit of both.

What is a Wire-O notebook?

A Wire-O notebook uses a double-loop metal binding that allows the pages to turn smoothly and lie completely flat. It’s the kind of format creators rely on because it’s sturdy, flexible, and easy to work with. You can fold it back, sketch across both pages, or keep it open on your desk without the spine snapping shut.

It’s easy to mix up Wire-O notebooks with spiral or coil styles, but they’re made differently. Spiral notebooks use one long wire that loops through the pages, while Wire-O notebooks use two even loops that stay aligned for smoother page turns and a cleaner look. They also differ from perfect-bound notebooks, which are glued along a flat spine and don’t lie totally flat or fold back. 

This format is designed for everyday use, perfect for journaling, sketching, planning, or note-taking. You can fill it with lined, dotted, grid, or blank pages, depending on how you like to work. Some creators even mix layouts to combine writing, drawing, and organizing in a single project.

If you’re curious about how the format works or want to start a project, check out our Wire-O notebooks. You’ll find customization options, paper types, and sizes to match your creative style. And you can design and print Wire-O notebooks online using professional tools or templates, so it’s simple to turn your ideas into a finished notebook.

Benefits of a Wire-O notebook

A Wire-O notebook bridges creativity and commerce. It’s approachable for first-time makers and powerful enough for experienced creators who want to expand their product line. Here’s why it stands out.

For personal use

• Lies completely flat: write, sketch, or plan comfortably across both pages.
• Easy to handle: folds back on itself for use in small spaces.
• Built to last: the double-loop metal binding keeps pages secure and aligned.
• Lightweight and portable: simple to carry to shoots, studios, or meetings.
• Beautiful to use: feels polished and considered, even for everyday notes.

For selling

• Low production cost: affordable to create, making it a smart product or leave-behind to test.
• High perceived value: looks and feels premium while staying accessible in price.
• Full creative control: customize the cover, paper, and layout to reflect your brand.
• Perfect for small-batch sales: ideal for boutique collections, client gifts, or online shops.
• Built for ongoing releases: create one, a few, or an entire series—whatever fits your creative plan.

11 creative Wire-O notebook ideas

Now that you know the what and the why, let’s get into the concepts.

1. Daily gratitude journal

A gratitude journal is a simple project that makes a big impact. It encourages reflection and helps people stay grounded—something many of us are looking for these days. Whether you’re making one for yourself or others, a well-designed layout turns mindfulness into a daily habit worth keeping.

How to make it:

• Start with short guided prompts like Today I’m grateful for… or One thing I learned today… to spark reflection.
• Mix lined and blank pages for writing or sketching flexibility.
• Include a small date area at the top of each page for easy tracking.
• Use calm, readable typography with generous spacing to create an uncluttered feel.
• Add design accents like suns, musical notes, or even your logo to keep it feeling on-theme.
• Insert a monthly reflection spread or quote page every 30 entries to encourage motivation.

2. Personal productivity planner

A personal productivity planner is one of the most versatile notebooks to make. It has broad appeal, works across audiences, and offers endless design possibilities. Whether minimalist or colorful, the right format can turn a daily habit into a creative ritual. They’re also evergreen, low-content projects that can be easily refreshed for new seasons or design themes.

How to make it:

• Use a weekly or daily layout with time slots on one page and tasks or priorities on the other.
• Add simple productivity tools like a Top 3 Priorities box, daily habit tracker, or notes section.
• Design modular grids or columns for clean, consistent layouts that make each page feel purposeful.
• Use light color accents or icons to highlight key areas without cluttering the design.
• Include periodic goal-setting spreads, either monthly or quarterly, to track milestones and maintain momentum.

Dive deeper into the art of personalized productivity and learn how to create your own bullet journal with our step-by-step guide.

3. Recipe keeper

A recipe keeper is both personal and shareable. It captures the dishes that define a family, a season, or a creative streak in the kitchen. The format is simple, functional, and endlessly customizable—ideal for everyday cooking, gifts, or small-batch sales.

How to make it:

• Start with a recipe entry template that repeats throughout the notebook. Include space for the recipe name, serving size, and prep or cook time.
• Design a two-column format with ingredients on one side and directions on the other for clarity.
• Add a notes area for adjustments, substitutions, or personal memories tied to the dish.
• Use color coding or section markers to organize recipes by category (like mains, sides, or desserts) for easy navigation.
• Include a few flexible pages for users to paste in photos, clipped recipes, or handwritten cards.
• Add bonus spreads like conversion charts or meal planners to make the notebook more practical for everyday cooking.

4. Branded company notebook

A branded notebook works best when it doesn’t look like a promo item. The goal is to design something people actually want to use—clean, functional, and beautiful enough to keep on a desk. It can double as a client gift, onboarding piece, event giveaway, or part of a larger product line. Done well, it’s a product that fits anywhere: a store shelf, a welcome kit, or a conference table.

How to make it:

• Design an opening spread with a logo, tagline, and short brand story or mission message.
• Keep the interior adaptable and straightforward, using lined or dotted pages that work across roles or purposes.
• Add understated brand details like color accents, custom patterns, or a small logo at the back.
• Include a closing page with contact details, QR codes, or social links for continued connection.
• Add functional extras like meeting notes, to-do lists, or project planning pages to make it genuinely helpful.

Discover how businesses are using printed books to grow their brand and strengthen client relationships: seven book ideas that build brand loyalty.

5. Wedding planner

A wedding planner notebook captures both the planning and the story behind it. It brings order to the chaos of to-do lists, while preserving the excitement and personal touches that make each celebration unique. Designed well, it becomes both a trusted guide and a lasting memento—perfect for personal use or as a timeless product to sell.

How to make it:

• Start with a planning overview that outlines key milestones, like booking the venue, sending invites, and confirming vendors.
• Add task checklists with due dates, responsibilities, and check boxes to keep planning on track.
• Include budgeting pages with tables for expenses, deposits, and balances.
• Design vendor contact pages for quick access to names, numbers, and notes.
• Add blank or dotted pages for sketches, vision boards, and layout ideas.
• Use elegant typography and soft neutral colors to create a timeless, polished look.
• Finish with a day-of checklist that can be handed off to the wedding party.

6. Fitness and wellness tracker

A fitness and wellness tracker helps organize daily health habits and progress in one place. It blends structure and reflection—ideal for tracking movement, nutrition, sleep, and even mindset over time. It’s also fairly simple to make, rewarding to use, and easy to sell to anyone focused on health and balance.

How to make it:

• Use a daily log format with fields for the date, workout type, duration, and notes.
  Add tracking boxes for hydration, mood, meals, and hours of sleep.
• Include weekly reflection pages where users can record highlights, challenges, or progress summaries.
  Design clean tables and icons for quick data entry that still look visually appealing.
• Sprinkle in motivational quotes or affirmations throughout the notebook for inspiration.
• Offer optional sections for goal setting, measurements, or milestone rewards.

7. Travel journal

A travel journal captures experiences, reflections, and discoveries along the way. It’s one of the most personal and creative notebook types to make—perfect for recording memories, sketching on the go, or building a product that connects with travelers and storytellers alike.

How to make it:

• Mix page types with lined, dotted, and blank spreads to support both writing and sketching.
• Add light journaling prompts such as Where I went, Who I met, Today’s highlight, and What I learned.
• Include photo spaces or framed boxes for pasting printed images, postcards, or ticket stubs.
• Design simple section dividers for each destination or trip to make navigation easy.
• Add illustrated elements like small maps, icons, or patterns that evoke a sense of place.
• Include packing checklists and trip budgets near the front for practical planning.

Check out the Little Travel Memories Co’s travel journal for fun content ideas, including puzzles, games, drawing projects, and more!

8. Garden planner

A garden planner notebook brings structure to the growing season. It helps track planting schedules, harvest timelines, and seasonal notes while leaving room for creativity and reflection. The format works beautifully for personal gardening projects or as a thoughtful product to sell to nature lovers and home growers.

How to make it:

• Create structured tables for plant names, sowing dates, sunlight needs, and care notes.
• Add daily or weekly observation pages to record growth, weather patterns, and seasonal changes.
• Include dotted or grid pages for sketching garden layouts, mapping beds, or visualizing rotation plans.
• Use an earthy color palette with botanical line drawings or subtle watercolor textures.
• Include reference spreads for growing zones, seed-starting calendars, or companion-planting charts.

For more ideas and inspiration, check out our guide to designing a garden journal.  

9. Kid’s activity book

A kid’s activity book combines learning, creativity, and play in one bright package—perfect for parents and educators. It can focus on specific themes like travel, nature, or storytelling, and works exceptionally well as a custom educational product or brand collaboration.

How to make it:

• Choose an engaging theme like animals, seasons, or local landmarks to give the book focus.
• Alternate between activity types like coloring pages, mazes, connect-the-dots, word searches, and spot-the-difference puzzles.
• Keep language and visuals straightforward and positive, with clear instructions and friendly illustrations.
• Use bright colors and simple typography to keep it fun and easy to read.
• Add creative prompts that invite kids to draw, write stories, or reflect on their experiences.
• Consider adding a section for parents or teachers with tips on using the book.

Looking for some inspiration? We love Jessie Olsen Moore’s Unicorn Coloring Book for its playful theme and magical illustrations. 

10. Budget or savings tracker

Money management is a universal need, and visual tools help people stick with it. A thoughtfully designed tracker feels approachable and empowering, especially when it’s easy to follow and fill in. A clear layout and consistent design can turn routine budgeting into a rewarding, sustainable habit.

How to make it:

• Start with clear categories for income, expenses, and savings goals.
• Use monthly or weekly spreads to make tracking feel achievable.
• Design consistent tables with spaces for notes and reflections.
• Add visual motivators like progress bars, icons, or milestone checklists.
• Include resource pages with budgeting tips, common expenses, or debt payoff templates.
• Keep the tone friendly and encouraging to make financial planning feel approachable.

11. Dream journal

A dream journal captures ideas, symbols, and stories from the subconscious. It’s both reflective and creative—a quiet space for recording nightly impressions or exploring inspiration that surfaces through dreams. Designed well, it feels calming and intentional, encouraging moments of focus before the day begins.

How to make it:

• Include a repeatable page layout with space for the date, time, and mood upon waking.
• Add lined sections for writing detailed dream notes and blank areas for sketches or visual interpretations.
• Use soft, muted colors and celestial motifs like stars, moons, and gradients to create a soothing atmosphere.
• Add a short reference section with information about common symbols or themes in dreams.

Get inspired by Aimee Hodgins’ Cosmic Dream Journal, which encourages readers to consider the phases of the moon as a powerful element in their dream journaling practice.

How to design, print, and sell your Wire-O notebook

Once you have an idea you love, it’s time to bring it to life. Here’s a quick primer on everything you need to design, proof, and print your Wire-O notebook—whether you’re creating one for yourself or producing a small collection to sell.

1. Pick a design tool. Choose a platform that fits your process. Browser-based editors (like BookWright Online) are great for simple layouts, while downloadable tools (like BookWright by Blurb or Adobe InDesign) offer complete control over typography and design. You can also use a program you already know (like Canva or Affinity) and upload a finished, print-ready PDF.
2. Choose a format and materials. If you’re using Blurb, choose a size (5×8, 6×9, or 8×10 inches) and page style (lined, dotted, grid, or blank). The Standard Color paper option won’t let pen marks show through and works well for writing or sketching.
3. Design the interior. Use templates to keep layouts consistent and functional. Add subtle color bars, icons, or dividers to organize sections. Leave generous margins for writing or drawing, and make sure everything feels clean and intentional.
4. Design the cover. Let the cover express purpose and personality. Simple typography and neutral tones feel polished, while bold patterns or illustrations bring energy. A short title can help clarify the notebook’s focus at a glance.
5. Proof and print. Upload your design, use the preview to check margins and page flow, then order a single proof copy to see how it looks and feels before printing more.
6. Sell or share your notebooks. Print one copy or a small batch. List in an online store—the Blurb Bookstore has no listing fees—or sell locally through markets, boutiques, or events. You can also bundle notebooks into a larger creative collection.

To dive deeper into creating, pricing, and promoting your notebooks, explore:

• How to make a notebook to sell
• How to make a custom notebook or journal
• Creative notebook and journal ideas

Ready to publish!

Wire-O notebooks aren’t just another product—they’re a place to start. Each one gives you the freedom to experiment, refine your design, and share something that’s both useful and beautiful. From the first idea to the finished print, you’re building more than pages—you’re building creative confidence.

Whether you’re designing for personal use or building a collection to sell, this format gives you professional polish while still allowing you to experiment. It’s a practical, versatile way to bring your ideas off the screen and into people’s hands.

***

Blurb helps creators make that leap from concept to print. With professional-quality tools, flexible printing options, and global reach, it’s a self-publishing platform built for experimentation and growth. Start with a single notebook—or your next big idea.

The post Eleven creative Wire-O notebook ideas to make and sell appeared first on Blurb Blog.

That vision culminated in the Architectural Guide of Washington, D.C., a printed extension of her poetic documentary films brought to life through a Kickstarter campaign supported by a community that shares her love of preservation and craft. Each page is composed like a scene: measured, textural, and cinematic in its stillness. The result feels less like a guide and more like an artifact—signed, wrapped, and built to last.

In this conversation, Tibbetts reflects on translating film to print, from storyboarding and material testing to pricing a large-order print run and designing for permanence. She offers a rare look at what happens when storytelling, design, and preservation converge on the page.

***

Want more inspiration like this? Sign up for emails to get a new Behind the Book delivered every month.

What’s the story behind your career as a photographer and filmmaker, and how did DomoNaut grow out of that?

My professional path in photography began after I finished Boston University’s Digital Imaging Arts curriculum, and threw me rather haphazardly into the real estate photography niche. Since I spent my formative years traveling around Europe (I will never be able to thank my parents enough), it felt like a great fit at the time. But I was just really happy to get a paying creative gig, because those same parents assured me that it was not possible. 

Fast forward 10 years, and I had built a small real estate marketing firm offering graphic design, branding, printing, and photo and video services. I’ve always gravitated toward the historic houses I photographed, so I suggested to one of my clients to do a short video on her historic property listing, talking about the house’s architectural style, its additions and modifications, and the town of Alexandria, where the house was. 

Shot on a photography camera, with terrible sound and even worse color grading, I had a pilot. Moreover, I had a new mission—to uncover the stories of historic houses and share them with those to whom these doors were closed. Thus, the YouTube channel DomoNaut Histories was born, and I have since visited and filmed some of the most interesting addresses in the D.C. area. 

You’ve described DomoNaut as a way to preserve and share the stories behind historic places. Can you tell us more about that mission and why it matters to you?  

I think architecture is one of the most honest storytellers we have. It records our values, our craftsmanship, even our complexities, and freezes them in time. It’s essentially time travel. However, life has a tendency to get in our way, and not everyone is able to journey out to these beautiful landmarks. 

Through DomoNaut, I aim to bring an intimate, holistic experience to lovers of history and architecture that would otherwise be a physical, private tour. It works equally well for the museums, as they are able to share their story with a wider audience and bring more visitors in, which in turn leads to more funding for preservation efforts. Some of the Domo films have been used in grant proposals and donor meetings, generating generous sums for important maintenance. 

The films often stir viewers emotionally, inviting them to rediscover familiar places through little-known stories and a renewed sense of wonder. The quiet light, the textures, and the stillness all seem to pull people into another time. That sense of connection is what drives me: helping audiences experience the soul of these places, to understand them better.

Why did you decide to create Architectural Guide of Washington, D.C., and what was your main goal with the book?  

The book grew naturally out of the films. I’m fascinated by printing photography and how an image transforms when it’s taken off the screen and fixed onto paper. It’s almost a lost art, and in our digital age, I think it’s vital to keep those tactile crafts alive. There’s a permanence and honesty in print that mirrors what I love about historic architecture. 

Creating the Architectural Guide felt like a natural extension of DomoNaut’s mission, as well as a consolidation of all the wonderful landmarks in the city, all while preserving them through a medium that carries history itself. My goal was to make something timeless that people could hold, study, and return to as a printed companion to the films.

Walk us through your design and production process, from concept to layout to materials. How did you organize your workflow, make creative decisions, and translate your visual storytelling into print?

I approached the book like a film: First, I started with the concept. I began by storyboarding the landmarks I wanted to include, and that list kept growing. An incredible amount of time was spent in Google Maps and various historical archive websites. A few times I thought my list was complete, and then I would drive down a street only to discover a church I hadn’t seen before. 

For my layout, I had to consider the flow and how color, texture, and text would move from page to page. I curated imagery to create visual rhythm, balancing scale, tone, and color. In the photo gallery, larger architectural forms are paired with quiet, intimate details, and the book’s entire palette echoes D.C.’s layered character. I chose a minimalist layout by intention; I wanted the architecture and typography to breathe together, and give the book a sense of calm, curated design—almost like a museum presentation. 

Every material choice, from paper weight to cover texture, was about tactility. I wanted people to feel the craft, the way they might feel stone or wood in the real world. 

What do you hope people feel when they close the book? 

I would hope they feel that quiet awe that comes when you recognize how beauty endures: patiently, through centuries. The Guide isn’t just about buildings; it’s about the continuity between past and present, and the stories of those who came before us and created this beautiful world for us. Hidden in its pages are small invitations to slow down, to notice the craftsmanship, the light, and some well-placed easter eggs. 

In that sense, becoming a DomoNaut isn’t just about exploring architecture; it’s about learning to see differently. To walk through the world with a deeper curiosity, a reverence for time, and an awareness of how history still breathes all around us. 

What was your biggest challenge in bringing this project to life?

One of my biggest challenges was coordinating access to each landmark for photography. An important site we had on the books faced unexpected construction closures and had to back out at the last moment, and other scheduling conflicts would make visits difficult. And of course, there’s weather. 

Another hurdle was finding the right writing partner. An early collaboration fell through, but ultimately I found the ideal match in Elizabeth Reese—a public historian who works in a historic house museum in Alexandria. Her deep understanding of architectural heritage and local history made her the best partner I could have hoped for. 

I also had some challenges with printing itself, as I spent a lot of time testing how different tones and contrasts printed, and figuring out the right margins, because digital screens can be deceptive. It was definitely an exercise in restraint and patience!

From the wrapping to the signature, each copy feels collectible. What was behind that decision?

The wrapping came from my love for giving gifts, and I chose the brown postal paper (or Kraft paper) as a nod to the 19th century, when it was the standard for shipping parcels. My favorite historical excerpt about it is actually that they had shipped the Hope Diamond to the Smithsonian wrapped in only Kraft paper in the late 50s, which is unfathomable now! 

As for the handwritten notes, I had originally intended to have a signed first edition for my Kickstarter backers, but I wanted to take it a step further and add a personal touch, thanking them for their support, because it really means a lot to me that they were able to make this dream a possibility. Besides, whenever I find an old book with a note in the first pages, it snaps the past into reality. That’s what I wanted to replicate.

Why did you choose Blurb and our Large Order Services team as your printing partner, and how did that collaboration help bring your vision to life?  

I had a mentor long ago who adored printing his short stories. He used Blurb back then and encouraged me to put together a small book for an exercise. I still have it, a little hardcover 5×5 layflat picture book. 

I remembered the ease of putting it all together, and when we were researching the best self-publishing partner, Blurb (and a deep curtsy to BookWright) was ahead of the game by a long shot. 

The Large Order Services team made scaling up to a full release seamless as well; they helped me navigate materials, pricing, and logistics so I could focus entirely on creative integrity. It felt like a true collaboration between craft and production. Shout out to Dylan, who answered over a thousand of my questions and helped navigate difficult decisions.

How did you approach pricing the book?

I ran a market analysis for books similar to mine—in size, page count, and content—to price it in the same range. It’s a delicate balance, keeping the price low enough that people will buy, yet high enough to still make a small profit.

But I’m afraid that there isn’t much profit to be had. Unless I printed over 5,000 copies, I wouldn’t see more than 20 percent margins!

With the book now out in the world (and your hardcover edition already sold out!), how would you describe its success so far? And what responses have meant the most to you?

The response has honestly been humbling and spectacular. I expected architects and historians to connect with it, but what’s moved me most are everyday readers who say the book made them see D.C. differently. People have told me they’ve gone out to find the buildings themselves, to trace those quiet details they’d never noticed before. 

I’ve had multiple invitations for book signing events and was able to get copies in museums, book stores, and cultural institutions, even sold a few copies internationally (!). But the best success I could hope for is to spark curiosity and attention.  

In a digital age, why does print still matter to you, and what does holding a physical book offer that digital formats cannot?

Print is permanence. In a world of infinite scroll, a book has boundaries. It asks you to slow down. And there are only so many pages, so each one counts. 

There’s something wonderful about the weight of paper, the texture, the colors. It anchors images in reality. When someone holds this book, they’re not just consuming content—they’re entering a physical dialogue with history as well as associating a memory with this object. That matters to me deeply.

What advice would you give other creators who want to print and share their own work with the world?

I think being ruthless about your vision is the very first step. Ask yourself what the book should feel like before you think about what it should look like, because print is an emotional medium as much as a visual one. Every choice, from layout to typography to paper texture, should serve that feeling. 

And be patient with the process. Test prints are invaluable; they reveal nuances no screen ever could and help you refine your design instinct. 

Most importantly, treat your book like a living piece of art. Don’t rush it. Give it time to mature until it says exactly what you want it to say, without compromise.

And what about marketing: What’s worked best for you in getting your book seen, and what would you advise other bookmakers to try?

Storytelling first, always. My audience came from a few different visual-heavy corners of the internet, so I leaned into that. I launched a Kickstarter campaign to help fund the printing costs, and made many short behind-the-scenes videos, slow-paced reels, and honest glimpses into the creative process. 

I think people respond to authenticity and obsession more than strategy, and if your vision is backed by compelling imagery, the Kickstarter campaign has all the ingredients to succeed. And while getting bookstores and gift shops to commit to pre-orders was difficult without physical books, once I received my first proof, I could use the photos in my pitches, and that changed the response. 

My advice: Show your process, not just your product. Let people see why you care; they’ll care too.

Lastly, what projects should we be on the lookout for from you and DomoNaut?

I live in a world between the physical and the digital, and will continue bridging the gap between landmarks and people through the Architectural Guide series and films.

 I’m also currently working on a documentary that tells the story of a pioneering woman who broke barriers in the horse racing field. It’s a story about resilience, heritage, and the quiet strength of those who reshape history from the margins. 

Alongside that, the Guide series will be expanding to new cities (I’ve got my eyes on Santa Fe) and seeking out historic sites across the country. Each project, in its own way, celebrates the hidden threads that connect people, place, and memory.

***

Blurb is a self-publishing platform built for creators who care about craft—from first-time bookmakers to professional artists and studios. Whether you’re printing one copy or a full run, Blurb makes it easy to design, publish, and sell your work your way. Learn more about making your own book.

The post The creator using film, photography, and print to give D.C.’s historic homes a voice appeared first on Blurb Blog.

For creative professionals and small businesses, an integrated marketing strategy means combining the best of both print and digital channels, where print lends weight and credibility, and digital brings scale and momentum. Whether you’re launching a new product or service, targeting new clients, or building a community, print anchors your brand with a presence people trust, and digital carries it forward by expanding reach and driving action. 

In this post, we’ll show you how to build an integrated marketing campaign that connects print and digital, with real-world examples, smart tactics, and easy ways to get started with your own loop.

What is integrated marketing?

Think of an integrated marketing strategy as one story told many ways across print, digital, social, events, and email, so every touchpoint feels connected. Instead of one-off tactics, you’re building a whole ecosystem: a consistent voice, aligned visuals, and a clear next step, no matter where someone meets your brand.

Why it matters:

• Consistency builds trust. When your website, book, social media posts, emails, and event materials share the same voice and design, your brand looks established, intentional, and most importantly, memorable.
  
• Better results. Print grabs attention and lingers because it’s tangible, memorable, and a signal of quality. Digital scales the spark with broad reach, measurable impact, and instant action. Together they do what neither can alone: boost recall, deepen engagement, and turn curiosity into action. For example, campaign analyses indicate that pairing direct mail with digital ads can result in a 28% increase in conversions.
  
• Smarter strategy. Results from each channel can inform others, creating an always-on loop of learning and engagement. Your top posts and most-watched reels inform what you print next, while feedback from a client meeting might inspire a new digital series.

Why pair print and digital marketing?

If integrated marketing is about bringing channels together, pairing print with digital is the sweet spot. Print grounds the story, digital propels it. Your audience lives in both worlds, so meeting them across page and screen keeps your brand present, consistent, and unforgettable.

A beautifully produced book or zine earns attention and trust, while your digital channels keep that attention in motion, encouraging sharing, subscribing, buying, and booking. When the two work together, you’re not repeating yourself—you’re compounding and multiplying the impact.

What that means in practice:

• Print as the anchor. A photo book, lookbook, catalog, or zine makes a lasting impression. In hand, it signals craft, permanence, and credibility, and it keeps living on a desk, coffee table, or studio shelf long after a post disappears.
• Digital as the amplifier. Social, email, video, and your site scale the story. They add motion, interactivity, and measurable engagement, transforming a single tactile moment into multiple touchpoints. 
• Together, they create a loop. Print captures attention and tells the deeper story. Digital extends, measures, and invites action. Each touchpoint points to the next, reinforcing your message and your brand.

The outreach efforts of Photography Without Borders is a beautiful example of how this loop can work. This nonprofit organization teaches young artists to tell their stories through photography. Each year, they produce a photo book that spotlights the photography of their students. But this annual printed piece is not a standalone artifact—it’s a dynamic gateway to engagement. 

While the book itself represents Photography Without Borders’ mission, it also strategically incorporates QR codes and social media handles that link readers directly to its digital ecosystems, where they can quickly and easily learn more about the project, donate, and find additional ways to get involved. The book serves as a high-impact, physical touchpoint that directly fuels digital engagement, creating a reliable loop that drives growth.  

In the business world, the architecture studio HomeSource, founded by Perry and Tim Alexander, demonstrates how an integrated marketing strategy can drive commercial success. 

Their approach centers on one flagship, printed piece strategically deployed to complement their multi-faceted sales process. At 11×13 inches with big, clean spreads, their portfolio book leaves a lasting impression. It immediately sets a tone of quality and credibility on showroom tables and during personal client meetings. When the team follows up with personalized emails, calls, or digital proposals, clients already have a tangible, positive reference point in mind, which smooths the final stages of the sales process. One of these tactics alone might fall short; together, this integrated strategy provides the brand credibility and continuity required to close high-value business.

Check out creative bookmaking ideas for small and large businesses to see how other brands leverage print as a powerful marketing tool.

How to create an integrated marketing strategy 

Whether you’re a designer promoting your services, a studio building brand awareness, or a freelancer growing your client base, the goal is the same: to build a cohesive marketing plan that leverages the strengths of each channel, including print, for an impact that’s greater than the sum of its parts. Here’s our step-by-step guide to doing just that:

Step 1: Define your goals

Start by asking what’s the purpose of this campaign? Maybe you’re:

• Launching a new product or service
• Unveiling a new or refreshed brand
• Running a focused lead generation effort
• Launching into a new market

Now make it SMART: Specific, Measurable, Attainable, Relevant, and Time-bound. For example, instead of increase my bookings, try increase the number of direct inquiries from my new portfolio by 25% in three months.

With a crystal clear idea of what success looks like, it’s easier to choose the right tactics, set meaningful performance indicators, and measure your return on investment. 

Step 2: Map out your channels

The next step is to identify the marketing channels that will best help you achieve your SMART goal. 

Start by mapping your customer journey. Where do people first discover you, how do they engage, and what finally inspires them to take action? Each channel plays a different role in that journey, so the goal isn’t to do everything, everywhere. It’s to ensure your chosen channels work to amplify each other and move your audience from discovery to action. 

Think of it this way:

Digital channels build awareness, engagement, and community

• Social media drives awareness by helping new audiences discover your work and join the conversation.
• Blog posts or thought-leadership articles introduce new audiences to your brand and establish your expertise. 
• Email newsletters nurture connection, offering regular touchpoints that keep your brand top of mind.
• Your website anchors it all, turning interest into measurable actions, inquiries, sign-ups, or sales.

Print establishes credibility, memorability, and an emotional connection

• Catalogs and direct mailers prompt action, guiding audiences to a shopping platform,  landing page, or event.
• Printed portfolios or lookbooks create memorability, especially in one-to-one meetings or pitches.

Events and experiences convert attention into a relationship

• Launch events and exhibitions turn awareness into conversion, giving people an immersive brand experience.
• Workshops or Q&As drive engagement by creating dialogue and positioning you as an expert.
• Virtual events expand your reach and help maintain momentum after a campaign launch.

For example, a small creative studio could mail a beautifully printed catalogue to prospects, invite them to a launch event, and follow up with digital proposals, creating a unified journey from first impression to signed contract.

Step 3: Create a content plan

This is where your creative content strategy meets the structure and framework of your marketing ecosystem. Your content plan should align your messaging across each channel, 

while adapting to each medium’s strengths. 

For added efficiency, consider how you can repurpose content and creative assets across your different channels. For example, if you’re hosting an event, video snippets and photos from the day can be used across your social channels. Or if you’re launching a new print catalog, repurpose page spreads as social posts or in email newsletters.

To help you keep track, create a content calendar, detailing when each piece of content drops, where, and how you’ll measure success.

Step 4: Review and evolve

Once everything’s in motion, monitor how each channel performs against the KPIs you set in step one. And pay attention to qualitative feedback too. Comments, replies, and client conversations often reveal insights that data alone can’t. Together, these metrics help you understand which channels are most effective for each goal (whether that’s awareness, engagement, or conversion) and, just as importantly, which combinations deliver the strongest results.

Remember, an integrated marketing strategy isn’t about doing more. It’s about making your efforts work together. By setting a clear goal, mapping out your marketing channels, and connecting channels with intention, you’ll create campaigns that deliver measurable, lasting impact.

Integrated marketing in action: ideas and inspiration

An integrated marketing campaign isn’t just a theory; it’s how business owners and creatives stitch together physical and digital touchpoints to tell a clear, unified story. 

In each example below, print is the anchor that earns attention and trust, while digital is the amplifier that scales the moment, invites participation, and sustains momentum.

1. Art book

As an artist, imagine debuting a limited-run art book at a gallery event, complete with essays on your creative practice, behind-the-scenes photography, and personal commentary that brings your artwork to life. The book lands as a beautiful collectible that guests can purchase, take home, revisit, and share. It invites guests to experience your art in a more intimate and tactile way, making your practice accessible to people beyond the event itself.

• Digital extension: Stream the gallery event on Instagram and YouTube. Try adding in-book QR codes to share exclusive behind-the-scenes content.
  
• Social sharing: Ask your attendees to share their event photos and video snippets, using a branded hashtag to amplify those posts and tagging your account to help you gain followers.
  
• The loop: Print creates intimacy and permanence, digital scales the audience and keeps the event alive with saved streams and short-form clips.

Visual artist, Pesya Altman, put this idea into practice, creating a small-format catalog to showcase her work ahead of an upcoming exhibition. The catalog doubled perfectly as a powerful promotional tool, helping her connect with new galleries and museums and share her creative story at artist talks and networking events. Altman’s approach shows how a printed book can be a strategic part of an artist’s marketing mix, supporting outreach, networking, and professional growth. 

2. Restaurant cookbook

Let’s say you run a small food business or restaurant and release a seasonal cookbook, showcasing gorgeous food photography, chef notes, and stories from the line. It’s a whole lot more than a menu—it’s a take-home version of your brand.

• Digital extension: QR codes throughout the book take readers to short TikTok/YouTube cook-along videos.
  
• Social sharing: Encourage guests to tag the restaurant when they recreate dishes at home.
  
• The loop: Print deepens the relationship, digital keeps guests cooking, posting, and coming back.

Fort Nisqually is a living history museum where volunteers and staff engage visitors in the work, crafts, and social practices of the mid-19th century, including preparing, cooking, and enjoying recipes from the time. Partnering with Blurb’s Large Order Service team, they created Dine We Must, a cookbook filled with 1850s recipes, seasonal stories, and gorgeous museum photography. More than just a source of revenue, the book quickly became an integral part of the museum’s storytelling and engagement efforts. Staff cook from its pages during live demonstrations on-site and share processes and recipes on YouTube.

3. Fashion boutique lookbook

Picture this. As the owner of a fashion boutique, you print a limited-run lookbook with clean, editorial spreads that feel premium in hand, with a semi-gloss magazine cover for that polished finish. Styled to mirror the season’s palette, it becomes a tactile brand statement customers linger over in-store.

• Digital extension: Beautiful page spreads become Instagram carousels and Pinterest pins that link straight to product pages.
  
• Interactive layer: Include QR codes that link shoppers to behind-the-scenes styling reels and fit videos.
  
• The loop: Print signals craft and credibility, digital turns discovery into checkouts.

4. Photographer’s portfolio

As a freelance photographer, you assemble a printed portfolio book that does your images justice, with color, grain, and nuance rendered the way they were shot. A sleek softcover photo book works beautifully here. In hand, it feels intentional and premium, the kind of piece a client flips through twice and leaves out on the table.

• Digital extension: Subtle QR codes jump to behind-the-scenes reels, full galleries, and a simple “book a shoot” page.
  
• Social sharing: Encourage clients to snap a spread for their feeds for instant word-of-mouth that signals craft and care.
  
• The loop: Print earns attention and trust, while digital keeps momentum, turning a memorable leave-behind into real inquiries.

London-based fine art photographer Allan Jenkins used this approach for Studio Allotment: Behind the Scenes of Still Life, a limited-edition book produced in just 60 copies and sold through his studio alongside an exhibition of the same work. Jenkins describes it as one of the best ways to communicate the intention behind his work—helping collectors understand each project in depth while promoting his practice to new audiences online.

5. Nonprofit impact report

If you’re part of a nonprofit organization, you can create a photo-led annual report that blends storytelling with transparency, featuring real faces, real numbers, and real change. Printed on high-quality paper, you can create something donors actually keep, revisit, and share at board meetings or events.

• Digital extension: QR codes open an interactive dashboard with live metrics, campaign videos, and a donate button.
  
• Social sharing: Work with your social team to repurpose quotes, infographics, and portraits across social media to celebrate your impact year-round.
  
• The loop: Print builds trust and accountability, digital keeps the mission moving with instant ways to give and engage.

6. Music zine

As an up-and-coming indie band, you drop a limited-run fan zine with handwritten lyrics, tour diaries, set lists, and doodles. It’s the kind of tactile keepsake fans tuck on the shelf next to vinyl. It feels personal, collectible, and totally on-brand.

• Digital extension: QR codes unlock exclusive playlists, AR filters, or early ticket access—exciting bonus content that rewards superfans.
  
• Social sharing: Ask fans to post their favorite spreads and lyric pages, turning merch pics into momentum overnight.
  
• The loop: Print nurtures community and belonging, digital keeps the energy buzzing between releases.

Southern California film photographer Amy Carla created The Underground: A 35mm Photography Zine to document the city’s punk and DIY music scene. Using print-on-demand, she shared and sold copies individually online while distributing others at shows—an approach any artist or collective could use to build visibility, celebrate a community, and grow their following across print and digital spaces.

7. Workshop companion

If you’re a creative coach, a printed workbook with prompts, checklists, and space to reflect can help participants stay off their phones and in the room. It becomes a tangible map of the session and a take-home reference they’ll actually use.

• Digital extension: QR codes point to demo videos, supply lists, and bonus templates for practice between sessions.
  
• Social sharing: Ask attendees to post their marked-up pages and “aha” moments on social platforms, tagging the course.
  
• The loop: Print gives structure and focus, digital sustains momentum long after class wraps.

Wellness educator and coach Tylee Personett built on her teaching practice with the Whole-Body Wellness Blueprint Guided Journal, a companion to her workshops and online courses. By pairing a tactile journal with her digital programs, Personett created a seamless learning experience that keeps students engaged long after class ends.

Print and digital marketing for direct sales

Print does more than just build awareness; it sells. Pair a beautifully made piece with simple digital handoffs (QR codes, scannable links), and the journey from page to purchase feels seamless. Your audience connects with the work in their hands and then acts in the moment: buying, booking, donating, or subscribing. Here’s how that looks in practice:

• Home goods catalog to instant checkout
  Tell the story behind each object (materials, craft, how it lives in a room), then place a discreet QR next to every SKU that jumps straight to the product page. You keep the romance of print and gain the speed of one-tap buying.
  
• Plant-based recipe book to shoppable lists
  Print seasonal menus and kitchen notes, then incorporate codes that open pre-built grocery lists or affiliated partner carts, along with quick technique clips for tricky steps. Inspiration on the page, ingredients on the way.
  
• Collaborative art zine to direct patronage
  Release a limited zine that showcases multiple contributors. Thread QR links to each artist’s Patreon, shop, or commission form, and unlock a bonus gallery or process reel for supporters. The piece lives on the shelf while the relationships grow online.

Need inspiration? Check out Tempe and Nasi Campur by Ayu Martiasih and Irene Vaniaw, which demonstrates how print and digital channels work together to create a community. The beautifully designed cookbook establishes an emotional connection with authentic recipes and a rich cultural context. Meanwhile, online cooking classes and storytelling on social media extend that relationship and encourage word-of-mouth referrals that drive sales. 

In a nutshell: print holds attention, digital converts it. Together, they build trust, capture intent, and turn curiosity into measurable results, all while preserving the essence of the work.

Check out seven book ideas to build brand loyalty for even more inspiration.

Anchor with print. Amplify with digital.

The takeaway is simple: Print and digital are better together. Print anchors attention and signals quality, and something worth slowing down for. Digital extends the story, broadens reach, and measures what resonates. In a healthy loop, each feeds the other. Print draws people in, digital keeps the momentum going, and both create clear paths to purchase.

If you’re a small business owner or creative, this is how you scale your craft without losing your voice. One integrated marketing plan, many connected expressions (books, zines, portfolios, social, email), all pointing back to the work only you can do.

***

Blurb is the platform that helps creatives put their best work on paper: books, magazines, and zines that feel intentional, premium, and built to last. Ready to try it? Create a free Blurb account, pick a format, add QR codes, and launch your cross-channel marketing strategy today. 

The post Integrated marketing strategy: pairing print with digital appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Editing is an art form, and a very different skill from photography. In my experience, many of the best picture editors I’ve known were never photographers. I believe that this distance from the camera gives them perspective and helps maintain a non-emotional connection with the work, allowing them to quickly cull through to the best or most important.

Editing requires one to be merciless. One too many photographs in a story can ruin the entire narrative. One wrong picture can weaken the rest of the selected images, drawing power away from the work like a loose wire. 

Putting your work in the hands of a skilled editor can be sobering, frustrating, or career-changing, and sometimes it can be all the above. Even if working with an editor isn’t something you do or plan on doing, we can learn a lot from picture editors, especially when it comes to making sense of our latest photographic year.

Learning from editors

Most of us make pictures. Most of us make a lot of pictures, some would say too many, but that’s beside the point. Over the course of a year, we might make tens of thousands of images. But as the year begins to lean toward a final chapter, we often find ourselves attempting to figure out which pictures matter and which don’t.

My typical photographic year is hard to encapsulate. I have my Blurb photographic duties, my own personal duties, and I also teach several times a year. Last year, I was in Antarctica on a personal trip, in Spain for a teaching gig, and in a host of other countries and locations as part of my Blurb job. Throw in the photographs of my life in New Mexico, family portraits, and the wide range of random imagery I always seem to end up with, and you have a puzzle of epic proportions.

This year has stacked up to be much of the same. Workshops in Germany and Morocco, birding adventures in New Mexico, two months in coastal Maine, and even more family photographs. 

Attempting to sum up an entire year can feel daunting, and rightly so, but ultimately, when all is said and done, there are only a handful of images that truly matter. The difficult part is identifying these images.

The power of the edit

Last year in Japan, I shot a total of 1,305 images. My final edit was 11, and my publication was down to 7. This year, in Morocco, I shot 1,200 images, edited them down to 10, and my first publication features those 10. 

Merciless. 

But is it really? How many images do we need to convey a point, a moment, a memory?

For years, I’ve been asked how many images you need to make a photography book. My response has always been the same: one. I feel the same about summing up my year. 

As a photographer, if you can add one or two pictures a year to your portfolio, you are doing something right. To do that, I ask: What was the absolute best image per month? Suddenly, I have a target of twelve, which makes it easier to cull my work to hit that goal of one for the year. 

Looking back to move forward

What helps me find these moments is giving myself the time to think back. What was my favorite photographic moment from Japan? A five-minute “moment” along the river in Kyoto, where I made several good pictures back-to-back. Maine was all about a full moonrise over the water with the tiny glow of a lobster boat on the horizon. Morocco was about texture and movement.

If you have trouble culling your work, think about the images that come to mind when someone asks, “How was your trip?” Typically, there will be a moment or two that stands above all others. Those, and only those, are the images you need to encapsulate your year.

When you’ve found those few meaningful moments through your merciless edit, you start to see the story of your year take shape. Each photograph earns its place, not because it’s perfect, but because it holds something essential.

Editing down to the essential also makes it easy when it comes time to create my year-end photobook. Fewer photographs mean less preparation time. Fewer photographs allow images to breathe on the page or spread. I’ll take big, bold, and beautiful over cluttered and busy.

***

Hit the Books is a monthly series by Blurb’s creative ambassador, Dan Milnor. Register for creative insights and practical advice in your inbox monthly—straight from his decades of experience in the photography and self-publishing worlds.

Looking to bring your next photo project to life? Start your book with Blurb.

The post Merciless and meaningful: editing your year in photos appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Not sure where to begin? People of Print have collected ten examples to spark ideas and show what’s possible with professional printing. Check them out and take the first step toward holding your story in your hands.

***

Terms & conditions

Save 30% on photo books, trade books, notebooks, journals, and magazines uploaded to your own account with code: POP30. Offer valid through December 31, 2027 (11:59 p.m. local time). A 30% discount is applied toward your product total with no minimum or maximum order amount. This offer has a maximum value of £500. This offer is good for one use, and cannot be used for ebook or PDF purchases, and wall art, or combined with volume discounts, custom orders, other promotional codes, gift cards, or used for adjustments on previous orders.

The post People of Print x Blurb appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Arthur Tress has been taking pictures for more than five decades, constantly exploring new ways to express himself visually. From his early work in ethnographical photography, to environmentally-focused documentary work, and fantastical fabrications of “magical realism,” Tress has consistently reinvented himself. And he was kind enough to speak with us about his life, his work, and the books he self-publishes with Blurb.

Where are you drawing inspiration from currently?

I have a large collection of art and photography books that I read while eating or leave open to different pages around my house and studio and glance at during the day.

At this present moment, I am looking at the graphic work of Marc Chagall with all his dreamscape fantasy worlds of flying goats and cows. I’m also delving into a book of the mountain paintings of Marsden Hartley called Pinnacles and Pyramids, that relates to the series of landscape photographs I have been making of Morro Rock for the past few years. And lastly, I’m enjoying another book of large photographs of Southwest Indian ceramic pots from around the year 1200. It’s filled with swirling abstract geometrical designs in starkly alternating black and white zig zag patterns—it’s inspiring a lot of my newer photography which deals with unusual patterning found by the alternations of light and shadow.

What I am saying is, as I move to new ideas and pictorial explorations in my constantly evolving work, so do my scholarly investigations into the past, from where I continually borrow new visual ideas.

Inspiration does not really come in a flash to me but needs to be endlessly reinforced by learning how other artists over the centuries have explored many of the same pictorial ideas and challenges I am perusing and solved them with their own imaginative visual answers.

What’s it like seeing your work up in a place like San Francisco’s de Young Museum?

I was really pleased. The museum did an excellent job of framing, hanging, and lighting the show with excellent wall titles and labels, and a full, well-reproduced catalog by a prestigious art publisher.

They allowed me to be a part of all decisions about how things were displayed and how the book was edited. I got lucky and what more could any photographer want?

It ran concurrently with a large blockbuster exhibition of Jean Paul Gaultier that brought lots of crowds into the museum, and some actually drifted into my gallery space.

The gallery was always full of people actually looking at the pictures slowly and discussing them with their friends. They seemed intrigued and stimulated by the strange Tressian combination of the surreal within the documentary.

The Getty has recently acquired 85 of my vintage prints from the Appalachia and Dream Collector series, and that gives me a certain validation that I am glad to still be alive to appreciate.

It reinforced my feelings that a lifetime’s devotion to creating a disciplined body of work was a worthwhile endeavor. And, although the monetary rewards have been very small, the sense that I have actually made something wonderful and lasting gave me a great renewed pride in myself for having done all this alone and without much help for over 55 years.

It also made significant institutions aware that I was a photographer worth paying attention to and has attracted others to look seriously at my larger body of work.

Can you talk about the business side of photography? What has changed over the years and what has remained the same?

A friend of mine in San Francisco who was struggling as a freelance photographer just became the editor of a new start up magazine with a very high salary. So, while some areas of assignment have dried up, others are opening all the time.

Fine art photography areas are expanding with new galleries opening everywhere. And teaching opportunities have expanded as more schools and universities include visual expression using photography as a basis for a curriculum.

The way I survive is, to use the old phrase, “cobble together a living” from wedding photography, to stock photography, to selling archival pigment prints at your local frame shop around the corner.

Which is your favorite of the 20+ books you’ve done with Blurb?

I don’t have any special one. I have two or three that were done as special unique art projects and exist only as Blurb downloadable books such as Barcelona Unfolds or Colony. But I have been spending most of my energies creating a comprehensive Blurb book library of slim volumes pulled out of my organizing and scanning the several thousand vintage prints in my historic archive. These books include Egypt 1963, Caspar 1964, and Stockholm 1966.

I think that archiving in this way is a good idea for an older photographer. We all have bodies of work that have almost never been seen or had just a short lifespan in the public world of magazine publications.

Creating a photo book of your best work is a powerful way to preserve your vision, give lasting life to hidden projects, and share your legacy with audiences old and new. Start your photo book today.

By scanning the vintage prints and including letters and tear sheets from the actual published magazine articles, you can show how the images and texts were originally put forth into the world 40 or 50 years ago. This gives them much more clarity and meaning for today’s audience, rather than leaving them to be found in a lost box of random, bruised 8 x 10s in a dented Kodabromide paper cardboard box, lying forgotten in a damp storage area somewhere down in the basement.

I just sent 15 of these Blurb archive volumes to a publisher in Germany with the hope that it might make a worthwhile larger single retrospective publication of my lesser-known documentary photography from the ‘60s. Have not heard back from them yet though, but one keeps hoping and sending the stuff out.

Are you hopeful about the future of photography?

Yes. It is all about globalization now—everywhere there are dozens of photo festivals in Morocco, Singapore, Athens, South America, China, etc., giving emerging photographers a chance to display their fledging talents to the whole world via the use of blogs and newsletters.

Plus, the rediscovery of forgotten photographic traditions and talents in these same countries is greatly expanding our narrow sense of our Euro/American-centric photographic history.

Plus, the blooming of the indie book movement where, although bookstores are said to have died and that no one wants books anymore, is flourishing as collectors and institutions compete to buy signed, limited-edition photo art publications.

***

Whether you’re creating your first book or your fiftieth, Blurb helps you create and share your work with the world, with professional-level design tools and seamless printing options. Create your free account and get started today.

The post The marvelous world and books of photographer Arthur Tress appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Allan Jenkins’ work combines the best of traditional and modern photography techniques. For example, his Victorian-era cyanotype prints are created from digital negatives and his self-published print books are based on his hand-sketched notebooks. Jenkins’ ability to succeed in both the fine art and commercial photography worlds is a testament to his craft. He was kind enough to talk to us about his process, his work, his thoughts on the state of photography today, and the photo books he has made with Blurb.

What was the idea behind creating the Organic Photography Notebook?

The Organic Photography Notebook started with a series of sketchbooks to which I kept adding images and tests. They were a place to keep track of my photo shoots and the progress of my workflow. The practice is based on the approach of a fine art painter; the idea is to jot down preliminary studies and observations before, during, and after every photo shoot. This hopefully improves the final results and helps you remember little details. It’s a discipline I learnt at art school when I was studying life drawing and painting.

After a few years, as my work diversified, I found myself creating various handmade notebooks, all on different specialist subjects: Cuban Notebook, Still Life Notebook, figurative studies.

As these detailed sketchbooks gathered momentum and content, they gradually became a body of work. When I discovered Blurb, it was obvious to me that my passion for creating notebooks could be adapted to creating books. Designing layouts became second nature, as I constantly updated my notebooks over the years. I also enjoyed writing in a descriptive way about the process, the subject matter, and the journey of discovery.

I eventually published a book in 2006 called “the nude photography notebook”. This was followed up by The Unseen Cuba, which is based on The Cuban Notebooks, and The Organic Photography Notebook.

“Creating the books through Blurb is a very satisfying and therapeutic experience. I have so much content that has built up over the years that finally to be able to present it in a book form feels like the final statement.”

Have you been inspired by similar notebook books by other photographers?

I was always inspired by artist studies and sketches and often took inspiration from the journey of the process; the methodology, the search for creativity, the inspiration, the influences, the vision, and approach to developing one’s personal style. One notebook from another artist that really inspired me is Peter Beard’s Africa.

Your interests seem so wide-ranging: Cuba, organic forms, architecture… is there anything you haven’t done that you’d love to do?

I have had opportunities to travel to Cuba because I’m fluent in Spanish and was asked to translate for a delegation of miners in 1995. After that first trip, I was invited back several times and therefore started the story and journey of The Cuban Notebook.

The architecture book is also a very personal story. Matt Livsey Hammond was my long-time neighbor and a fine art metal designer, creating everything from sculptures to balustrades to magnificent spiral staircases. I have documented his work since the beginning, so in many ways it’s another Notebook. However in this case, I had to create a more commercial book to help Matt impress interior designers and promote his work worldwide. The  book includes some behind the scenes glimpses and observations of his working environment, but the main chapters are based on final results and finished work in situ.

Most of Matt’s clients are wealthy and famous, so the book will be a promotional vehicle for his work and my photography simultaneously.

We read a lot of “doom and gloom” posts about the current state of the photography market. What’s your take?

In order to survive in today’s photographic business, one has to be open to new ideas and have more than just the skill of taking a good photo. It’s about multi-tasking and looking to make income from a variety of sources. As a freelance photographer you have to be good at promoting yourself, networking, creating various styles, and having your fingers in various pies.

Does creating your books give you insights into your work that you wouldn’t otherwise have?

Creating books through Blurb is a very satisfying and therapeutic experience. I have so much content that has built up over the years that to finally be able to present it in book form feels like a final statement. This process was needed in order to covert these sketchbooks into a printed form, and make them available to other people worldwide. Not only does it give me the confidence to say, “Here is my Cuban series” or “Here is my still life series,” but it helps me approach galleries or potential art buyers, advertising agencies, editorial, etc.

And that’s not to mention the fact that editing and presenting the work in book form makes us think about what we have been creating for so long and how we can make a concise version of it.

Creating a book of your best work brings your creative journey full circle, preserving your vision and sharing it with the world. Start your photo book today.

Do you have a favorite photo from your archive?

I have various photos that hold memories of amazing moments that I cherish. But as far as a favorite individual photo … my mind is constantly looking for the next one, so I can’t hold on to one as a favorite. In some ways this explains the notebook theory, creating various sketches of a subject, as one image isn’t enough to get the full story across.

As the years go by, our taste and vision change and develop. Often what seemed like the best photo becomes a detail of a bigger picture and story to be told.

Do you use digital photography as well as analog processes? If so, what’s the balance for you?

I started out processing film in the darkroom, and was immediately hooked. I was shooting 35mm, then medium format, soon to progress on to large format, 5×4-inch field cameras. Finally I bought myself a 10×8 camera in 1997. It was an obvious progression, scaling up all the formats, like a hunger for more technical exploration, just to get the message across via printing techniques. For me the process became a language and the cameras were my tools of choice. I wanted to create art and dedicated myself daily to that discipline.

Eventually, in 2006, I was offered a commercial job that involved shooting on digital. From then onwards my work has been divided. Film and analogue are my artwork and digital is my commercial work. Both The Unseen Cuba and The Organic Photography Notebook are examples of analogue photography and specific printing techniques, such as the toned cyanotype. These processes have become my trademark in the fine art industry and will be in art galleries and museums for many years to come. Thanks to Blurb, I’m able to promote my processes and present these books to other people interested in the alternative 19th century photographic techniques.

In addition I have recently given lectures and talks to students about vintage B/W photography and the Blurb books have been incredibly useful for teaching, displaying, promoting, and putting points across clearly.

I encourage all my students to make notebooks and to publish Blurb books of their own work. I try to get them to think about their content and create a photography portfolio book.

A note on cyanotype

Cyanotype is one of the earliest photographic printing processes, known for producing images in striking shades of blue. Invented in the 1840s by scientist Sir John Herschel, it uses a simple chemical reaction between ferric ammonium citrate and potassium ferricyanide. When paper or fabric coated with this light-sensitive solution is exposed to UV light (often sunlight) areas of the image touched by the light turn a deep blue after rinsing with water. In photography, cyanotype is valued for its tactile, handmade quality and its ability to capture delicate tonal ranges, making it a favorite among artists and photographers exploring alternative and historical printing methods.

***

From gallery-quality photo books to notebooks and zines, Blurb helps you create and share your work with the world, with professional-level design tools and seamless printing options. Create your free account and get started today.

The post Talking Cuba and Cyanotypes with Photographer Allan Jenkins appeared first on Blurb Blog.

The good news? Last-minute gift ideas don’t have to be generic or rushed.

You can turn your photos, stories, and creativity into high-quality custom books that ship fast. That means beautiful, personal gifts made just for the people who matter most. From photo books to notebooks, magazines, and paperbacks, the process is simple, the results feel polished, and yes, you can still get it done before that shipping cut-off.

This post is full of quick bookmaking tips and easy gift ideas you can finish in a few hours (or even minutes), all designed to help you create something thoughtful that arrives right on time.

Make a fast photo book (yes, get it in a week)

The quickest path to a thoughtful and easy gift idea is a photo book. With the right tools, you can go from camera roll to printed book in a flash—without breaking a sweat (or cutting corners on quality).

The key? Choose the workflow that fits how you like to create, then lean on a few shortcuts to keep things moving. And if you want a step-by-step plan, don’t worry. We’ve got a 7-day speed run waiting at the end of this section.

Pick your fastest path

• BookWright by Blurb (Desktop): Gives you full creative control with freestyle grids, typography tools, and pro-level design capabilities.
• BookWright Online: Nothing to download—just drag, drop, done.
• Blurb Presets for Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic: Already editing photos in Lightroom? Build straight from your catalog with the Blurb Book Module.

Tips and tricks for making quick gift ideas 

When it comes to last-minute gift ideas that still feel special, the trick is to design smart and move fast, without losing the heart that makes your gift meaningful. Here’s how to keep things simple, polished, and personal.

• Autoflow is your friend. Import your photos and let BookWright do the first pass. In minutes, you’ll have a complete draft ready to refine. Just spend extra time on a handful of your favorite spreads and the cover.
• Limit your scope. A tight theme is your best shortcut. Think best of 2025, our summer, or pup portraits. It makes curation faster and gives your book a clear, intentional feel.
• Keep layouts clean. Simple always wins. A single image per page or a steady three-to-four photo grid looks effortlessly professional and cuts down on design decisions.
• Use templates. There’s no need to start from scratch. BookWright (desktop) and BookWright Online both offer ready-made layouts to help you move quickly from blank page to finished book.
• Fastest formats. Small books equal speedy books. A 20-page Mini Square (5×5 inch) or slim Small Square (7×7 inch) photo book gives you maximum impact with minimal choices. The perfect quick and easy gift idea when the countdown is on. 

Loving these tips? Create a free account to get more inspiration delivered straight to your inbox. Plus a special discount on your first Blurb book.

Your zero-stress seven-day plan

Seven days is all you need to turn a folder of photos into a finished book—yes, really! Think of it as a gentle countdown: Each day has one small task, and by the end of the week, you’ll be holding a gift that feels thoughtful, not rushed. 

Follow this outline for a steady pace, then check out our full guide here: How to make a book in seven days.

Day 1: Quick prep

Select your theme and organize your favorite photos into a single folder. Keep it simple. Picking a focused story will save time later.

Day 2: Project setup

Open BookWright or BookWright Online, choose your book format and paper type, and drop in your photos. Don’t worry about perfection yet, just get everything in place.

Day 3: Sequencing

Arrange your photos to create a story that flows well. Group moments by time, place, or feeling. This part is all about creating rhythm and variety.

Day 4: Text and context

Sprinkle in captions, short notes, or a quick intro. A few words are enough to add personality and meaning without slowing you down.

Day 5: Design simplified

Use templates or keep it minimal to create clean, consistent layouts. One or two photos per page allows the photos to speak for themselves.

Day 6: Polish

Now go back and refine your favorite spreads. Make minor tweaks like adding full-bleed photos, a bold title page, or a dedication to give the book extra impact.

Day 7: Print and celebrate

Do a quick proof for typos or duplicates, pick a strong cover photo, and place your order before the shipping cutoff. Then celebrate! You just made a personal, meaningful gift in one week!

Last-minute gift ideas they’ll love

The clock might be ticking, but that doesn’t mean your gifts have to feel like you made them in a hurry. These bookmaking projects are easy gift ideas that come together quickly, look amazing in print, and carry all the heart of something made just for them. 

Hit reprint, make it a gift

Hands-on time: 5 minutes

Already made the perfect wedding album, travel photo book, or custom coffee table book? Great news! You don’t have to start from scratch. 

Open your project, update the cover if you like, and order an extra copy (or three). Gift your dad those photos of him walking you down the aisle, your bestie the highlights from your getaway, or your coworkers a printed version of your side project.

Pro tip: Personalize your book in seconds by swapping in their name on the cover or adding a one-line dedication inside. Small change, big impact.

Collaborative keepsake journal

Hands-on time: ~2 hours

Some of the most meaningful gifts are the ones you build together. Turn your shared stories into a collaborative keepsake journal by adding prompts on each page: A favorite memory we share, what I admire about you, the funniest thing that ever happened to us. Write a few entries yourself before you gift it, then let them fill in the rest over time. Maybe even ask them to gift it back to you next year.

This gift is more than a journal. It’s an ongoing conversation, a way to capture memories together as they happen. Customize the cover, add photos or quotes inside, and make it something they’ll want to keep close at hand. 

Pro tip: Add a dedication on the first page—something heartfelt that sets the tone for all the stories still to come.

Kid’s artwork portfolio book

Hands-on time: ~2 hours

Give the fridge a break and turn your little one’s masterpieces into something lasting. Photograph or scan their favorite pieces, add captions, and don’t forget to include their own words to bring the pages to life. Lay it out as a bright, playful art book that grandparents will melt over, and that makes kids feel like published artists in their own right.

Need a little help getting started? Our guide on how to make a kid’s art portfolio has step-by-step tips to keep things simple.

Pro tip: Include a sketchbook section at the end for future creations. That way, the book becomes both a time capsule and an ongoing creative project they’ll love to keep adding to. 

Our places and stories atlas

Hands-on time: ~5 hours

Every relationship has its landmarks. Your first date spot, the park you always wander through, that tiny apartment you made a home. Gather together 10 meaningful locations and find a map of each. Then pair that map with a photo and a short memory or quote. The result is a simple, thoughtful way to tell your story through the places that matter most.

Pro tip: Keep the design of your book consistent. Use the same layout for each location (map on one side, story on the other). That rhythm makes it faster to build and gives the whole book a polished, intentional feel.

Dream trip book

Hands-on time: ~5 hours

Turn daydreams into something they can hold and build a book around their ultimate dream destination. Drop in royalty-free images, sketch out a bucket-list itinerary, and add blank pages for journaling along the way. It’s part mood board, part travel diary, and the perfect way to say “let’s go.”

Pro tip: Make it feel extra real by adding QR codes to roadtrip playlists, recipes for the local dishes you want to try while you’re visiting, or even a plane ticket. Details like this will bring the adventure to life.

Create a blank custom notebook

Hands-on time: ~1 hour

Everyone needs a place to jot things down, but a notebook made just for them feels like something extra special. 

With custom notebook templates (with blank, lined, or dot grid pages), you can design a personalized notebook in minutes. Pick a cover color they’ll love, add their name or a favorite quote to the front, and suddenly a simple notebook becomes a meaningful gift to carry everywhere they go. 

Pro tip: Add a few surprise touches inside, like photos, doodles, or favorite quotes, to make it feel even more personal.

Our texts book

Hands-on time: ~6 hours

Sometimes the most special stories are hiding in plain sight, like on your phone. Gather the funniest, sweetest, or most heartfelt messages you’ve shared with a friend or partner and flow them into a custom book with BookWright. It’s a modern twist on love letters (or inside jokes), and one of those quick gift ideas that feels incredibly personal.

Need inspiration? One boyfriend even printed 26,890 texts for his girlfriend (yes, really—read the story here).

Pro tip: Curate the best of the best so it reads like a story, not a scroll. Break it into sections like our funniest moments, the big milestones, or why I love you to make it feel polished and intentional.

Lightroom highlights photo book

Hands-on time: ~3 hours

If your photos already live in Adobe Lightroom, you’re halfway to a gift. With the Blurb Presets for Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic, you can turn your edited shots into a professional-quality photo book in just a few clicks. Simply filter your ★★★★★ favorites or by keyword, autoflow them into a Blurb-ready template, export, and order. It’s one of the easiest last-minute gift ideas for photographers.

Think about how versatile this can be:

• A Best of the Year family photo book
• A nature or landscape collection for outdoorsy friends
• A keepsake travel photo book recapping the trip of a lifetime
• A pet photo album that doubles as a love letter to your furry sidekick
• A wedding, anniversary, or milestone recap

For more photo book gift inspiration, check out photo book gift ideas and tips.

Pro tip: Use Lightroom Smart Collections to auto-populate your book with rated or tagged photos to save hours of sorting.

A 20-page mini photo book

Hands-on time: 20 minutes

Big memories can live in small packages. With just 20 photos, you can create a pocket-sized keepsake in BookWright or BookWright Online. Drop them into a Mini Square (5×5 inch), 20-page photo book, and you’ve got a gift that feels personal without taking hours to design.

Pro tip: Stick to one theme like family laughs, our year in highlights, or the dog’s greatest hits to make it fast to build and fun to flip through.

Bonus tip: Shop the Blurb Bookstore for quick gift ideas

Running out of build time? Explore the Blurb Bookstore for ready-to-wrap, easy gift ideas you won’t see at big box stores. Thoughtful, niche, and made by independent creators:

• Art & Photography: striking visuals from emerging and established artists
• Children’s Books: one-of-a-kind stories made for curious kids
• Cookbooks: small-batch recipes with big personality
• Staff Picks: the Blurb team’s favorites, curated just for you

Pair a bookstore gem with a handwritten note, and you’ve got a thoughtful gift—now.

Make it personal. Make it fast.

The holidays sneak up on everyone, but meaningful gifts don’t have to take weeks to pull off. You can turn photos, words, and memories into something personal, polished, and ready to ship in time.

Whether it’s a quick mini photo book, a custom notebook, or a repurposed project you already love, these last-minute gift ideas prove that thoughtfulness beats speed every time.

So don’t stress. The tools are here, the deadline is close, and your most personal gift is just a few clicks away. Start your last-minute holiday gift today! 

***

Blurb makes it simple to bring your favorite photos, stories, and creative projects into print. From personal keepsakes to professional portfolios, you’ll find the tools, formats, and freedom to create something that feels uniquely yours.

Ready to dive in? Create a free account and get started today.

The post <strong>Last-minute gift ideas to beat the holiday shipping cut-off</strong> appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Culling in photography is the step that turns that overload into clarity. It’s how professional creators and independent artists move from sheer volume to a body of work that reflects their standards and style. Done well, it saves time, protects creative energy, and sharpens the story behind the photos—whether that story lives in a portfolio, a gallery, or the pages of a photo book.

This post shares photo culling strategies that work at scale, along with practical tools to help you streamline your workflow and get back to what matters most: creating high-quality work worth sharing.

What is culling in photography?

At its simplest, photo culling is reviewing a large set of images and narrowing it down to the strongest ones. It means keeping the photographs that meet your standards for focus, composition, lighting, and storytelling, while letting the rest go.

Most creators already do some form of this, but the challenge today is scale. A single project can generate thousands of frames. Digital cameras and phones make it easy to overshoot, and that makes the edit harder.

Photo culling is not busywork. It is the first act of editing—an intentional step that sets the quality bar for everything that follows.

Why photo culling matters

A strong culling process does more than reduce your workload. It improves the quality and consistency of your creative output, and it reinforces your professional standards.

• Save editing time: Work faster by sending only your best images into post-production.
• Raise your quality standard: Remove near duplicates and weaker frames so every photo you share reflects your expertise and care.
• Strengthen your story: Choose images that build momentum and focus, so your final work has more impact.
• Protect your creative energy: A clear process prevents decision fatigue during the design process, leaving you more space for the creative choices that matter.
• Shoot with more intention: The more deliberate you are in selecting, the more deliberate you become behind the camera.

Enjoying these tips? Sign up to get more photography inspiration delivered straight to your inbox.

Two main approaches

When it comes to photo culling, most photographers and creators rely on one of two methods. Each has its own mindset and advantages.

• Subtractive culling: Start with every image visible, then remove the ones that don’t meet your standards. This approach is intuitive and fast for eliminating technical flaws like blur, missed focus, or poor lighting. The downside is that it can feel draining when you’re working through thousands of files.
• Additive culling: Start with a blank slate and mark only the strongest images as you go. This approach helps you focus on quality and avoid keeping too many near duplicates. It demands more confidence and attention, since you’re choosing to include rather than exclude.

Many professionals combine both methods. A first pass with subtractive culling helps clear obvious misses. A second pass with additive culling helps refine the set into a polished, intentional collection ready for editing, sharing, or printing.

An effective workflow

This three-step photo culling workflow is designed to help you work faster, stay consistent, and produce a tighter final set of images. Each phase builds on the last, so you always know exactly what to do next.

Step 1: Triage with subtractive culling

Start by cutting the obvious misses. This is your fast pass to clear the clutter so you can focus on what matters.

• Work quickly: Use reject flags or keyboard shortcuts to mark frames that are clearly unusable. Don’t zoom in—trust your instincts and keep moving.
• Batch process bursts: If you shot in burst mode, flip through each sequence and keep only the best frame. Reject the rest as a group.
• Timebox it: Give yourself a deadline—thirty minutes to reject 1,000 wedding photos, ten minutes for a portrait session. This keeps you from getting bogged down in indecision.

By the end of this step, you should have removed at least one-third of your gallery.

Step 2: Refine with additive culling

Now it’s time to slow down. The weak frames are gone, and this is where photo culling really comes into play: deciding what is strong enough to keep. This is where technical maybes become artistic yes or no decisions.

• Sharpness: Assess more critically than before. Look for precise focus on eyes or key focal points. Compare near-duplicates side by side and keep the sharpest version of each moment. If blur is intentional, ask yourself whether it adds to the image or distracts.
• Composition: Evaluate framing, balance, and use of negative space. Does the image guide the viewer’s eye effectively? Check the edges for distractions or awkward crops. Decide whether a small crop in post could strengthen it.
• Final placement: Think about where the image will live. For print, prioritize high resolution, tight focus, and clean detail, since flaws are more visible. Online, you can allow more flexibility, but ask whether the image has enough impact at thumbnail size to hold attention.
• Story and emotion: At this stage, every keeper should add to the sequence or support the larger story. Remove duplicates that dilute the narrative, even if they are technically fine.

By the end of this step, you should have a strong, intentional set of images that reflects your standards and tells a clearer story.

Step 3: Finalize your selects

The last pass is where your images move from a loose collection to a finished body of work. At this point, you’re not just picking photos, you’re shaping the experience for your audience.

• Sequence for rhythm: Arrange your images in a rough order. Look for natural flow—wide establishing frames leading into tighter details, high-energy moments balanced with quieter pauses. This matters whether the work ends up in a book, portfolio, or social feed.
• Tighten duplicates: If two or three photos feel nearly identical, keep only the one that communicates the moment best. Cutting redundancy makes your final set feel intentional and professional.
• Check technicals at 100 percent: Zoom in on your selects to confirm sharpness, detail, and color accuracy. Address issues like banding, grain, or unintended color casts before you commit.
• Think about output, again: For books, mark potential full-bleed heroes versus supporting images so you’re already thinking about pacing in print. For online, recheck how images look in thumbnail view to make sure they grab attention immediately.
• Prep for next steps: Rename files in a consistent convention (project name, date, sequence number), tag your selects into a separate collection, or export a proof set. These habits save time when moving into design, editing, or delivery.

By the end of this pass, you should have a tight, polished set of images that feels deliberate from start to finish. Ready to share, print, or build into a book.

Tips to keep your focus

Culling thousands of images can be mentally exhausting. The more fatigued you get, the more likely you are to hesitate, over-keep, or lose consistency. These strategies help you stay sharp from start to finish.

• Work in sprints: Break large sets into 20 to 30-minute sessions. Give yourself clear targets, like 1,000 frames per sprint for an event or 100 frames for a portrait session. Short bursts keep your eyes fresh.
• Take deliberate breaks: Step away between passes. Coming back after an hour or even a week gives you a fresh perspective and helps you catch errors you might have missed.
• Stick to one rating system: Whether you use stars, flags, or color labels, choose one method and apply it consistently across every project. Consistency speeds up your decision-making and makes it easier to collaborate with others.
• Try AI for triage: Tools like AfterShoot or Narrative Select can filter out the obvious rejects—blurry frames, closed eyes, missed focus—before you even start. Think of AI as an assistant that saves you time on the first pass, while you retain full control of the creative decisions.
• Optimize your environment: Work on a calibrated monitor in consistent lighting. Dim your screen slightly to reduce eye strain. If possible, use dual monitors so you can compare images side by side without constant toggling.
• Know when to stop: If you catch yourself hesitating over every frame or keeping too many duplicates, it’s a sign you’re tired. Stopping early and returning later will lead to stronger choices than pushing through.

Putting it into practice: how to cull photos in Lightroom

Lightroom is a favorite tool for many professionals because it brings everything into one place—organizing, culling, and editing. That means less back-and-forth between programs and more time focusing on your creative decisions. Here’s how you can apply the workflow directly in Lightroom.

1. Import and organize: Create folders or collections for each shoot so you can keep things tidy. Add naming conventions or metadata like client name and date, and switch on Smart Previews if you’re working with thousands of files. It will make the whole process run faster.
2. Start with flags: For your triage pass, use Pick (P) for keepers and Reject (X) for deletes. It’s a quick way to clear out the obvious misses.
3. Add stars and labels: In your second pass, use star ratings to grade quality or storytelling strength, and color labels for workflow notes, maybe red for images to retouch, yellow for client preview, or whatever system works for you.
4. Compare similar shots: Use Survey View (N) to look at a group of images at once, or Compare View (C) to zoom into two frames side by side. This is especially helpful when you’re choosing between near-duplicates.
5. Check sharpness and focus: Zoom to 100% in Loupe View to make sure critical details like eyes are sharp. The Info Overlay (I) will show you camera settings, which can explain softness in tricky moments.
6. Filter down to your selects: Use the Filter Bar to see only the images you’ve flagged, starred, or labeled. It’s a clean way to isolate your best work and make sure you haven’t missed anything important.
7. Sync across sets: If you’ve shot with multiple cameras or cards, sync your ratings and metadata so your selections stay consistent across angles. This saves a ton of time for big projects like events or weddings.
8. Move into book design: Once you’re confident in your selects, you can go straight into Lightroom’s Book Module to start designing. It’s an easy way to carry your refined set into print without leaving the platform. Learn more about Lightroom and Blurb.

Bringing it all together

Culling is one of the most important steps in a creative workflow. It shapes how your work is seen, protects your time and energy, and sets the quality bar for everything that follows. By breaking the process into clear phases—triage, refine, and finalize—you can move through thousands of images with focus and confidence.

The goal isn’t just fewer photos. It’s a tighter, stronger body of work that tells the story you want to share, whether that lives in a client delivery, a portfolio, or the pages of a book.

***

Blurb is the go-to tool for photographers, small businesses, and creators of all kinds who want to see their work in print. From portfolios to client albums to personal projects, we make it easy to turn your best images into something lasting. Create a free account and get started today. Or jump straight into Blurb Presets for Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic to design directly from your selects.

The post Photo culling made easy: Tips to save time and energy appeared first on Blurb Blog.

We know you care deeply about your creative brand. You’ve worked hard to design beautiful products, and you want to present them in a way that feels authentic, polished, and unmistakably you. The good news? You don’t need a professional studio or expensive gear to get professional-looking results.

In this guide, we’ll share practical, approachable product photography tips to help you feel confident behind the camera, whether you’re preparing for a big sale, building a gift guide, or refreshing your online store. 

By the end, you’ll know exactly how to take great product photos that stop shoppers mid-scroll and inspire them to click “add to cart.”

The power of great product photography

So, what is product photography, and why does it matter for your brand? Simply put, it’s the art of capturing your products in ways that showcase their quality, style, and story. It helps you stand out from the ever-growing crowd.  

We live in a visual-first shopping world. Whether someone discovers you on Instagram, browses your Etsy shop, or flips through a beautifully printed product catalog, your product photos are often the very first connection they have with your brand.

In that moment, the right image can do more than showcase your product—it can spark curiosity, inspire trust, and make your work feel instantly worth owning. Great product photography elevates your perceived value, communicates your creative vision, and sets you apart from the competition.

During high-traffic shopping moments like Black Friday and Cyber Monday, when customers are skimming through endless options, it’s your imagery that can turn viewers into buyers.

And the magic doesn’t stop online. The same compelling photography fuels seasonal gift guides, printed product catalogs, and direct mail campaigns, giving your audience a consistent, polished, and memorable brand experience at every touchpoint.

Tools to make your product photography pop

You don’t need a fancy studio or shelves of gear to learn how to take great product photos. The real magic comes down to three things: good lighting, a steady setup, and a backdrop that lets your product shine. 

Camera: A DSLR with a variety of lenses is fantastic if you have one, but don’t underestimate your smartphone. Today’s high-resolution cameras can capture stunning detail if you know how to work with light. Check out our tips to take better photos with your phone. 

Tripod: Think of it as your secret weapon for sharp, consistent shots—no shaky hands, no blur, just beautifully crisp images every time. If you don’t have one, don’t panic—a steady surface will do the trick. 

Lighting: This is where your photos go from good to great.

• Natural window light is your most affordable, most flattering option.
• Use simple reflectors (white foam board, foil, or even a plain sheet) to soften shadows and brighten details.
• If you’re ready to invest, a softbox or light tent gives you complete control over a consistent, diffused glow.

Backgrounds: Keep it clean and brand-aligned. White boards, seamless paper sweeps, or textured surfaces can all work beautifully, just make sure nothing distracts from your product.

Props: Choose them with intention. A few contextually relevant details can tell a story without stealing the spotlight. For example, fresh herbs for a cookbook shoot, or a well-placed pen for a notebook launch.

Lighting: Your make-or-break factor

Lighting isn’t just a technical detail—it’s the mood, texture, and personality of your photos. Get it right, and even the simplest setup can feel premium.

• Start with natural light: Set up near a large window for that soft, even glow. Avoid harsh midday sun, which can cast hard shadows, and skip mixing light sources (like overhead bulbs with daylight) to keep colors accurate.
• Shape your light: Use a reflector to bounce light into darker areas and lift shadows. Foam board, aluminum foil, or even a white sheet can do the trick.
• Upgrade when you’re ready: A softbox or light tent is a great investment for product shoots that need consistency, day or night. They diffuse light beautifully and make every surface look its best.
• Experiment with distance and angles: Move your light source closer for softer shadows, or pull it back for more drama and contrast. Minor adjustments can completely change how your product feels.

Go deeper: Think of lighting as part of your brand language—bright and clean for a fresh, modern look, warm and golden for a cozy, handcrafted feel. Need ideas? Take a look at our photography lighting techniques guide.

Prep: Before you get started

Great product photography is planned, not improvised. A bit of prep saves time, keeps your visuals consistent, and makes your brand look polished everywhere your products appear.

Think about where your images will live

Decide early where your images will live so you can also plan how to style product photos to fit each platform. Website hero shots may be wide and minimal, while Instagram thrives on bold squares. Marketplaces like Etsy often require white backgrounds, while print catalogs might have bold color backgrounds with space for text. Decide early on the end plan so you can style and frame accordingly.

Create a shot list

Your checklist for a smooth, all-encompassing shoot:

• Hero shots: scroll-stopping main images
• Multiple angles: eye-level, high, low, bird’s-eye
• Close-ups: show textures, finishes, craftsmanship
• Lifestyle shots: in-use or styled in context
• Group shots: bundles, sets, or full collections
• Seasonal variations: props or backgrounds for holidays, still on-brand

Plan props and backgrounds

When thinking about how to stage products for photos, props should support the story, not compete with the product. Keep backgrounds simple and consistent. Think seamless paper, textured linen, or reclaimed wood for a recognizable brand style. 

Then play around with props to have fun and redirect focus back on your product. Try to make your audience imagine what their life could look like with your product, like a beautifully set breakfast scene featuring your pottery or a group of friends giggling around your illustrated deck of cards.

Pro tip: Sketch your frames or make a quick mood board to keep your shoot focused and on-brand.

Technical details: what to consider

If your product photos will appear online and in print, knowing how to take great product photos for each format will ensure crisp, compelling images everywhere. The right tweaks to file size, resolution, and composition can mean the difference between a crisp, compelling image and one that falls flat.

File size and resolution

• For web: Optimize for speed without losing clarity. Use 72 ppi and save as compressed JPEG or PNG files so your pages load quickly and customers stay engaged.
• For print: Go high-resolution at 300 DPI (minimum)for sharp, professional quality that stands up to close inspection. Whether it’s a glossy holiday catalog or a direct mail postcard, detail matters, and pixelation won’t do.

Color consistency

• Calibrate your monitor: Colors on-screen can differ from how they appear in print. Calibration is the secret ingredient that aligns what you see on-screen with the final product, whether it’s a digital file or a page in a catalog. Follow our step-by-step guide for fine-tuning your color management process.
• Test small proof runs: Print a single copy to check the final product before committing to full print orders to avoid surprises with color or detail.

Image composition

• For print: Pay attention to your safe zones and crop marks, especially for full-bleed designs. Remember that printers need a little extra space for trimming, so keep key elements away from the very edges.
• For web: Focus on clean, flexible framing that works across devices, from a widescreen laptop to a mobile phone feed. Think about how your product will look when cropped for thumbnails, banners, and social media previews.

Set up your space

The proper setup can make even the simplest product shot look polished and professional. By controlling light, background, and composition, you’ll understand how to shoot product photography that feels intentional and on-brand—even without a full studio.

Choose the right location

Aim for a spot inside near a large window with plenty of natural light. A garage with the door open is another great option—it lets in diffused daylight while reducing glare from glass panes.

Experiment with angles

Position your surface at different angles to the window and see how the light changes. The closer your product is to the light source, the softer the shadows will be. Move it further away for a bit more contrast and depth.

Control your lighting environment

Turn off all other light sources (especially overhead lights) to avoid unwanted color casts or mixed lighting that can throw off your white balance.

Create a seamless background

Use a sweep (a curved backdrop) so your background flows smoothly from vertical to horizontal with no visible seams. White paper or fabric works beautifully. If needed, prop it up with a stack of books or a box to keep it in place.

Prep your product

A spotless product makes for a spotless photo. Wipe away dust, fingerprints, and labels. For clothing, smooth out creases or steam if needed.

Place props with intention

If you’re using props, position them so they enhance the story of your product rather than distract from it. Keep your hero product centered on the flat portion of your sweep.

Fill in shadows
A reflector card (even a sheet of white foam board or foil) can bounce light back onto your product, brightening shadowed areas and highlighting texture. Adjust its position until you achieve the balance you want.

Dial in your camera settings

If you’re comfortable switching off auto-mode, here are a few simple settings that work well for product photos.

• Shutter speed: Keep it at 1/60 second or faster to avoid blur if you’re hand-holding. If you’re using a tripod, you can go slower for brighter exposures.
• Aperture (f-stop): Aim for around f/8–f/11 to keep your entire product sharp. Use a wider aperture (like f/2.8) only if you want a blurred background for a styled, artistic look.
• ISO: Start at 100–200 for the cleanest image. Only raise it if your photo is too dark, and increase gradually, as a high ISO can add grain.

Pro tip: Try taking multiple exposures of the same shot and blending them together in editing for the best possible lighting and detail.

Or dial in your smartphone settings

If camera settings feel overwhelming, don’t worry, modern smartphones and cameras in auto mode can still give you great results. Just focus on good lighting and a steady setup.

• Clean your lens: A quick wipe makes a big difference in sharpness.
• Tap to focus: Tap your product on the screen so your camera locks focus where it matters most.
• Adjust exposure: After tapping, slide your finger up or down to make the image brighter or darker until it looks natural.
• Hold steady: Rest your phone on a tripod, a stack of books, or any solid surface to avoid blur.
• Turn off the flash: Natural light looks cleaner and avoids harsh glare.
• Keep colors accurate: If your phone has a “white balance” or “daylight” setting, use it to keep colors consistent.

Pro tip: Many phones have a pro or manual mode. If you want to experiment, try lowering the ISO for sharper images and using a slight exposure adjustment instead of relying on filters.

Take it to the next level with product and brand storytelling

Great product photography goes beyond simply showing what you sell. It tells a story, sparks emotion, and helps customers picture your product in their lives. Whether you’re building a holiday gift guide, seasonal catalog, or social media campaign, the right mix of imagery can transform your brand presence.

Mix up your shots
A healthy balance of plain product shots and styled lifestyle photos gives customers both clarity and inspiration.

• Plain product shots: Clean, distraction-free images that show your product clearly and accurately. Perfect for online marketplaces and product listings.
• Lifestyle or context shots: Styled images that show your product in use or in a setting that reflects your brand’s personality. These help customers imagine ownership and create an emotional connection.

Show every angle
Capture your product from multiple perspectives—eye level, high angle, low angle, and even bird’s-eye view—so buyers feel confident they know exactly what they’re getting.

Think in sets and collections
Group complementary products together in one image. Not only does this inspire customers with styling ideas, but it’s also a subtle upselling tool. Show variations side by side, or present a full product line as a cohesive set.

Keep it consistent
Brand trust comes from familiarity. Use consistent backgrounds, lighting, and prop styles across all platforms—whether customers are browsing your website, flipping through your printed catalog, or scrolling your Instagram feed.

Add subtle brand touches
Small, consistent details—like your signature background color, a recognizable prop, or a specific lighting mood—help customers recognize your brand instantly without overpowering the product itself.

Seasonal styling without losing your identity
It’s great to tap into seasonal energy (festive greens for the holidays, airy pastels for spring), but keep your core aesthetic front and center. It makes sure your visuals stay fresh without losing your signature touch.

Pro tip: Before shooting, think about the story each image will tell. Is it about craftsmanship? Everyday utility? Luxury and indulgence? Let that story guide your styling choices.

How to take product photos

Once your setup is ready, it’s time to start taking your photos. Remember, the goal is to create a complete collection of images that bring your product to life and help customers picture how it fits into their lives. Think of it as building a tool-kit of images: clean, product-only shots for clarity, detailed close-ups to showcase unique value, and lifestyle shots to inspire. Together, these images tell the full story of your product. 

Sticking to a structured workflow will help you stay organized and ensure you don’t miss any important shots. 

Product photography workflow

• Step 1: Start by capturing your hero image with your product front and center against a clean background. This feature photo should be easy to take in with a quick glance.
• Step 2: Rotate your product and capture it from every side, including at 45-degree angles. These images will provide shoppers with a full view of your product. 
• Step 3: Take close-up shots of key details. Zoom in on fastenings, information labels, textures, and any other unique features. 
• Step 4: Now it’s time to capture lifestyle or context shots. Arrange your chosen props, swap out your backgrounds, or position your models, depending on how you’re choosing to style these images. 
• Step 5: Review and refine the shots you’ve taken on a large screen. Try to do this before packing up, so that you can quickly retake any that didn’t quite hit the mark.

Pro tip: Don’t crop too tightly in with your camera. Leaving a little background space around your product will make editing easier later on. 

Tips for photographing reflective or tricky items

Shiny, glossy, or transparent products, like jewelry, glassware, or ceramics, can look stunning in photos, but they also come with extra challenges. Here’s how to capture them beautifully.

• Diffuse your lighting: Placing your product in a lightbox will help reduce shadows and reflections, but if you don’t have one, you can achieve a similar effect with sheer fabric or baking paper.  Simply position the material between your light source and product, keeping it closer to the light source for maximum diffusion. 
• Watch your own reflection: Glossy surfaces can accidentally capture you, your camera, or the room. Adjust your angles until the product is the star.
• Show the details: Use a macro setting or lens to get close and reveal texture, sparkle, and craftsmanship. This is especially important for fine jewelry.
• Polish before you shoot: Reflective surfaces show every speck of dust and fingerprint. A quick clean makes a big difference.
• Keep backgrounds simple: Neutral or plain backdrops help your product stand out without distraction.

Pro tip: A polarizing filter can reduce glare and deepen colors, giving reflective items extra richness and clarity.

Tips for photographing books, stationery, and paper products

Printed pieces have a tactile quality that’s hard to convey in pixels, but the right photography can make viewers almost feel the paper in their hands.

• Show the texture: Capture close-ups of paper grain, letterpress impressions, embossing, or foil details so customers can appreciate the craftsmanship.
• Master the flat lay: Overhead shots are ideal for covers, open spreads, greeting cards, or grouped stationery sets. Keep lines straight and compositions clean.
• Watch your angles: For books, photograph the cover, spine, and interior pages if they feature standout design or imagery.
• Tell a brand story: Use minimal, relevant props—pens with notebooks, reading glasses with a novel, or envelopes with letterhead—so the scene feels natural and on-brand.
• Give size perspective: Include objects that hint at scale, especially for small prints or pocket notebooks, so buyers know exactly what to expect.

Pro tip: Natural side lighting works wonders for paper. —Iit reveals subtle shadows and textures without washing out detail.

How to edit product photos

Editing is where your product photos really come to life. Learning how to edit photos for product photography means knowing how to remove background distractions, soften shadows, adjust brightness, and enhance color so your products look polished and professional. Remember, subtle tweaks go a long way.

Follow our checklist below to streamline your editing workflow and achieve a consistent finish across all your images.

• Cull your photos. Only take your best shots into your editing workflow.
• Check the white balance. Are your color tones too warm or too cool? Make adjustments as needed to achieve a true color match to your product.
• Tweak highlights and shadows. Ensure no important details are lost in the brightest and darkest areas of each photo.
• Adjust exposure and contrast. This sets the overall brightness and pop of your image. 
• Sharpen edges (slightly). Small edits here can enhance clarity without creating harsh edges or artifacts.
• Remove imperfections. Edit out any specks of dust, smudges, or blemishes.

For more of a deep dive and step-by-step recommendations, check out Dan Milnor’s image quality checklist and our full guide to the best photo editing software to use.

Pro tip: Once you’ve perfected your edits, you can easily bring your images into a layout for print or digital use. Tools like Blurb Presets for Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic let you export your photos directly into print-ready book templates, and Blurb BookWright makes one-click retouching simple if you want an extra hand with polish without interrupting your bookmaking flow. 

Product photography FAQs 

How do you avoid reflection in product photography?
Reflections happen when your light bounces straight back into the camera. To avoid them, diffuse your lighting with a softbox, light tent, or even a sheet of tracing paper. Adjust your shooting angle so you’re not directly facing the reflective surface. Remember to always check for your reflection in the product.

Are ring lights good for product photography?
Ring lights can work for small products, beauty items, or anything shot head-on, but they’re not always the most versatile choice. For more natural results, try softbox lighting or natural daylight from a window. If you want to experiment, position the ring light slightly off-center to avoid flat, shadowless shots. And use them with caution for reflective or shiny products, as the ring reflection can be distracting.

How do you create hard shadows in product photography?
For dramatic, high-contrast images, skip the diffusion. Use a single, direct light source, like a bare bulb or desk lamp, placed at an angle to your product. This is especially effective for bold editorial looks or stylized brand campaigns.

How do you reduce glare in product photography?
Glare can be reduced by changing your light’s angle, softening it with diffusion, or using a polarizing filter on your camera lens. For glossy or metallic items, a light tent can give you even, glare-free results.

How do you get a perfect white background for product photography?
Use a sweep (seamless curved backdrop) in bright white, evenly lit from both sides. A simple whiteboard or sheet of white fabric are great DIY sweep options. Turn off overhead lights to avoid unwanted color casts, and tweak brightness and levels in post-production for a clean, crisp finish.

Turn your product photography into a brand asset

Great product photography is more than capturing beautiful images. It’s about creating a visual story and brand experience that sticks with your audience. When your photos are presented thoughtfully and consistently, they become storytelling tools that elevate your products and inspire action.

Looking to bring it all together? Our guide to creating a stunning product catalog offers practical inspiration for layout, styling, and presentation so your imagery shines on every page.

***

Blurb is your self-publishing partner. Blurb’s easy-to-use book design tools and professional-quality printing, turning your product photography into books, magazines, and notebooks that elevate your brand and grow your business is simple. Create your free account and get started today.

The post <strong>Product photography tips and tricks to drive sales and boost your brand</strong> appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Over the years, Brown’s work has reached far beyond the printed page. He’s taken the stage at TEDx, appeared in Netflix’s Making of the American Man, and collaborated with a wide circle of artists, brands, and makers. But at the core of it all, Refueled remains rooted in his belief that print isn’t dead—it just needs to be reimagined.

In this conversation, Brown opens up about his creative process, why he’ll always come back to print, and what independent creators can do to find their own voice. 

***

Want more inspiration, just like this? Sign up for emails to get a new Behind the Book delivered to you every month.

Refueled began as what you call a “personal journal.” What does that approach let you capture that a traditional magazine structure might miss?

Refueled began as an experiment. It was a think tank of ideas, a design discipline, and an outlet for subjects such as art, style, and creative people that surrounded me. It was more or less a continuation of a zine I created in the 90s titled Automatic Buzz, but with more emphasis placed on a worldwide release.

Approaching it as a “personal journal” allowed more freedom, a unique voice, and a structure to grow slowly and organically. Magazines like Raygun, Beach Culture, and Bikini in the 1990s broke the mold wide open for a more personal and niche audience.  

What’s one piece of advice you’d give someone hoping to turn their project into something they can sell or share more widely?

Find your own unique voice, share what you’re passionate about, and present it in ways you might not have seen before. Refueled was originally shared and presented digitally online for the first couple of years. It was a great way to find an audience, fine-tune, and refine the look and feel of the magazine—but for me, print will always be king!

Community, heritage, and discovery are your three guiding pillars. How did you build your creative community, and what advice would you give to other independent creators who want to collaborate or connect?

Community, heritage, and discovery are what Refueled was built on. It would be easy to repeat the old saying “Build it and it will come,” but the “10,000 hours to master” method is a bit closer to the truth. 

It’s true that Refueled captivated and grew a large audience fairly quickly, but that itself could have been attributed to the creative community that surrounded me and the work I was doing. My TEDx talk also put me at the forefront of folks who shared a similar vision. 

I built on that early exposure by partnering with brands that felt a connection with me and doing in-store appearances, magazine signings, and hosting events. It all felt like a real grassroots movement—taking it to the streets, as it were. 

I am surrounded by creatives. Most of my friends are artists, photographers, makers, actors, writers, and directors of some sort, so there is no shortage of ideas, projects, and collaborations floating around at any given moment. I love meeting new people, and I’m always open to connecting and sharing thoughts.

You’ve said “Print isn’t dead—it’s tired. It just needs to be refueled.” In your view, what can print still deliver to readers that digital will never replicate?

I was instinctively drawn to print at a very early age. Having grown up in the ’60s and ’70s, LIFE magazine could be found in just about every household. Its large format, full spread photography, and clean, bold aesthetic spoke to the early graphic designer in me. 

There is just something about holding a physical printed magazine. How it feels in your hands, the smell of the paper and ink, and the ability of being able to tear pages out and tack them up on a mood board or share with a friend. I can still vividly remember the smell of my MAD magazines from childhood, reading them under my blanket at night with a flashlight. Kids can’t replicate that today with their iPads.

Walk us through your entire creation process—from first spark to finished magazine in the bookstore.

I work very organically. There are no editorial calendars, no set release dates, or regular layout design grids. No two issues have ever looked the same—which is something any traditional publisher or distributor would have a stroke over, and steer you clear of. But it’s these things that keep it extremely exciting, free-flowing, and worth it for me.

I keep many journals. Some just for design ideas and inspirations. Others for random words, writings, poems, or life observations. I operate completely on gut feelings, which I think makes the creative process clear and easy. There will always be something that tells me “this should be an issue.” 

Once an idea is fleshed out, I will begin curating content (interviews, photography, writings, etc.). I always start with the cover design, which dictates the look and feel of the issue. I will then start the interior layouts—a process that usually takes a month or so, as I will keep going back to completed pages and ensuring that they communicate the feeling or message I have envisioned. 

After eighteen years of publishing, Refueled is still going strong. How do you bring in new readers while keeping longtime subscribers engaged?

After all these years, it really is still a mystery to me. I feel like Refueled is still in its grassroots stage, still developing and growing by simple word-of-mouth. I can say that the Refueled worldwide audience is a very dedicated one. I feel my job is to create and let the work find its way in the universe. 

Indie publishing has exploded in the past decade. What’s one common mistake you see newcomers make, and how would you coach them to avoid it?

So stoked to see more and more indie publications hit the scene. If there is one piece of advice I share with other creatives, it’s this:

A creative starts at the bottom of a circle, gains experience, and moves through an education of their craft. It’s when you move beyond that and start going back down the circle, forgetting everything that you’ve learned, that you come back to a place where you’re trusting your instincts and your unconscious voice.

Share who you are, what shaped you, what inspires you, and share from the heart. Tell those stories from within, and you will find your audience. Trust your gut. If it feels right, you’re probably on to something.

***

At Blurb, we believe stories like Chris Brown’s are what make independent publishing so powerful. Whether you’re crafting a one-of-a-kind zine, building a collectible magazine, or producing a book that captures your creative vision, Blurb gives you the tools to make something that matters—and share it with the world. Ready to start your own project? Create a free Blurb account today and see where your story can take you.

The post Refueled: Behind the Magazine with Chris Brown appeared first on Blurb Blog.

The holiday season isn’t just the most wonderful time of the year—it’s a perfect opportunity to grow your brand, attract new customers, and boost your book sales. With shoppers searching for thoughtful, one-of-a-kind gifts, your self-published book could be just what they’re looking for.

Whether you’ve created a beautifully designed cookbook, a coffee-table art book, a children’s book, or custom notebooks and journals, this is your moment to shine. Not sure how to market a book or where to start? Don’t worry, we’ve got you.

In this post, we’ll walk you through how to promote your book this holiday season with practical, creative tips tailored for creative bookmakers like you. We’ll start by building a holiday marketing plan together and then get into 12 ideas to make this season your best.

Still in the idea phase? Get inspired with our take on the top five self-published book genres that get the most sales (and don’t require too much lead time).

Step 1: Start with a holiday marketing plan

Before you dive into the sales tactics below (jump there), take the time to outline a simple marketing plan. This will keep you focused, organized, and consistent throughout the holiday season—even during the busiest weeks.

Below are the key elements you’ll want to think about. Grab a pen and paper or open up a blank document and start jotting down your ideas. Don’t overthink it at this stage. Even quick notes or bullet points will do, and you’ll be surprised at how quickly a clear plan starts to take shape.  

Identify your target audience

Who are you creating for? Whether it’s parents looking for children’s books, foodies shopping for holiday recipes, or art lovers looking for a conversation-starting coffee table book—knowing your ideal customer helps you tailor every piece of your campaign, from the tone of your copy to the look and feel of your visuals and the type of deals you offer. 

Try creating one or two audience personas covering basic information like:

• Demographics: Age and location  
• Interests: Hobbies and values (like: do they prioritize sustainability?)
• Shopping habits: What social platforms are they on? Where do they browse? Who do they take recommendations from? What’s their potential budget?

The good news is you don’t need to invest in extensive market research to uncover this data. With a little digging into the tools and platforms you are probably already using, you can generate lots of useful insights. 

• Review past sales for patterns to see which of your self-published projects is the most popular, who buys them, and how they found you.
• Check your social media analytics for audience details like age ranges, locations, and other interests.
• Run a quick poll on your social channels with key questions that help you understand your followers’ top priorities.

Choose your best marketing channels

You don’t need to be everywhere. Focus on the platforms where your audience is most active, whether that’s Instagram, your newsletter, or online marketplaces. 

This targeted approach multiplies impact, without burning you out. 

Use this handy checklist to narrow down and identify your most effective channels:

1. Does my content get engagement here? (Think likes, comments, and shares—not just impressions.)
2. Do I get conversions from this channel?
3. Do I enjoy creating content for this channel, and do I have the resources I need to do so? (Consistency is important, so be honest with yourself here.)
4. Can I repurpose content from here to other channels?

This last one isn’t a must, but it’s a definite bonus that can save you time and ensure consistency. 

Establish a holiday theme

A consistent holiday theme ties all your marketing efforts together, creating a cohesive, impactful, and polished campaign that stands out in a competitive shopping season.

Once you’ve landed on a theme (see our ideas below), think about how you can weave it throughout your content. This could include: 

• Holiday color palette: Choose three to five colors you can splash across your website, email, social banners, and packaging.
• Copy: Craft seasonal taglines or phrases that still feel on brand.
• Recurring visual elements: Design or choose specific icons, patterns, and motifs. You could even create a special logo lockup for the holiday period.
• Photography style: Opt for consistent lighting styles, backgrounds, and props when taking photos of your book.

Inclusive holiday theme ideas

• Winter wonderland: Elegant and serene. Think soft whites, silver accents, frosty blues, and snowflake patterns.
• Cozy and warm:  Evoke that hygge life—deep reds, forest greens, and images of fireplaces, blankets, and candles. 
• Modern minimalist: Sleek and subtle with monochrome tones, clean typography, and understated seasonal icons.
• Rustic holiday: Embrace earthy tones, kraft paper textures, pinecones, and hand-lettered typography.
• Magical nights: Create a festive atmosphere with jewel tones like emerald and sapphire, twinkling lights, and starry motifs.
• Playful and bright: Stand out with bold, unexpected colors that still feel festive (hot pink, turquoise, lime green) and whimsical illustrations.

Know your capacity

Trying to do everything is a shortcut to overwhelm, so don’t overextend yourself! Consider how much time (and energy) you realistically have for everything the holiday season involves, from content creation and events to packaging and shipping.

The holiday season is the busiest time of year for creative retailers and self-published authors, but with a bit of planning and preparation, it can also be fun and productive!

Here are some of our top tips for getting the most out of the holiday season (without burning out).

• Prioritize: Pick one or two core tactics (like a Black Friday discount and a gift guide email series) and do them well. Then anything else you can get to is a bonus!
• Batch tasks: Write all your social captions in one sitting, prep your packaging in advance, or shoot multiple product photos of your book at once so you’re not scrambling day-to-day.
• Automate: Use scheduling tools for posts and emails so your content keeps going out, even when you’re taking a well-deserved break!
• Reuse and repurpose: Give great content a new lease of life. Adapt last year’s holiday posts, turn one great product style photo into a social post, ad, and email header, or repackage a blog into bite-sized tips for Instagram.

Let Blurb help
From cookbooks to custom notebooks and journals, if you’re selling a self-published book this holiday season, we’ve got the tools to make it simple and stress-free. Our print-on-demand platform handles the heavy lifting—printing, packing, and shipping—so you can focus on the fun stuff. Planning to sell in person at holiday fairs or pop-up events? Place bulk orders ahead of time and take advantage of our volume discounts to boost your profits.

Set up a marketing calendar

A calendar turns good intentions into action. It helps you keep all your channels aligned and time your content around peak buying moments for maximum impact.

Here are the key dates you’ll want to plot out: 

• Important sale days: Black Friday, Cyber Monday, Giving Tuesday
• Shipping cutoffs: Mid-December windows, depending on carrier
• Planned promotions: Discount periods, limited-edition launches, email sends, social pushes
• Events: Holiday fairs, pop-ups, live streams
• Blurb Bookstore sales: If you list your book in the Blurb Bookstore, you’ll receive monthly sale alerts—perfect for planning ahead. Slot those into your calendar so you can amplify with your messaging ahead of each sale.

Quick tip: Visualize it all in one place—use an integrated calendar, spreadsheet, or content planning tool so you can see overlaps and gaps. 

A bit of planning now gives you structure, clarity, and confidence as you move into the execution phase. 

Next up: tactical ways to promote your book for holiday sales—starting with offers that get attention.

Step 2: Choose your marketing tactics

Now you’ve got your marketing plan in place, it’s time to bring it to life. The holiday season is one of the biggest opportunities of the year for self-publishers—especially when you’ve got a well-designed, beautifully printed book in hand. 

From eye-catching promotions to festive editions, here are 12 smart, seasonal ways to market your self-published book this holiday season. 

1. Offer discounts and promotions

There’s no getting away from it. This is prime time for deals. Shoppers expect them, and they do drive urgency. Promotions can help you reach new customers and encourage fans to buy more than one copy as gifts. 

Try these ideas:

• A deep percentage off for Black Friday
• Free shipping for Cyber Monday
• Bundle deals (like your book plus a companion journal or mini print)

2. Create a holiday limited edition

Give your readers something new and gift-worthy. A limited-edition version can turn your book into a collectible or seasonal must-have.

Ideas to try:

• A holiday-themed cover or updated title page
• A new foreword, exclusive chapter, or bonus recipe
• Signed and numbered copies
• A downloadable gift: playlist, ebook, art print

These small additions can make your book feel extra special and help it stand out during peak gifting season.

3. Share reviews and testimonials

People trust people. A few honest reviews or kind words from your audience can help others decide to buy—especially if they’re shopping for someone else.

Ways to share:

• Pull quotes for graphics on Instagram or Pinterest
• Add standout reviews to your email campaigns
• Share short video testimonials or “unboxing” clips

Tip: If you’ve sold books already, reach out to your buyers directly and ask for a few words. You’d be surprised how willing your readers are to support your success.

4. Pitch your book to gift lists (or create your own)

Holiday gift guides are a go-to for shoppers and a great way to get your book in front of new audiences. Editors and bloggers are often on the lookout for thoughtful, well-made products from independent creators, so don’t hesitate to pitch your book.

Where to pitch:

• Local publications, newspapers, or blogs that highlight small businesses and creators
• Genre-specific sites and newsletters (like parenting blogs, photography magazines, or foodie roundups)
• Online gift guides with a theme—like ‘Books under $30’ or ‘Gifts for design lovers’

Or create your own:
Partner with fellow authors, artists, or small business owners to build a curated gift guide you can all shout about. This is a great way to cross-promote to different audiences and extend your reach during the holidays.

Tip: Make it easy for editors or readers to say yes. Include strong visuals, a short pitch, and a link to purchase. 

5. Run targeted online ads

Got a bit of budget? A few well-placed ads can go a long way, especially during the holidays when shoppers are actively searching for unique, meaningful gifts. Online ads help you get your book in front of the right people at the right time and can be a powerful strategy for reaching new audiences. 

Better still, you can target people based on their interests—like promoting your cookbook to users searching for quick meal ideas, or your photo book to design lovers.

Where to start:
Choose the ad platform that best fits your audience.

• Nonfiction or business books? Try LinkedIn.
• Art, design, or photography books? Go with Pinterest or Instagram.
• General audience? Google and Facebook are solid all-rounders.

Once you’ve picked a platform, create your ad, define your audience, and set your budget. Start small and monitor performance regularly so you’re making the most of your investment—especially during high-traffic periods like Black Friday or the week before shipping cut-offs.

6. Optimize for search (SEO)

SEO (search engine optimization) helps surface your book to people searching online for the perfect gift—and it’s one of the best, always-on, free strategies you can use.

Start by identifying the keywords people might type into Google or third-party platforms like Etsy when searching for gifts in your niche. Tools like Google Keyword Planner or Moz Keyword Explorer can help you discover trending search queries. 

Next, make sure your book title, subtitle, and description include those keywords. They should also appear on your website, online store, blogs, video titles and descriptions, and in any metadata fields.

Bonus idea: Create a holiday-specific landing page featuring your book, gift messaging, and festive visuals to boost both search traffic and ad performance.

7. Sell at holiday fairs or pop-ups

In-person events are a powerful way to connect with new readers—especially when your book is visually striking, giftable, or tells a personal story. Holiday fairs, local markets, and seasonal pop-ups offer a great opportunity to showcase your work and start conversations with new customers.

Before you go:

• Order in bulk using volume discounts to maximize profit margins and ensure you have enough copies on hand.
• Create a warm, festive display with holiday signage, fairy lights, and stacked or wrapped copies that help shoppers imagine your book as a gift.
• Add QR codes to signs or bookmarks that link directly to your online store or Blurb Bookstore listing—perfect for people who want to buy later or send your book as a gift.

Bonus idea: Pre-wrap a few copies in seasonal paper with a note like “Ready to gift!” to inspire last-minute buyers.

8. Launch a holiday email campaign

Email is still one of the best ways to keep your community engaged. A targeted list gives you a head start when planning how to promote your book to people who already love your work. You don’t need a massive list—just an audience that’s interested in what you’re making.

Email campaign ideas:

• A holiday “gift guide” that features your book
• Discount reminders (like “Last day for free shipping!”)
• Behind-the-scenes stories about how you made your book

Tip: Start building your list now—offer a sneak peek, download, or exclusive content in exchange for an email address. Need more guidance? Here’s how to grow your mailing list.

9. Stay active on social media

Social media is a powerful channel during the holidays, but remember, you don’t need to be on every platform or post every day to be effective. Focus on the channels your audience uses and aim for regular, engaging updates.

Here’s how to promote a book on social media (without burning out):

• Plan your posts ahead with a mix of formats: photos, videos, stories, and reels.
• Share book teasers, behind-the-scenes videos, and countdowns to launch day or deadlines.
• Engage actively by responding to comments and DMs, and repost user-generated content like photos or reviews.

Tip: Authenticity beats perfection. Use your phone camera and show your creative process—people love seeing the human behind a brand.

10. Reach out to local bookstores

Independent bookstores are a great place to get your book in front of engaged, book-loving shoppers. Many store owners are happy to support local or self-published authors, as long as the book aligns with their audience and looks professional.

How to pitch your book:

• Bring a finished copy so they can experience the look, feel, and quality firsthand.
• Prepare a short elevator pitch that highlights what your book is about and why it makes a great gift.
• Offer a seasonal edition—like a signed copy, a limited holiday version, or gift-wrapped bundles—to make it more appealing for in-store displays.

Tip: Mention that you’re a local creator. Many bookstores love to feature homegrown talent, especially when they’re curating shelves for the holidays or hosting gift-themed events. 

11. Host a holiday giveaway 

Giveaways are a fun, low-cost way to build excitement around your book, grow your audience, and connect with other creators. They’re especially effective on social media during the holiday season, when people are actively looking for gift ideas and special offers.

Ideas to try:

• Pair your book with a complementary item, like an art print, journal, candle, or holiday treat, for a cozy, themed bundle.
• Partner with fellow indie authors or small businesses to create a prize bundle for a joint giveaway and expand your reach through cross-promotion.
• Run the giveaway on platforms like Instagram or TikTok and ask followers to tag friends, share the post, or join your mailing list to enter.

Tip: Keep the entry process simple and make sure the prize aligns with your audience’s interests. A beautifully curated giveaway can not only increase visibility, but also attract followers who are genuinely excited about your work.

12. Offer a gift-wrapping option

Make your book even more giftable by offering a wrapping option or personalized note at checkout. It’s a small touch that adds big value, especially for last-minute shoppers or those sending books directly to loved ones.

Ideas to elevate the unboxing experience:

• Choose wrapping paper, ribbon, or packaging that reflects your book’s aesthetic or genre (think kraft paper and twine for a nature photo book or bold metallics for a design-focused title).
• Tuck in a small extra, like a bookmark, recipe card, or thank-you note, to surprise and delight.
• Allow buyers to include a custom message or “To/From” tag for a personal and thoughtful touch.

It’s a simple add-on, but it can make your book feel like a complete, ready-to-give gift. Need ideas? Check out these creative ways to gift wrap a book.

Turn your self-published book into a holiday bestseller

Holiday marketing doesn’t have to feel like a full-time job. With a thoughtful plan and a few well-timed tactics, you can turn your self-published book into a meaningful, memorable gift and give your sales a seasonal boost.

Whether you’re trying out social posts, designing a limited-edition version, or pitching your local bookstore, it all comes back to connection. You’re not just selling a book, you’re sharing your passion, your creativity, your story. And that’s something worth gifting.

***

Blurb empowers authors, photographers, artists, and designers to bring their vision to life with premium-quality printed books. From easy-to-use design tools to professional print-on-demand services that let you distribute globally, we help you take full creative control—so you can focus on sharing your vision with the world. Ready to get started? Create a free account and start building your book today.

The post How to market a book: 12 tips to boost holiday sales appeared first on Blurb Blog.

“I don’t make films,” I said.

“I don’t care, do it anyway.”

I quickly set up my mobile phone, stared into the camera, and started talking. Twenty minutes later, I had Going Solo with the 50mm. The film had poor audio quality and zero production value, but spoke to simplicity, intention, the power of print, and how less is more. I sent the film to my friend and forgot about it.

The freedom of creative restraint

I had just returned from co-teaching a workshop in Albania with fellow photographer Elena Dorfman. During the workshop, I didn’t focus on my work. I focused on the needs of the students, which meant I was less concerned about my equipment. 

I decided to take one camera and one lens. I not only found this minimalism technique freeing and easier on my back and neck, but I also created a body of work unlike anything I’d made before, even though I wasn’t focused on my photographs. 

When you have one camera and one lens, your equipment doesn’t occupy any headspace. The gear becomes an extension of the eye. When you reduce the number of things between the photographer and the physical act of making pictures, the photographer can begin to focus on matters of intention. You ask questions like, “Why am I doing this?” This might seem like a simple question, with an obvious answer like “I love photography,” but I find this is a loaded question with complex, often uncomfortable answers.

Much of the work being produced today is created for an audience, not for the photographer. This greatly impacts the work. Who is the audience? What is their intention? Does the work belong to the photographer or the audience? And what will constantly producing for the audience do to the photographer over time?

The trip and the experience of one camera and one lens were the perfect fodder for my first YouTube film. Little did I know the impact it would have.

Why intention matters more than attention

I’ve had a long career as a photographer, and I’ve also spent several years assisting other, more established photographers. Over the years, I noticed that their best work began as personal work, where the intention of the photography came from within. They were shooting for themselves and not for a client or potential audience. This work showcased their true vision, uninfluenced or tainted by the other. 

Personal projects bring authenticity. When the source of inspiration comes from the artist, there tends to be less outside interference or distraction, allowing the photographer to focus on the story through basics like light, timing, and composition, unaltered by outside demands.

Your challenge: Make something for you

If you have spent your entire career shooting for clients, a social media audience, or another other, try making for yourself and see if you notice a difference in your work.

Working for ourselves forces us to answer questions usually answered by someone else. What am I after? For what use or purpose? In what style? 

If the idea of shooting for yourself seems like a foreign concept, give it a try and see what happens. Start small, start close. Find a story that resonates with you at a deep level. Use your curiosity to sort out the topic and start photographing, but without an audience in mind. Shoot what you want, how you want, for as long as you want. Aim for a small series with personal intention. 

For example, I made a book with my mother before she passed early last year. A collaboration of her poetry and my photographs, culled and edited from twenty-five years of creative effort. There are only two copies of the book, Inertia, in existence, but it is one of the most important books I’ve made. There was no audience asking for this book, nor did anyone distract me from my original goal.

One camera, one lens

Several weeks after I delivered my first YouTube film to my friend, he called and asked, “Are you watching what’s happening?” 

“With what?” I asked. 

“With your film,” he said. “You reinvented YouTube,” he added. 

I didn’t reinvent anything. But the message landed—especially with those who hadn’t yet simplified their operation (like me, using one camera and one lens) or made work with personal intention. 

We creatives are at our very best and create our best works when given a chance to be truthful. The beauty of creativity is that there is no right or wrong. Sometimes, ideas that seemingly emerge from nowhere are the same ones that lead to breakthroughs and pioneering original work.

So stop performing and start listening—to yourself, your instincts, and your stories. Strip things back. Get honest. And see where that leads you.

***

Hit the Books is a monthly series from longtime Blurb creative ambassador Dan Milnor—photographer, educator, and advocate for intentional storytelling. With decades of experience behind the lens and in the field, Dan shares honest insights, creative philosophy, and practical advice to help you stay inspired and keep creating.

Looking to bring your next photo project to life? Start your book with Blurb.

The post One camera, one lens, photography with intention appeared first on Blurb Blog.

34 years after he first glimpsed the peaks of Everest at 28,000 feet, William Thompson is choosing to upgrade his beautiful photo book, Everest, documenting the experience, using layflat paper. We caught up with him to find out why and learn more about his work as a photographer.

Could you tell us a bit about your work as a photographer? Who or what has influenced your approach?

My history as a photographer grew out of a background in art, particularly fine art painting (I was in an MFA program for a while when in college).  My mother was also a painter and I grew up smelling oil paints and turpentine. However, I didn’t begin thinking about photographic imagery until I was much older. My first image making for money was an assignment for the National Geographic (my book of Everest Aerials was an early NGS story assignment).

Honestly, I do not know how I could have been so fortunate to shoot images for the NGS around the world for the ensuing 15 years. This experience virtually changed my life and it has been fascinating. I know this sounds somewhat self-righteous, but I think the biggest influence on my work is my own imagination. I get to explore how I see and how I think visually and I have the wonderful willingness to explore the dark edges of my own thinking. Of course, I am a committed student of the great image-makers, painters, photographers, sculptures, and writers. I love the vast sea of ideas that I have the wonderful opportunity to play with, both visually and intellectually. The world is my muse. I read constantly, but very little fiction. I search for big ideas and love to wander through them.

It sounds as though you travel to tons of amazing places. Why did you choose these specific photos of Everest for your book?

Yes, I have a huge inventory of images—simply overwhelming at times. Stories on Kathmandu, Bhutan, Elephants, China… etc. I need to create more books—not to make money but to edify and show the world as it was. Everest. Well, an amazing collection of once upon a time in history images. No one had any images of this highest mountain in the world. Everest made the most sense to turn into a book.

In your blurb, you mention the geopolitical significance of the landscape—was this an important dimension of this project? Do you feel photography has a role to play in this arena?

The geopolitical situation enveloping the Himalaya today is intense and I doubt that anyone will, in the foreseeable future, be able to duplicate the project of mapping and obliquely photographing Everest. My image-making with respect to political issues is generally a question of restrictions rather than creativity. That being said, I am working on a book presently entitled Man and Beast, which is a look at the situation of Asian elephants and the history that man has with elephants. Truly fascinating and truly, today, sad. I just returned a couple of days ago from photographing the situation in Sri Lanka.

When you made your book, how did you envision it being used?

I had hoped that it would get a reasonable circulation as an education piece—show the world what Everest really looks like. I risked my life on this assignment (the flights were incredible combinations of serenity and madness). We survived and I wanted to put the book in the public eye. I made the book such that it can be previewed, opened, and looked at for no cost at all.

Which tool did you use to make your book and why?

I use InDesign as it is a standard in publishing and, more critically, it is relatively easy to use.

How did you find the book creation process?

Personally, I found it quite simple due in part because I am very familiar with InDesign AND you provided a template, which added significantly to the “ease of use”.

Did you find the process of upgrading your book with Layflat paper easy?

I converted the Everest book with a layflat paper so I do not have to deal with the gutter and its impact on spreads.

What do you feel layflat paper adds to the book?

The concept at least makes the images seem more real as there isn’t the issue of the loss of image in the gutter.

Any future plans for more books…?

One on Ladakh and its people, another on the Kathmandu Valley (originally a NGS assignment and one of my favorites), another on Bhutan—who knows what else.

Glimpse the peaks of Everest for yourself with a sneak preview of William’s book, Everest: An Aerial Image Odyssey.

How Everest was made

• Format: Large Landscape, Layflat Photo Book
• Size: 13×11 in, 33×28 cm
• Design tool: Blurb plugin for Adobe InDesign

***

Your adventures deserve more than a camera roll. Blurb makes it simple to turn your travel photography into a professional-quality book—designed exactly how you want it. Start today with a free account and create your book, your way.

The post Behind the Book with William Thompson appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Empowering young voices through creativity and community—that’s the mission of the Creative Youth Collective. With a background in interdisciplinary arts and years of experience mentoring youth across the globe, co-founder Kathryn Ian Gentzke has co-created a unique space where young writers and photographers can bring their visions to life.

In this interview, Ian Gentzke takes us behind the scenes of the Creative Youth Collective’s latest triumph: their 22-24 Anthology. Join us as we explore the power of self-publishing, the joy of mentorship, and the incredible potential of young minds when given the right tools and support. 

Whether you’re a budding artist, a seasoned self-publisher, or simply curious about the intersection of creativity and youth development, this conversation will inform, inspire, and ignite your creative spark—and give you plenty of ideas for books of your own. Let’s go!

Can you tell us about the inspiration behind founding the Creative Youth Collective and how it has evolved over the past two years?

After graduating with an MFA in Interdisciplinary Studio Practice from California College of the Arts, I launched The CCC Project, an organization dedicated to empowering youth through creativity and activism. Before attending CCA, I spent years leading youth mentorship programs across the San Francisco Bay Area, NYC, Upstate New York, and Berlin, honing a playful, collaborative approach to teaching media arts and writing.

So, in 2016, I founded The CCC Project to work closely with young writers and photographers who have brilliant ideas but need some help bringing them to life. The three C’s—creativity, curiosity, and community—serve as the foundation of my work. With each young artist and writer, we focus on bringing their story worlds to life, sharing their work widely with the hope of inspiring more young people to create and donating royalties from our book sales to organizations that make the kind of positive changes we want to see in the world.

As I worked with these talented young creators, I noticed how much they had in common despite their different backgrounds. So, in 2022, I took things a step further and launched the Creative Youth Collective. Now, alongside our one-on-one sessions, our members come together to share their work, exchange ideas, and support each other. It’s a vibrant, fun community that truly celebrates collaboration!

Could you share a particularly memorable moment or success story from one of the young creators you’ve worked with?

Yes, I’d love to tell you about Anna and her mom, Donna. I had the honor of mentoring Anna and helping her cultivate her passion for photography and writing from the time she was ten years old until she was 17 and preparing to leave for college. Over the years, I also collaborated with Donna on designing Anna’s homeschooling program. Donna consistently encouraged me to trust my instincts as I learned how to weave my two professional paths—being both an artist and educator—together into meaningful, personalized learning experiences that connected with Anna’s growing interests. 

That time with  Anna and Donna deeply informs the pedagogical approach that I use in my work with the Creative Youth Collective—I let my young artists and writers lead with their interests and ideas as I guide them through deepening and developing their creative practice in real-time. 

It’s been a joy and an honor to watch Anna grow as an artist and activist over the years. 

In celebration of Anna’s commitment to her work as a photographer, as well as her deep respect for animals, nature, and the environment, we awarded her the first Creative Youth Collective Scholarship in the spring of 2023. Now, Anna is in her second year studying photojournalism at the Corcoran School of Art and Design at George Washington University, where she continues to follow her passion for photography and environmental conservation. 

And the best part is, we keep in touch! Through The CCC Project, I’ve built lifelong relationships with young creators and their parents, and that is the greatest success I could hope for.

How do you adapt your mentoring style to accommodate the diverse ages and skill levels of the Collective’s members?

My mentoring style is grounded in the belief that the voices of young writers and artists need to be amplified. Each individual has a vision that deserves to be realized and shared. That’s why, in our one-to-one sessions, the young person is always in the driver’s seat. 

I let them lead with their ideas. I listen. I ask questions. I get really curious about their interests and the questions that keep them wondering. Once I have a solid understanding of their goals, I guide them in clarifying their vision, articulating their story, and sharing their creative work. In doing so, I encourage them to see the creative work that they put out into the world as an act of generosity that can inspire others and thus add to the collective good. In a nutshell, my job is to take their ideas seriously and invite them to do the same.

Tell us about your approach to teaching young creators about book design and layout, especially when working with both written and photographic content.

When it’s time to make layout and design decisions, we turn to our favorite books for inspiration. I encourage each young creator to pick three to five books they love and identify the design elements that stand out to them. We explore everything—font, spacing, chapter title pages, the feel of hardcover versus softcover, dust jackets versus image wraps, dedication pages, and even page number placement. They’re often surprised by how many decisions go into book design, but they love being in control and creating a book that’s uniquely their own, and that amplifies their voice on so many levels.

In an era dominated by digital content, why is it important for young creators to experience publishing physical books?

In our digital age, publishing a physical book gives our members a tangible connection to their work. But even more importantly, holding their book, displaying it, and sharing it with others adds a sense of weight and significance to their ideas. In the end, the published book becomes more than a book—for each young author, it reinforces the belief that their thoughts matter, deepens their understanding of their creative development, and builds self-confidence. They really get to experience the feeling of having brought something new into the world in a tangible way. And magically, our members light up with fresh ideas the moment they open their published book for the first time. It’s truly inspiring!

Can you walk us through the process of creating the Creative Youth Collective 22-24 Anthology? What were some key decisions in curating and designing this compilation?

Creating the Creative Youth Collective 22-24 Anthology was a team effort. We started by picking out the excerpts and images that each writer and photographer felt were most meaningful. From there, we focused on balancing the visual and written elements to create a cohesive and engaging collection. The key was making sure that every piece had its own moment to shine while maintaining the feel of a unified whole. The Anthology is all about celebrating the unique voices of our members and crafting something truly special together.

How has working with young authors influenced your own creative practice or perspective on creativity?

Collaborating with members of the Creative Youth Collective has been incredibly inspiring for my own creative practice. They consistently remind me of how crucial it is to carve out time for creativity, not only for the joy of the work and the peace of mind it brings but also for the thrill of publishing something you’re genuinely proud of and sharing it with people who are inspired by it. Building my life around this work has created a wonderful feedback loop: the more I dive into my own creative practice, the better I am at guiding and supporting our young authors. It’s a win-win situation that keeps my creative spirit alive and helps me be a better mentor.

If you could change one thing about the self-publishing industry to better support young authors, what would it be and why?

It would be amazing if the self-publishing industry could create clearer pathways to reach audiences who would appreciate young authors’ books. Imagine having access to kid and teen-focused book fairs, indie bookstores, and school or classroom libraries! These opportunities would not only amplify young authors’ voices—they would also inspire young readers and creators around the globe.

What should organizations keep in mind when starting to incorporate self-publishing into their programs or initiatives?

Every organization has different objectives, so it’s difficult to speak generally here, but having self-published 15 books and counting, I would say that quality work takes time and attention. Don’t rush it. Set up the structures necessary to fully develop ideas, edit for consistent quality, and design the physical product to the highest standards. The extra time it takes to get to the finish line is always worth it.

Beyond purchasing books, how can the broader community contribute to or engage with the Creative Youth Collective’s work?

There are several ways the broader community can support and follow along with the Creative Youth Collective. You can directly support our scholarship program by making a tax-deductible donation of any amount through our website. You can sign up for our newsletter to get the latest news and stay up to date on opportunities to get involved in our community. And you can follow us on our brand-new Instagram profile! 

Is there anything we haven’t asked that you wish we had? And what’s your answer?

As a community-focused organization, I’d like to encourage all of your readers to get in touch if our work resonates with you. We love making new friends. So, for example, if you know of a bookstore or organization that might be interested in our work, we’d love to hear about it. If you’d like to learn more about how your child could apply to join the Creative Youth Collective or apply for our scholarship program, please reach out. And finally, if you’d like to support our scholarship program, please purchase a copy of our anthology. All proceeds directly support our scholarship recipients. 

Thanks so much to Blurb for this opportunity! We’re honored to share our work with you and so grateful for your support. 

How the Creative Youth Collective was made

• Format: Paperback (Softcover)
• Size: 8×10 in, 20×25 cm
• Design tool: Blurb BookWright

***

Blurb is your gateway to the world of self-publishing—a platform to bring your creative visions to life. Whether you’re crafting a photo book, a novel, or an anthology like the Creative Youth Collective, Blurb provides the tools and support you need to design, print, and share or sell your work with the world. From concept to finished product, Blurb empowers creators of all levels to tell their stories their way. 

Inspired by Kathryn Ian Gentzke and the young artists of the Creative Youth Collective? Turn your ideas into reality—start your self-publishing journey with Blurb today.

The post The Creative Youth Collective Anthology: Behind the Book with Kathryn Ian Gentzke appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Bridget Callahan found a beautiful way to celebrate her grandmother’s life and culinary traditions in creating The Not-So-Italian Italian Cookbook. Special kitchen memories, family history, and geography are all reflected in elements of the book design—from the photographs to the illustrations to the color palette. We checked in with Bridget to learn more about her book-making process and other design projects.

How did you first get interested in illustration and design?

I’ve been obsessed with art for as long as I can remember. I constantly drew as a kid and was always crafting with my friends. Art supplies were my requested gift on every birthday and Christmas, and my favorite thing to do was go to the art store. I signed up for a graphic design class when I was a sophomore in high school and fell in love with graphic design and digital art. From that point, I knew I wanted to study design in college and go into a creative career.

What was your inspiration for The Not-So-Italian Italian Cookbook?

The inspiration for this cookbook is my Italian grandmother, Felice. Since she died in 2017, my family has been wanting to put together a cookbook of all her iconic recipes. These are the recipes of my childhood and the food we would have for every holiday and special occasion. As a lover of food illustrations and cookbooks in general, I decided to illustrate a cookbook dedicated to her life and these iconic dishes. Since food was such an important part of her life, my goal was to honor the memory of my grandma and create a cookbook that is both useful and beautiful.

Tell us about the process of designing your book. How did you decide on the layout, color scheme, typography, illustrations, and photography? Which design tools did you use?

As this was my Senior Capstone project, the process for this book was a long one! I created a giant digital mood board filled with my visual inspiration for the book. I was inspired by many colorful design-focused cookbooks and lots of different food journal illustrations. I wanted the illustration style to feel intimate and loose to express how personal and special these recipes are. I used old photographs and handwritten annotations so that the cookbook feels more personal and evokes nostalgia in the reader. I chose a tricolor palette to convey the idea of a flag but altered the colors to fit the three different locations that inspired the sections of the cookbook. The blue is reminiscent of the vibrant blue water in Sicily, the red reflects the color that is most prominent in New York Italian culture, and yellow represents the desert landscape of Ridgecrest.

Did you encounter any unexpected challenges when creating your book? If so, how did you overcome them?

I had an unexpectedly difficult time figuring out the illustration style to use for the book. This was definitely the longest process of the whole project. I experimented with illustration for weeks before I finally decided on a style. I tried ink pens, colored pencils, paintbrush drawings, and digital drawings. In the end, I decided to use black gouache paint for all of my illustrations. I then scanned these drawings and changed the color digitally to fit the colors of my book.

What advice would you give to someone making their first family cookbook or recipe collection? Any tips for a book-maker with little or no design experience?

I would tell a first-time cookbook maker to keep the design simple and let the food be the main component. I spent most of my time perfecting the food illustrations rather than worrying about the fonts and layout. The most important part of a cookbook is the food, so make sure that there are beautiful photographs or drawings of the recipes you are sharing. Keep the rest simple.

You’ve created work in various print formats (from books to posters) as well as multimedia projects. Do you have a favorite project or method of working so far?

It is so hard to choose a favorite project as they all brought their own challenges and rewards. My favorite projects, however, tend to be the ones that have subject matter that is close to my heart. For example, the project “Più Di Te,” an immersive animation video, was inspired by my deep love of Italian culture and music. It still brings me joy to watch that video to this day. My cookbook is also one of my favorite projects because it brings my grandma’s story to life, and it reminds me of the hours we spent cooking together when I was a kid.

What are some things you consider when combining different artistic mediums in one project (e.g. photography, illustration, design, video, print, 3D objects, and sound)?

At the beginning of a multi-media project, I try to strongly establish the aesthetics in a mood board so that I can reference this throughout the entire process. It is important that every different medium reflects this vision so that the whole project remains cohesive. Often, I do this with photographs by editing the colors so that they contain the same colors as the rest of the project. Originally with the cookbook, my photographs were in black and white, but I decided to overlay them with the colors from my color scheme so that they did not seem out of place.

For one of your media classes, you designed a Divination Machine that includes a deck of printed cards and an interactive lightbox. Tell us about the inspiration, design process, and materials for this piece. How did you choose a color palette, font style, paper type, and imagery for the cards to fit the overall look and feel of the project?

The assignment in this class was to make a machine that can tell the user’s future. I did some research on divination techniques and discovered a form of ancient Celtic divination called Ogham Staves that uses a tree-inspired alphabet to tell someone’s future. The basic idea is that the user picks a stick from a set of 25 sticks, each carved with a different symbol from the Ogham alphabet. These symbols have their own meanings and can be used to inform people of their fates. The machine I made has the same basic idea, but I laser cut the symbols into a wooden box and placed LED lights underneath each symbol. The user can press a button and generate a randomly chosen symbol. I designed a set of cards to accompany the box so that the user can discover what each symbol means. I illustrated each tree on the different cards and kept the color palette and the design of the cards pretty simple to let the illustrations shine.

What role does print play in our digital world?

The role of print has changed in the digital world, but it hasn’t disappeared. Printed materials have transformed from a necessity to a luxury. Books and other printed materials have become more of an art object than an everyday item. It isn’t necessary to use printed materials to communicate ideas anymore, so now print is only used for our most valued projects. I also think people have begun to value these items more as the world around us becomes more digital. Printing something brings it into our physical world and makes it more special.

What is the value of self-publishing for aspiring artists and designers?

Today, everyone has the ability to share their work and be seen by the world. The internet allows anyone to post online and gives them the chance to be recognized. Publishing a book should be no different. Self-publishing allows people from all different backgrounds and demographics to see the fruition of their creative efforts and gives them the chance to share their work on a large scale.

Is there a design or book project you’re excited about working on next?

I’m not working on anything too big right now, but I have been asked to design a logo for my cousin’s quilting shop that I’m really excited to work on! I’m done with school for now, so I’m looking forward to making whatever I want, whenever I want!

How The Not-So-Italian Italian Cookbook was made

• Format: Hardcover, ImageWrap
• Size: 8×10 in, 20×25 cm
• Design tool: PDF to Book

***

Have an idea for a new photo book, family keepsake, or creative project of your own? Blurb gives you everything you need to bring your project to life—professional tools, premium formats, and the freedom to design on your own terms. Ready to get started? Create a free account today and start creating your book, your way.

The post Behind the Book with Bridget Callahan appeared first on Blurb Blog.

For Kristal Bean, the world of photography opened up when her first daughter was born. Inspired by the profound experience of pregnancy and motherhood, she decided to launch a photography business focused on maternity and newborn portraits. Her print magazine, Celebrate Motherhood, is a beautiful extension of that work, providing a showcase of her photography skills and a style guide for new clients.

We reached out to learn more about her life behind the camera and behind the book.

1. How did you first get interested in photography?

My journey as a photographer began shortly after my first daughter was born in 2013. Every day she was growing and changing, and I wanted to remember all the things I loved about each stage. I bought my first crop sensor camera when she was just a few months old and started teaching myself everything I could about photography, running a business, and working with clients.

2. What inspired you to focus on portraits of women and motherhood?

Pregnancy and early motherhood are absolutely beautiful parts of life—but these are seasons that can be challenging, too. It’s not easy for everyone to feel gorgeous at eight months pregnant or right after you have a baby—I know I didn’t!

That’s why I believe every woman should have maternity and newborn portraits taken. I encourage my mamas to have their hair and makeup done and buy a beautiful dress (or use one from my client closet). We meet at beautiful, peaceful locations for maternity sessions, and the entire experience is all about helping them celebrate the beauty of pregnancy. Through the session and photos, she has a chance to embrace her new identity as a mother, and that is very powerful.

My goal for newborn sessions is to showcase the amazing love of a mother. I provide gentle posing guidance during my lifestyle sessions to help moms and dads slow down and bond with their new babies. Every mom has the softest, most beautiful smile as she gazes down at her baby. Capturing moments like that hardly feels like work—photography brings my heart so much joy. I’m honored that clients invite me into their homes to celebrate the beginning of their parenting journeys.

3. Do you have any tips for people who want to take better portraits? (Do’s and don’ts on lighting, backgrounds, angles, composition, etc.) Any tips on how to photograph someone you’ve just met?

My best advice for taking better portraits is to get closer! I prefer prime lenses that make you “zoom with your feet” by physically getting closer to whatever you’re photographing.

I like to spend a few moments chatting with clients and getting to know them before I ever pull out my camera. Everyone is usually a little nervous before a photo session. Taking just a couple minutes to help them relax and get to know them is a wonderful way to kick off your session.

It also helps if you explain why you’re asking clients to do something. When I am working with a pregnant woman, I briefly explain why poses are flattering as I help position her. Keeping the conversation going helps manage those feelings of nervousness clients might feel at the beginning, and it helps foster trust between you and your client if they understand why you’re posing them in a particular way.

4. Why did you choose to self-publish?

I’ve sent my clients a digital style magazine for years, and it has always helped them feel more prepared for photo sessions. It also saves me a lot of time answering texts and emails, because everything they need to know is inside.

This year, I decided to elevate the client experience and send mamas a physical copy. The Celebrate Motherhood magazine goes in the mail as soon as a client books her session, along with a card. I don’t tell them it’s coming, so it’s a fun surprise they get in the mail!

The magazine shows clients that I care deeply about making this a wonderful photography experience; mamas tell me they love how pretty the magazine looks on their coffee tables! I also love that a client can pass the magazine along to a family member or friend who is pregnant when we’ve wrapped our sessions together and it acts as a perfect marketing piece!

5. What appealed to you most about magazine format? Had you published other photo books or magazines prior to this one?

What woman doesn’t love to grab a magazine and curl up on the couch for a bit to relax?! That’s definitely one thing I like to do! The majority of my clients tell me they’ve never received a style magazine from a photographer before. It’s a fun way to learn more about their upcoming photo sessions, and I think this format keeps all that info from feeling overwhelming. Plus, my mamas get excited about possibly being included in a future version!

6. Tell us about the process of writing and designing Celebrate Motherhood. How did you decide on the layout, typography, and page length? Which book-making tools did you use?

Fortunately, all I had to do was adapt my digital version for print! My background is in public relations, and I also have experience in journalism and layout/design. That was definitely a big help in putting together the print version. I used the Blurb plugin for Adobe InDesign and it made the layout a piece of cake.

My favorite magazine is Real Simple, so I grabbed a few recent copies as I was working on the print version of Celebrate Motherhood. That’s where I took most of my layout and design inspiration. I knew I wanted lots of white space and a clean, modern, professional look.

I also knew I wanted to include bonus info that I would share with any new mama friend; I include my favorite registry items, tips for motherhood-centric books and podcasts, and even my favorite brands of swaddles and clothing for newborns.

7. How has the print publication impacted your business and your relationship with clients?

The print version has absolutely elevated my client experience! I wanted my mamas to immediately see what they have invested in, and it’s so much fun to send something that’s beautiful and educational!

My maternity, Fresh 48, and newborn sessions flow better, and I kick off every session having already earned the trust of my clients because of the magazine. They feel informed and confident about the session before it ever begins, and this makes an incredible difference in the photos. My clients also understand why I make certain suggestions for wardrobe, location choice, etc.

The magazine also gives me plenty of space to educate my clients and help them get to know me and my heart for motherhood photography. I really think this is why clients treat me like a friend when we meet for their photos; they feel like they already know me after reading Celebrate Motherhood.

8. What advice would you give to aspiring photographers that want to turn their hobby into a business or career?

I would encourage any hobbyist to invest in education before you purchase expensive gear or lots of props. There are so many incredibly talented photographers who can teach you everything you need to know about shooting, editing, posing, running a business, marketing, blogging, small biz accounting—and more!

I think a lot of people considering the move to professional photography don’t realize that actually taking photos is a very small part of what you do as a biz owner. You spend far more time on the business aspect! That means running a successful business is about much more than your gear and props.

9. When you’re not taking portraits, what are your favorite subjects to photograph?

My kids! I have three daughters (6, 4, and 3) and they are my heartbeats. My girls grow and change so fast! It seems like there is something a little different about them each day. Sometimes I take formal photos of the girls to mark a particular stage, and other times I just capture our crazy daily life.

All of my favorite images are compiled in a family yearbook at the end of the year. These family yearbooks make great gifts for family and someday I’ll pass them down to my daughters. I love that they’ll always be able to look back at childhood memories.

10. Where do you look for inspiration? Are there certain places, books, or creative resources that you seek out to feel energized?

My favorite photographers who have inspired me from the beginning include Katelyn James, Emily Lucarz, and Sue Bryce. All of these ladies are incredibly talented—and I love how generously they give away their photography and business knowledge.

11. Any new projects in the works?

I have plans to create an updated version of the magazine for the fall/winter of 2020! It will include recently photographed sessions and new content that will help mamas feel even more excited and prepared for their photo sessions.

How Celebrate Motherhood was made

• Format: Premium Magazine
• Size: 8.5×11 in, 22×28 cm
• Design tool: Blurb plugin for Adobe InDesign

***

Do you have an idea for a book or magazine to promote your photography, creative work, or business? Blurb gives you everything you need to bring your project to life—professional tools, premium formats, and the freedom to design on your own terms. Ready to get started? Create a free account today and start creating your book, your way.

The post Behind the Book with Kristal Bean appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Ally Zlatar is an artist and activist whose work explores the intersections of mental health, art, and inclusion. After struggling to find a traditional publisher willing to publish her work on eating disorders and mental health, she pivoted to self-publishing. 

We caught up with Zlatar to speak about her latest book, the monsters are alive, the role of print media in a digital world, the importance of diverse storytelling, and her experiences as an artist-activist. We are incredibly grateful for her interview for Giving Tuesday, as she shares how self-published art and giving back can be two sides of the same coin.

Thanks for joining us for Giving Tuesday! Your artistic expression is tied closely with your activism. Why is it important to link the two?

For such a long time, art has been seen as an accessory to change-making, and for that reason, it has been highly underutilized. What I aim to do with my work is show how powerful artistic voices are. I strive to highlight the role art can have in challenging our current perspectives and broadening our understanding of current issues both more deeply and authentically.

Your art tackles heavy yet critically important topics—from mental illness to eating disorders. What conversations do you hope your books begin?

My book and art come from a place of profound pain and suffering from my illnesses. For years people saw my eating disorder as an issue of vanity and not as someone trying to cope with trauma. Mental illnesses such as eating disorders are highly stereotyped as a “thin white teen girl” disease. My art and poetry are sharing my lived-in experiences, which include the grim reality that is often not spoken about. The hope is to edify and create inclusive spaces to share the diversity of lived-in experiences of these illnesses to counteract these highly problematic mainstream narratives. 

Sales from your books and gallery exhibitions fund The Starving Artist Scholarship. Tell us about the scholarship and the process of funding it. How has it changed the lives of the recipients?

Sales proceeds from The Starving Artist publications, exhibitions, and donations all are collected into a scholarship fund, and each year there is a themed grant for a specific marginalized group to access eating disorder treatment (i.e., LGBTQA+, Disabled, intersectionality of illnesses) and people can apply directly to the fund through The Starving Artist. 

This grant is extremely rare. Very few funded inpatient programs have spaces (and often, for eating disorders, they only take people in when their BMI is 15% or less due to high demand). It gives people a chance to be proactive rather than reactive and fight their eating disorders with aid to access resources that they would not be able to normally.

Also, I believe that it is important to make recovery individual tailored because we all suffer differently. Both art and creative mental health exploration alongside patient-oriented treatment models are together best to help an individual recover.

What is the most joyful part of your artistic process? And what’s the most difficult?

The most joyful is when I hear my work resonates with people. Building a connection to someone through my art is so powerful to me.

The most difficult is getting my voice heard. There tend to be the same “token” stories and experiences that keep getting repeated, so being able to find spaces to share my voice can be a struggle.

Tell us about the process of designing and printing the monsters are alive. How did you decide on the format, layout, and typography? Which tools did you use?

As someone who is neuro-diverse, I love a clean, simple aesthetic. I live by Century Gothic and soft pastel colours. Throughout all my books, I kept this homogenous style as it is not only easy for me to process, but it makes me happy. Poetry and art books tend to be grandiose, and sometimes to me, that comes off as pretentious. I try to make the design as airy and contemporary as possible to build a connection with the audience. 

Also, such a simple tool, but it makes all the difference to me, is a colour matcher tool. Getting the colour codes of images helps to coordinate backgrounds and font colours with ease and continuity.

What is your personal experience with self-publishing or publishing in general? Why did you go the self-publishing route with Blurb?

I found barriers in traditional publishing routes for publishing work on eating disorders and mental illnesses. If I wasn’t a celebrity or had 100,000 followers, they didn’t care what I had to say. Self-publishing with Blurb was so easy and globally accessible that it gave me hope to produce my own work and create my own platform to share.

Do you have any advice to offer others looking to self-publish for a cause?

Don’t give up! Writing and creating work for a cause takes time. When you are publishing for a cause, always focus on delivering it with the utmost care and compassion to create meaningful work and build a connection to your cause.

What role do you think print plays in a digital world?

Digital media makes us disconnect. We can lose that intimacy that a book can physically bring us. Print media reminds me that there is a genuine story being told, and being able to hold and explore the pages builds such a strong connection to the narratives.

Can you tell us a bit about your background? How did you get started as an artist-activist?

I come from a displaced immigrant family and grew up in Canada. My family never talked about mental health, and when I started to get sick with my eating disorder of over ten years, they didn’t know how to have these conversations. I saw medical practitioners who labeled my diagnoses but didn’t see me suffering from a disease. I didn’t know how to communicate to others the pain I was going through. 

When I started The Starving Artist, it was a way for me to share my art and voice in a way to tackle these difficult conversations and help others to understand what it means to live in an unwell body.

Where can readers go to find and support your work?

Lots of places:

• Instagram
• My art website
• The Starving Artist
• Blurb, of course! 

How the monsters are alive was made

• Format: Paperback (Softcover)
• Size: 5×8 in, 13×20 cm
• Design tool: PDF to Book

***

Blurb gives you everything you need to turn your vision into print—professional tools, premium formats, and the freedom to design on your own terms. Ready to get started? Create a free account today and start creating your book, your way. 

The post Behind the Book with Ally Zlatar: the monsters are alive appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Everyone has a story to tell. Yes, that means you, too! 

Whether you’re a writer, photographer, illustrator, or artist of any kind, making a book can be an exciting challenge and a powerful way to explore themes, share passions, and express yourself. Not sure where to begin? That’s where this list of 50 inspiring book ideas comes in.

These prompts are designed to jumpstart your next project—or even your very first. We’ve included examples from our self-publishing community to show how creatives just like you have taken their ideas off the screen and into beautiful, printed books that live on coffee tables, in galleries, and in homes all over the world.

Ready to unlock your creativity? Dive into this diverse collection of ideas that cover every genre and format, from magazines and photo books to notebooks, classic paperbacks, and more. 

50 book ideas

This list of 50 book ideas will help you get started or unstuck. Below, you’ll find thoughtful prompts to guide your thinking and real projects from fellow creatives who’ve turned their ideas into finished books. Whether you’re writing, photographing, illustrating, or combining it all, these starting points are here to support your next big (or small) project.

Ask yourself questions

Your everyday life is a goldmine of material for your creative work, and moments of personal reflection often lead to surprisingly good book ideas. Let these questions guide you to uncover thoughts and themes worth sharing.

1. What challenges are you facing?

Reflecting on your personal challenges can make for powerful storytelling. Whether it’s something you’re working through in your creative life, career, or relationships, exploring those struggles and how you approach or overcome them can help others feel less alone.

Prompt: Write about a major challenge you’ve faced and what it’s taught you.

Get inspired: The Monsters Are Alive by Ally Zlatar is a profoundly personal exploration of illness and identity, combining illustration and reflection to confront hard truths with honesty and vulnerability.

2. What are you learning right now?

The learning process is full of twists, revelations, and unexpected inspiration. Whether you’re diving into a new discipline or revisiting an old interest, documenting your progress can resonate with others on similar paths.

Prompt: Chronicle the ups and downs of learning a new skill. It could be anything from calligraphy to coding. 

Get inspired: In Unusually Cute, Zoe Sidhom documents her architecture thesis in a playful, design-forward book that reflects both the rigor and joy of creative research.

3. What’s happening in your day-to-day life?

Everyday routines and moments of change can reveal more than you think. Capturing the texture of daily life, especially during a turning point, can make for a heartfelt, relatable project.

Prompt: Document a day, week, or season of life that felt like a shift.

Get inspired: Kristal Bean’s Celebrate Motherhood magazine was inspired by the birth of her daughter, turning her personal experience into a vibrant, visual tribute to early motherhood.

Enjoying this post? Sign up to get lots more inspiration delivered straight to your inbox.

Look around you

Become an explorer of your world and the people in it. Ask curious questions, notice the little details, and follow those trails.

4. Compile your family history

Family stories are rich with character, memory, and emotion. Whether it’s photos, recipes, or handwritten letters, bringing them together in a family photo book or written history can preserve those tales for generations.

Prompt: Gather photos, stories, or artifacts that capture your family’s legacy. You could focus on one person or one particular memory.

Get inspired: Bridget Callahan’s The Not-So-Italian Cookbook celebrates her grandmother’s life through recipes and memories.

5. Explore your hometown history

Every town has a backstory—and you might be one of the few people who can tell it. Dig into your community’s past and uncover the details that don’t make it into tourist brochures. Think local legends, overlooked landmarks, or historical events hiding in plain sight. It can be as expansive or focused as you like and could include deep dives into archival photos, personal reflections, and interviews with long-time residents.

Prompt: Describe a little-known historical event in your hometown.

6. Draw attention to a meaningful cause

If you’ve been part of a nonprofit, movement, or volunteer initiative, you already have a story worth sharing. Document the work you achieved, the people behind it, and the change it’s sparked. Your book can raise awareness, encourage others, and build support for causes that matter.

Prompt: Share a transformative experience you had while volunteering.

Get inspired: Creative Youth Collective is an anthology created by co-founder Kathryn Ian Gentzke, featuring work from teens in her nonprofit writing program. 

7. Talk about special events

Festivals, rallies, performances, and speaker series often shape how we see the world. Capturing one through words, photos, or design can make it live on and bring it to other people who weren’t there. Whether you’re reliving a concert that changed your life or reflecting on a public gathering that shifted your views, those stories matter.

Prompt: Write about a memorable event you attended and its impact on you.

Get inspired: Think of this in the spirit of The Tao of Wu by The RZA, where music, memory, and philosophy intertwine to offer a deeply personal lens on culture.

8. Document travel stories

Your travel experiences, whether across oceans or across town, can become a story of discovery. Pair personal reflections with strong visuals to capture the essence of each place. Think beyond itineraries: focus on how travel made you see differently.

Prompt: Describe a travel experience that changed your perspective.

Get inspired: Everest by William Thompson is a layflat photo book capturing the grandeur and quiet intensity of a journey to the summit.

Become your own storyteller

Every life holds stories worth sharing, and yours is no exception. Tap into your personal journey, lessons learned, and unique adventures to create a compelling book that only you can tell.

9. Write the story behind your favorite topics

Whether it’s a book that changed how you see the world, a film that shaped your creative voice, or an album you return to again and again—your cultural favorites are rich ground for storytelling. Use them as a lens to reflect on your identity, values, or personal history. Your take could offer new context or inspiration to others who love the same things.

Prompt: Write about how a specific book, movie, or album has influenced the way you think or create.

Get inspired: Photographer and motorsports enthusiast Jack Webster does just this in Racing Pilots, blending his passion for racing with personal storytelling and photography.

10. Highlight your biggest success

What does success look like in your life—and what did it take to get there? Share the full story behind your proudest achievement, from the people who helped you to the detours you didn’t expect. These moments can motivate others who are just starting or facing similar challenges.

Prompt: Write a personal success story detailing the steps you took to achieve your goal.

11. Reveal your biggest failure

Failures are rarely the end. In fact, they’re often the turning point. Reflecting honestly on what didn’t work and why can reveal how you adapted and grew. This kind of story helps others see failure as part of the process, not something to avoid.

Prompt: Reflect on a failure and what it taught you.

12. Do something epic, then write about it

A big personal challenge or adventure can become the foundation of a powerful book. Whether you raised funds for a cause, completed a tough hike, or took a leap of faith in your career, documenting it can show both your growth and your grit.

Prompt: Narrate one epic adventure you’ve had and the lessons you learned along the way.

Pick a non-fiction genre to get started

Nonfiction opens the door to endless creative possibilities. Whether you’re eager to share your expertise, explore fascinating ideas, or capture real-life stories, there’s a nonfiction genre ready to showcase your vision. Don’t be afraid to mix and match—combining styles can make your book truly one of a kind.

13. Write a big idea book

If there’s an idea that’s shaped your thinking, or that you believe could change lives, put it in book form. Explore how it plays out across different areas of life, and why it matters now.

Prompt: Explain a big idea you believe could change the world. To get started, try summarizing it in just one page.

Get inspired: Dear Black Women by Jewel Guy is a poetic, purpose-driven book that combines affirmation with advocacy, encouraging readers to live boldly and unapologetically.

14. Create a workbook for your online course 

Transform your digital teachings into a printed resource people can engage with offline. Workbooks are a practical, hands-on way to support your audience through guided exercises and reflections.

Prompt: Start with one exercise that’s worked for you, and build from there.

Get inspired: Melanie Kluger’s The Confidence Closet is a style workbook that brings her personal styling course into readers’ hands.

15. Develop a journal or notebook

Design a journal that serves a specific purpose, like mindfulness or project tracking. You don’t need much written content; instead, focus on structure, flow, and prompts that invite self-discovery.

Prompt: Write out 10 prompts, questions, or reminders that you find motivating. Use those to shape your journal.

Get inspired: 344 Questions by Stefan Bucher is a quirky and creative 6×9-inch softcover book packed with thought-provoking prompts.

16. Make a list book

If you’re a natural curator of ideas, spots, tips, or favorites, turn your lists into something meaningful. Add personal context or storytelling to give each item its own spark.

Prompt: Create a list of your top 10 favorite books or movies and explain why they matter to you.

17. Publish an educational photo book

Pair your photography with clear, informative writing to teach your readers something new. Choose a topic that excites and inspires you, whether that’s nature, science, culture, or history. Photo books don’t just show; they can explain, too.

Prompt: Curate a photo essay with informative captions that teach your reader something new.

18. Create an interview book

Gather conversations with people who inspire you, like artists, activists, community leaders, or everyday storytellers. Organize the interviews around a shared theme or thread to form a compelling narrative.

Prompt: Start by preparing a set of questions for someone who has significantly impacted your life. 

Get inspired: Motive by Danny Owens is a powerful example of a community-focused interview magazine.

Consider content you have already created

Chances are, you’ve got a treasure trove of content waiting to become a book. Whether it’s blog posts, photos, essays, or sketches, repurposing old content is one of the easiest ways to uncover great book ideas hiding in plain sight. Gathering and organizing what you’ve already made can be a powerful shortcut to fresh ideas for your next project. 

19. Print a series of blog posts

If you’ve built up a blog, you already have a strong foundation for a book. Choose a theme, edit for flow, and bring your words together into one polished volume. A printed version adds permanence and gives your audience a new way to engage with your work.

Prompt: Gather 10 of your favorite blog posts and compile them into a thematic collection.

20. Make a book of postcards

Transform a personal or vintage postcard collection into a visual narrative. Each card holds a story of a place, a moment, or a person. Whether it’s nostalgic, humorous, or artistic, this format can become a creative look at travel, history, or relationships.

Prompt: Write one short story, poem, or mini-memoir inspired by each postcard in your collection. You can fill a 20-page mini photo book with just a few!

21. Compile a series of letters

Turn your correspondence into a deeply personal book. Whether between friends, mentors, partners, or even your future self, letters can reveal emotion and insight in a way few other formats can.

Prompt: Gather a collection of letters you’ve written to and received from a close friend or family member. Add some photos and an introduction, and you’re well on your way to a book.

22. Turn your diary or personal journal entries into a book

Personal journals offer an authentic lens into your thoughts, growth, and creativity. Select meaningful entries, add illustrations or photography if desired, and shape them into a narrative others can relate to or learn from.

Prompt: Try selecting a significant journal entry from each week of a particular year and pair it with imagery from your camera roll.

23. Make your own cookbook

Share the flavors of your life through family recipes, plant-based experiments, or your very own signature dish. A great cookbook blends storytelling, photography, and design into one delicious experience.

Prompt: Compile 20 of your favorite recipes and present them with photos or illustrations. 

Get inspired: Cookies by Chef Coy is a joyful, personal take on classic recipes that shows how simple, homemade cooking can become a book.

Look to the non-fiction bestseller categories from Amazon

Take a peek at what’s topping the charts in nonfiction on Amazon for some serious inspiration. Exploring bestseller lists isn’t about rehashing the same old stories but sparking fresh commentary on topics and ideas that readers are already loving.

Biography and memoir book ideas

Transform a lived experience into an inspiring story. From intimate reflections to personal journeys shaped by history, biographies and memoirs invite readers to step into another person’s world and discover a whole new perspective.

24. Try making a new city home

Moving to a new place brings change, challenge, and discovery. Document your journey as you navigate new streets, meet neighbors, and carve out new routines. These personal details give readers a lens into how you adjusted and what you learned.

Prompt: Describe five moments in your experience of moving to a new city and how you adjusted.

25. Share your 25 best or worst date stories

Dating is full of stories, some magical, some awkward, all human. Compile a list of your most unforgettable experiences to create a memoir that’s funny, raw, and real. Structure each story with a takeaway or theme to keep readers hooked.

Prompt: Write about the most memorable date you’ve ever had—it could be good or bad!

26. Write a biography of a family member

A relative’s life story, whether quiet or extraordinary, can reveal so much about heritage, culture, and character. Interview them and their loved ones, gather stories and photos, and piece together a portrait that honors who they are.

Prompt: Start with research on the life story of a family member who inspires you, whether that’s an interview with them or a look through their journals and letters.

Self-help book ideas

We all have valuable insights to share, shaped by our own unique experiences. A self-help book transforms those learnings into guidance that can inspire and support others. Pair personal stories with practical tips to create a book that’s both relatable and transformative.

27. Describe the art of gentle productivity

Teach readers how to meet their goals with less pressure and more grace. Share practical ways to get things done while caring for your mental health. A slow, mindful approach often resonates more with readers than hustle culture.

Prompt: Start by writing out six tips that have been most helpful in shifting your mindset.

28. Explore new rules for dating

IToday’s dating landscape is full of contradictions. Use stories, research, and reflection to explore how romance is evolving—and what we’re all still looking for.

Prompt: Come up with your top 10 suggestions for successful modern dating, then expand upon them.

29. Design an inspirational quote book

Pair affirmations or wisdom with visuals for a book that readers return to often. Use photography, illustration, or clean design to give each quote space to resonate.

Prompt: Compile a handful of inspirational quotes and include your reflections on each one.

Get inspired:A Pocket Full of Queer Affirmations by Sarah Kate Smigiel is a small-format book packed with warmth, art, and inclusive messages.

Religion and spirituality book ideas

Making a book about your beliefs can be a powerful way to explore and understand your own values, as well as encourage others to reflect on theirs.

30. Publish a spiritual workbook

Put your spiritual beliefs into practice with a book that guides readers through journaling prompts, daily rituals, or meditations. Keep it practical and personal.

Prompt: Write out one daily devotional based on your spiritual practices.

31. Write a religious memoir

Chart your spiritual path with honesty. Explore doubts, discoveries, and moments of clarity. The most meaningful memoirs don’t just tell what you believe, they show how those beliefs were shaped over time.

Prompt: Start by carefully describing one key moment in your spiritual journey.

Health, fitness, and nutrition book ideas

Whether you’ve been inspired by your own health journey or want to share your professional expertise, combine step-by-step guides and motivational content to help readers build healthier habits.

32. Inspire someone with your life lessons in food

Food is so much more than fuel. It’s culture, comfort, and connection. Use your relationship with food to explore deeper themes like body image, cultural identity, or healing. Each chapter can mix personal experience with practical takeaways.

Prompt: Write about your journey to discovering a healthy relationship with food.

33. Try an experiment

Choose a habit, routine, or behavior you want to explore. Commit to it for 30, 60, or 90 days and document your experience in real-time. This kind of honest, immersive storytelling helps readers reflect on their own habits.

Prompt: Chronicle a month-long challenge you set for yourself.

34. Compile a research summary of how to exercise

Demystify fitness with a guide based on facts, not fads. Break down evidence-based training methods into something readers can use, whether they’re beginners or looking to refine their routine.

Prompt: Create a guide based on scientific research on the best exercise practices.

Get inspired:The Book Of At-Home Workouts by Matthew Calabria distills expert advice into accessible, at-home plans.

Politics and social science book ideas

Share fresh perspectives, explain complex issues, and spark conversations with a book exploring current events, history, or social policy. Self-publishing a book in this field can be a great way to strengthen your professional brand as a researcher, educator, or advocate. 

35. Examine public policy, ideologies, or politics

Explore a complex political issue with depth and balance. Use case studies, data visuals, and interviews to present multiple viewpoints. Aim to help readers think critically rather than push simple answers.

Prompt: Pick one political issue you care deeply about and write a persuasive essay on it.

36. Forecast political and cultural trends

Play the futurist and analyze emerging social and political patterns. Use data, history, and expert insights to predict what’s next. Include possible scenarios to inspire readers to think about their role in shaping the future.

Prompt: Predict a future trend in politics or culture and support your prediction with evidence.

Cookbook, food, and wine book ideas

For chefs, food bloggers, nutritionists, and more, a self-published cookbook can be a powerful brand-building (and money-making) tool. But they make wonderful personal projects, too, celebrating the food and flavors that bring people together. 

37. Collect recipes from the family restaurant

Share treasured recipes alongside the stories and history that make them special. Add kitchen anecdotes and tips for recreating the magic at home. Celebrate the ties between food, family, and community.

Prompt: Share the history of your family restaurant and write out 10 recipes.

Get inspired: From Average JO to unSOEUNG Hero by Chef Jo Soeung shows how a family’s story flavors her menu.

38. Print a guide to local wineries with photos and reviews

Make wine approachable with a beautifully illustrated local guide. Feature vineyard photos, winemaker interviews, tasting notes, and pairing tips. Add historical context to enrich readers’ experience.

Prompt: Write reviews of your favorite local wineries, including tasting notes.

39. Explain 10 things you learned about cooking

Distill years in the kitchen into your top ten essential cooking lessons. Combine stories, science, and practical advice to help readers cook more confidently and creatively.

Prompt: Start by explaining your number one cooking tip everyone should know.

Business and money book ideas

Whether you’re breaking down investment basics, offering entrepreneurial advice, or exploring workplace leadership, this is your chance to establish your credentials as an expert in your field, while inspiring and educating others. 

40. Tell your story of getting out of debt

Be honest and vulnerable about your financial struggles and recovery. Share mistakes, breakthroughs, and practical tools like budgeting templates and negotiation tips. Inspire others with a story of hope and resilience.

Prompt: Share the steps you took to get out of debt and stay financially healthy.

41. Write about securing investments for a project

Guide aspiring entrepreneurs through finding investors, crafting pitches, and navigating deals. Use real successes and failures to highlight what works and what doesn’t. Emphasize relationship-building alongside numbers.

Prompt: Share your experience securing funding for a major project as an outline of chapter ideas to begin, then flesh out the details to build out your book.

42. Offer tips on how to earn a living from creative work

Combine practical advice and inspiration for artists turning passion into income. Cover portfolio-building, marketing, and diversifying revenue streams. Feature interviews with creatives who’ve made it work.

Prompt: Share your own practical advice on turning creative passions into a profitable career—then reach out to five friends and colleagues to get their take.

43. Show what you learned from the failure of a startup

Analyze your startup’s failure with brutal honesty. Explore warning signs, mistakes, and lessons across areas like product, team, and strategy. Turn challenging experiences into valuable guidance.

Prompt: Reflect on five lessons learned from a failed startup. Start with: “If I knew then what I know now, I would have …”

Education and teaching book ideas

Create a resource that equips readers with the skills to connect, communicate, and educate. 

44. Publish a classroom curriculum you designed

Showcase your innovative teaching methods with lesson plans, projects, and assessment ideas. Include student and teacher testimonials. Inspire educators to rethink classroom possibilities.

Prompt: Share a successful classroom project you designed and explain how to replicate it, step-by-step.

45. Create a visual guide to complex topics 

Break down tough subjects with infographics, illustrations, or photos. Make science, history, or math accessible for visual learners and educators looking for fresh teaching tools.

Prompt: Pick one topic you know well and create five illustrations to explain it.

Get inspired: Oodaalolly Palette of Flavor by Jeremy Burnich mixes visuals and writing to decode chocolate creation.

46. Compile a book of educational games and activities 

Gather hands-on learning activities and games for various ages and subjects. Provide clear instructions, materials lists, and learning goals. Perfect for teachers and parents wanting engaging education.

Prompt: List three educational activities you’ve tried at home with your students, children, family members, or friends. 

Crafts, hobbies, and home book ideas

Inspire readers to learn a new skill or bring more creativity into their lives with a book based on your favorite craft, hobby, or DIY home and garden projects. Include practical how-to guides, tips, and fun project ideas.

47. Develop a guide to meaningful photography

Go beyond technical tips to teach visual storytelling. Cover composition, lighting, and subjects with examples from your work and famous photographers. Include exercises to help readers find their own style.

Prompt: List three exercises that have deepened your photography practice.

48. Make an instructional knitting or sewing guide

Craft a guide that grows with the reader, from basic stitches to complex projects. Include troubleshooting tips, interviews with master crafters, and the stories behind each technique. Don’t just teach skills—foster an appreciation for needlework’s rich history and meditative qualities.

Prompt: Write an instructional guide for absolute beginners in knitting or sewing.

Get inspired: Yarn Over by Delia Randall offers a clear, approachable introduction to knitting with helpful illustrations and thoughtful guidance for newcomers.

49. Create a style guidebook

Help readers express themselves through style. Discuss color psychology, silhouette, and mixing fashion elements. Include before-and-after case studies and budget-friendly DIY tips.

Prompt: Write a few tricks you’ve learned for expressing style and case studies to support them.

Get inspired:Unlock Your Style Voice by Tina Dhillon offers practical steps for standing out.

50. Encourage people to learn a new hobby

Inspire curiosity and confidence by introducing a new hobby with simple steps. Share the joy of creating, the calming benefits, and the growth that comes with practice. Include beginner projects, helpful resources, and stories showing how taking up a hobby can enrich life.

Prompt: Write about a hobby you started recently, what you’ve learned, and how it’s helped you.

Want to dive right in? You’ve got your idea—or maybe even 50 of them. So, why wait? With Blurb, turning your ideas into a beautiful, professional book is easier than ever. Jump straight into designing, publishing, selling, and distributing your work with our easy-to-use tools.

Next steps

So, you’ve landed on one or more good ideas for a book. What comes next?

Creating a book is a journey, and like any journey, having a clear roadmap makes all the difference. The following steps will help you move from that initial spark to a finished project. Remember, every creator’s path is unique, so feel free to tailor these tips to fit your own style and process.

Step 1: Develop your idea

Start with the prompt. If you enjoy the experience, brainstorm and explore your concept further. Think about what excites you, what story you want to tell, or what knowledge you want to share. Don’t be afraid to jot down wild ideas or mix topics—sometimes the best projects come from unexpected places. 

Tips for developing your book ideas

Try different brainstorming techniques to unlock fresh perspectives and possibilities:

• Mind mapping: Begin with a central idea and branch outward, creating a visual web of related themes, topics, or images. Use colors and shapes to connect concepts and spot patterns that might inspire your narrative or visual flow.
• Freewriting or sketching: Set a timer for 15 minutes and write or draw continuously without censoring yourself. Focus on quantity over quality—this uncensored flow often reveals unexpected ideas and sparks creativity.
• Collaborative brainstorming: Bring together fellow creatives or friends and bounce ideas off each other. Techniques like round-robin storytelling or group sketching can help you build on others’ concepts and expand your thinking.
• The “What if?” game: Challenge yourself with a series of “What if?” questions related to your interests or observations. This playful method encourages you to imagine alternative realities, outcomes, or storylines that might fuel your project.
• Reverse brainstorming: Instead of asking how to solve a problem, consider how to create or worsen it. This flipped viewpoint can lead to innovative ideas and unique narrative twists.

Research and inspiration

Even the most imaginative fiction or abstract art benefits from a grounding in research. Delve into the topics that fascinate you—read books, watch documentaries, conduct interviews, or draw on your personal experiences. For visual creators, experiment with new techniques, study the work of artists you admire, and observe the world with fresh eyes. Remember, the strongest stories and images often emerge from real-life inspiration and thorough exploration.

Step 2: Set a creative schedule

Big ideas are exciting, but turning them into books takes commitment. The key? Consistency over intensity. Here’s how to build a creative routine that works for you:

• Start small and stay steady: You don’t need hours each day—just 15 to 30 minutes of focused time can add up fast. The goal is momentum, not perfection.
• Block time like it matters: Add your creative sessions to your calendar and treat them like appointments. Whether it’s writing before breakfast, sketching during lunch, or editing on Sunday nights, make it official.
• Find your rhythm: Try different approaches to see what fits your lifestyle. Some creators thrive with daily routines, others prefer longer weekend sprints.
• Set milestone goals: Break your project into smaller, meaningful targets like finishing a chapter, editing a batch of photos, or wrapping up your research. Celebrate when you hit them!
• Be flexible and kind to yourself: Miss a day (or three)? It happens. Adjust your plan and keep going. Progress isn’t linear, but showing up, even imperfectly, is what gets the book made.

Having a consistent routine not only helps you make progress, but it also allows new ideas for a book to surface naturally over time.

Step 3: Develop your creative style

Your book is more than just words or images—it’s your unique voice shining through. Developing your creative style takes time and exploration. Here’s how to nurture it:

• Surround yourself with inspiration: Dive into books, films, art, or music that resonate with your theme or spark your imagination. Notice what draws you in. Is it a story’s flow, a color scheme, a tone, or a structure? Let these influences guide your design choices without limiting your originality.
• Dig into research: Whether your project is fiction, nonfiction, or visual, thorough research adds depth and authenticity. Read widely, explore new perspectives, interview people, and take notes on everyday details. These layers make your work feel lived-in and real.
• Seek honest feedback: Share your work with trusted friends or fellow creatives. Ask questions like: What stood out? What confused you? What felt strong or missing? Fresh eyes can reveal blind spots and spark new ideas.
• Embrace editing as part of creation: Revising isn’t failure—it’s essential. Rework passages, rethink layouts, and cut what doesn’t serve your core message. Give yourself space to revisit your work with a fresh perspective. Often, that’s where the magic happens.

Developing your style is a journey of refining your voice and vision. Enjoy the process and trust that each step brings you closer to a book that’s truly yours.

Step 4: Push through creative blocks

Creative blocks are a normal part of the creative journey. When you hit a wall, remember: it’s not a stop sign, just a hurdle to overcome. Here’s how to keep moving forward:

• Change your environment: Try a walk outside, work from a different spot, or switch up your routine. New surroundings can shift your mindset.
• Switch tasks: Feeling stuck? Move on to something else. Write a short caption instead of a chapter, edit photos instead of designing pages. Any forward motion helps maintain momentum.
• Take a purposeful break: Step away for a day or two to rest and recharge. Engage in unrelated activities and let your mind wander. Solutions often come when you least expect them.
• Reconnect with your purpose: Remind yourself why you started this project. What story or vision inspired you? Revisiting your why can reignite your passion and focus.
• Celebrate small wins: Don’t wait for big breakthroughs to feel accomplished. Finished a paragraph? Solved a layout challenge? Had a productive 20 minutes? Those victories count and build momentum.

Progress might not always be fast or smooth, but every bit moves you closer to your goal. Keep showing up, and your creative work will meet you there.

Why not try our Just Start Challenge and commit to making a book in just seven days? It’s designed to help you break through hesitation and channel your momentum into a finished project.

Your story starts here

The spark is lit—now it’s time to turn your idea into something tangible. Whether it’s a cookbook, a photo journey, or a collection of poems, your vision deserves to take shape.

You bring the creativity, we’ll bring the tools. From intuitive design features to print-perfect templates, we’ve got everything you need to make your idea a reality.

So why wait? Take that exciting first step toward making a book that’s entirely you. Your story’s already amazing. Let’s make sure the world sees it.

***

Blurb empowers writers, visual creators, artists, designers, and photographers to bring their unique visions to life with stunning, professional-quality books. Whether you’re telling your story, showcasing your portfolio, or diving into new creative project ideas for a book, our tools help you create something truly exceptional. Ready to make your mark? Create a free account and start building your book today.

The post <strong>50 unique book ideas to spark your next creative project</strong> appeared first on Blurb Blog.

As part of our Stories that Bind campaign, we’re celebrating the people behind the books. These are the makers who embraced Blurb early on—or discovered it later in their journey—and found new freedom to create on their own terms.

Here, six creators reflect on why bookmaking matters to them, how Blurb revolutionized the publishing industry, and what they’d share with the next generation of self-publishers.

Why print still matters for creative director Rafid Naeem

For Toronto-based photographer, videographer, and creative director Rafid Naeem, making a book was about more than preserving images—it was about reconnecting with the joy of creating for himself.

“My first Blurb book was a photo collection from our family trip to Turkey in 2021,” Naeem says. “Turkey had always been my mom’s dream destination, and we were able to make that trip happen.”

He went on to print a book from the trip. “It completely transformed the way I approach photography,” he says. “In today’s social media-driven world, it’s easy to get caught up in chasing likes and views…Making my book reminded me why I started in the first place. It allowed me to reconnect with my passion and capture photos for myself again instead of an algorithm.”

In 2024, Naeem published JAPAN, a photo book documenting a long-awaited journey with nine friends. What started as a personal project grew into something larger: JAPAN became the hero book in Blurb’s anthem video, part of Stories that Bind, a campaign celebrating the connective power of self-publishing and 20 years of Blurb empowering creators.

“Creating books used to be complicated and inaccessible, but Blurb has truly revolutionized the self-publishing space,” Naeem says. “It has empowered artists by giving them an easy and accessible way to share their stories through a tangible and physical format.”
For Naeem, self-publishing with Blurb isn’t just about making books—it’s about telling stories and sharing them with others. “Don’t overthink it. Just start. Your book doesn’t have to be perfect to matter. Blurb makes it possible for anyone to bring their vision to life.”

How self-publishing launched photographer Anton Kusters’ career

Belgian photographer Anton Kusters is renowned for his immersive, long-form projects that delve into memory, impermanence, and hidden worlds. Early in his career, he immersed himself in the secretive world of the Yakuza in Tokyo, documenting it through images and personal reflections.

At the time, Kusters was searching for a way to share his work as it unfolded. It was 2010, the tools for self-publishing were still in their infancy, and Blurb was the only company he could find that offered high-quality, print-on-demand books. 

“For my Yakuza photography work, I wanted to move fast [and] show my work as it was ongoing, in book format, literally as I was making it,” he says. “Blurb proved to be quite handy in that respect.”

The resulting publication, 893 Magazine, became a springboard for Kusters’ career. He entered it into Blurb’s Photography Book Now awards, where it won the Editorial category. “It quite literally kickstarted my career.”

Through the awards, Kusters connected with juror Monica Allende, then photo editor for The Sunday Times Magazine. Allende went on to publish the work and has since become a long-time collaborator. “Many moments came together, and the rest is history,” Kusters says.

Kusters’ original magazine paved the way for his acclaimed photo book Odo Yakuza Tokyo, which continues to reach audiences worldwide. And he credits Blurb with helping to change not only his own career, but the landscape of visual storytelling. 

“The self-publishing landscape exploded in popularity after the early 2010s, and it changed the traditional publishing landscape forever,” he shares. “Artists now have complete power to create, publish, and distribute their own books…we became empowered to be our own authors, to not fear jumping into the deep.”

For those considering their first book, his advice is simple: “Just do it…there is so much room for experimentation, to make the book a true art object, to have fun along the way.”

Designer Bob Aufuldish on how Blurb made publishing accessible to all

San Francisco-based graphic designer Bob Aufuldish has spent his career at the intersection of visual storytelling and book design. As a cofounder of Aufuldish & Warinner, he’s worked on countless publications for photographers, artists, and institutions—and his relationship with Blurb began during our earliest years.

Aufuldish was a presenter and judge at one of Blurb’s first Photography Book Now competitions, where he saw firsthand how the platform opened the door to professional-quality publishing for everyone. “What I immediately loved about Blurb was that the entire process became democratized—for non-designers and designers alike,” he says.

As a designer deeply familiar with high-end production processes, he recognized the transformational potential of print-on-demand. “In the classes I teach…I have my students produce their publications. It’s the best way for students (or anybody) to see what they’ve really made, and Blurb makes it easy.”

For Aufuldish, this approach to publishing reflects a broader creative truth. “Your first book probably isn’t going to be as good as you hoped it would be…so as thrilling as it is to finally see your book made real, look at it with a cold eye and make it again. And make it better.”

17 years of bookmaking with photographer Joshua Deaner

For nearly two decades, photographer Joshua Deaner has relied on Blurb to bring his projects into the world, not just on gallery walls, but in book form.

“Blurb is a great tool for laying out and sequencing a body of work,” Deaner says. “I was looking for a way to finish a project. While gallery exhibitions are ideal, they’re not always accessible. Making a book became my own form of exhibition. A book is something tangible and lasting. It gave my project a sense of closure and helped me to begin new work.”

Deaner still remembers the moment he held his first book, i sell fish, in his hands. “It was a great feeling. Holding it made my images feel more real,” he shares. “It gave me a sense of accomplishment and helped me believe in myself and my work.”

Over the years, Deaner has returned to Blurb to bring his work into book form, building a stack of titles that reflect his creative journey. He credits Blurb with opening up possibilities for artists everywhere. “Prior to print-on-demand, only a lucky few could get their projects printed by a book company or afford to fund the whole thing themselves. Blurb changed all that by letting anyone print one copy of their own book.”

His advice for first-time bookmakers is simple: “Start playing around with different book sizes, layouts, and…paper choices…The process itself will teach you a lot, and it’s satisfying to hold something you’ve created in your hands and be able to share it with others.”

Music photographer Flemming Bo Jensen on creativity in print

When Danish photographer Flemming Bo Jensen made his first Blurb book in 2010, he didn’t know it would spark a 15-year journey of creative exploration. From travel photobooks on Peru to limited editions and team gifts, bookmaking has become a natural extension of his work behind the camera.

“Blurb continues to impact both my creative journey and career,” Jensen says. “I’ve encouraged and helped others kickstart big book projects. I have created books [like] special limited edition products, small portfolios to give away, notebooks for myself and others, magazines, and mock-up books that turned into a huge traditional offset print book project for a band. I feel my own creativity and imagination are really the limit with Blurb.”

His advice for first-time bookmakers? “Have fun. Don’t overthink it—there are no rules. make some test books and just really play and explore! And make your books personal. I had to make a big, traditional landscape photobook to realize that while it was nice, it also felt too generic. I wanted something more ‘me,’ more personal.”
“Blurb helped make self-publishing a perfect choice for a lot of photo projects!” says Jensen. “By having so many options of different book and magazine [options] it’s helped lots of people get into physically printing…In a world of far too much photography only existing online, this is an amazing thing!”

For Judith Stenneken, a first book led to a lifelong creative practice

In 2009, Berlin-based visual artist and House of Mbiavanga co-founder Judith Stenneken was encouraged by a teacher to think about her thesis project not just as an exhibition, but as a book. That decision unlocked something in her creative process, and photo books have been part of every project she’s done since.

“Blurb was pretty new back then, and so was the opportunity to make single copies of books without breaking the bank,” Stenneken says. “It was the perfect playground to dip your foot into bookmaking.”

Seeing that first book in print was transformative. “I was proud and happy. There’s a sense of accomplishment when you’re holding a physical object that contains the hard work you put into a project. It’s very different from just seeing your work on a screen.”

The following year, Stenneken’s book Last Call won Blurb’s Photography Book Now competition. That milestone encouraged her to follow her dreams—she moved to New York and earned her MFA in Photography, Video, and Related Media from SVA. Creatively, the process of thinking through a project in book form continues to shape her work. 

“Editing and sequencing can reveal patterns in your imagery you weren’t necessarily aware of,” she shares. “It’s a moment of bliss when that puzzle of images starts to make sense in a way you didn’t anticipate. For me, it’s that dialogue with your work that holds the magic of artmaking. And creating books is the tool that gets me there.”

Stenneken sees Blurb as part of a larger shift that has empowered artists over the last two decades. “When I started with photography, there were a handful of photographers published by large publishing houses with book edition sizes in the thousands. Today, you have thousands of visual artists self-publishing as few as a handful of books,” she states. “It’s a shift towards democratizing artmaking that I deeply appreciate [and] Blurb helped open that door.”

For those just starting, her advice is clear: “Print it! Don’t be satisfied with a PDF version of your book. That’s not a book…creating physical copies of your drafts will help you come up with ideas you otherwise would not have been able to anticipate.”

Print unlocked new ways for photographer Christelle Enquist to share her vision

Spanish-Swedish photographer Christelle Enquist didn’t set out to build an exhibition or lead a creative community when she made her first Blurb book. In 2020, after four years of taking photography seriously, she was seeking a way to share her work more intentionally.

“I didn’t want it just living on hard drives or Instagram—I wanted something physical,” Enquist says. That first project, a zine called East to West, was based on a simple idea. “Most of the places I had photographed fell along a rough east-to-west line, [this] gave me a structure to pull the work together.”

What started as a small personal project grew into something much larger. Over the next four years, East to West evolved into a collaborative body of work with her husband, Jorge Delgado-Ureña, culminating in a retrospective exhibition of 107 photographs in Menorca, Spain. They even created a second version of the zine, also with Blurb, as the exhibition catalogue.

“All of a sudden, this whole world of print, zines, and bookmaking opened up to me,” Enquist says. “After spending so much time behind a screen, seeing it in print made everything feel real and complete…It’s like holding your creativity in your hands.”

As co-founder of The Raw Society—a global community dedicated to fostering creativity and connection in street, travel, and documentary photography—Enquist now helps others discover that same sense of creative agency through photography and bookmaking. And they just happen to use Blurb in their workshops.

“Blurb democratized publishing,” she says. “It gave independent creators the tools to share their work without needing a traditional publisher. That freedom has opened doors for so many voices, especially in photography, design, and art, that might not have been heard otherwise.”

Her advice to aspiring bookmakers is simple: “Just do it. Your first zine or book probably won’t be great (mine definitely wasn’t), but that’s not the point. It’s all part of the process.”

***

Blurb is a self-publishing platform that empowers creators to design, print, and share their own professional-quality books and magazines. Whether you’re making your first photo book or producing a portfolio to showcase your work, Blurb gives you the tools to bring your vision to life—one copy at a time or at scale. Ready to make your own? Get started with Blurb.

The post Behind the Books: The creators behind Stories that Bind appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Researchers believe that as far back as 300,000 years ago, our ancestors could speak as we do now—and told stories. Studies show that even today, our brains are wired for storytelling, not logic. Which makes sense. Stories bind us and help us make sense of the world.

My storytelling began with a pencil and my mother’s grocery list notebook. I appropriated it and began drafting fictional short stories, mostly based on Chuck Norris movies. Good guys, bad guys, car chases, and lots of martial arts. I remember my fingers hurting after long sessions of squeezing my pencil, just knowing that someone else might love my little narrative. I eventually went to college to study photojournalism, telling stories with a camera, and I continue to do much of the same today. And yes, I stopped stealing my mother’s notebooks and got my own.

Blurb is about to celebrate twenty years, and I am about to celebrate my fifteenth year at the company. One of the main reasons I wanted to work with Blurb was the origin story. Photographer Eileen Gittins founded Blurb when she needed a beautiful, coffee-table-style book, but in limited quantities, and at the time, there was no solution available. So, she created one. The impact was revolutionary. Finally, photographers could produce books of our work with free software, numerous material options, and a bookstore to sell and distribute.

How I found my way to Blurb

When I first heard about Blurb, I did what I always did when discovering a new print company. I made a test book. Then I made another and another.

Weeks later, my phone rang, and it was the Eileen Gittins. “Your books look weird,” she said. “Who are you, why are you using us, and what do you want in the future?” 

No other print company had ever reached out, and no other company asked what I wanted. At the end of the call, Eileen suggested I join Blurb’s advisory board, and 15 years later, I’m still lurking around company headquarters.

I still feel I have the best job in the world. During my time with Blurb I’ve given hundreds of talks to bookmakers and storytellers all over the world. I’ve attended photo and art festivals, and I even ventured out on a cruise ship to teach a group of bloggers how to best utilize print in their online worlds. I’ve been to Australia three times, Europe a dozen times, and I’ve done multi-city tours across Canada and the United States. I’ve even traveled to Asia, Africa, and Latin America to teach Blurb workshops. But there are a few memories that stand out.

The stories that stayed with me

I was in Paris during the 2015 terror attacks. What had been a night of photographic and printing celebration became a shelter-in-place moment. The following morning, I visited the attack sites with a fellow photographer. The crowd was defiant yet fearful of more attacks. I raised my Fuji and framed broken glass, bullet holes, and blood beneath my feet. That night and the following days etched the idea of perspective into my mind. Books are important, but life trumps all. 

On a lighter note, in 2014, Blurb was named the Corporate Award recipient by the George Eastman House at their Light and Motion Gala. I was invited to cover the event. The best part was that Blurb was presented with the award onstage by American screenwriter, film producer, editor, director, and cinematographer Steven Soderbergh. I was and am a huge Soderbergh fan, so I worked all angles to try to capture him without being too annoying.

While in Brooklyn waiting to attend a Blurb meeting, I “accidentally” met one of my all-time heroes, photographer Gilles Peress. I was sitting in a café writing with my Leica on the table when a man walked by and said, “Nice camera.” I looked up to see Gilles staring back at me. 

He invited me to his studio, where I viewed his ongoing projects, and then we finished with lunch on his patio. Seeing his work during my photo school education changed my life. Meeting him was one of the highlights of my entire career. 

The final moment I’ll mention is visiting National Geographic. Like many photographers, I was hugely influenced by the yellow magazine, so getting a chance to visit the headquarters was as thrilling and intimidating as you might imagine. 

During the visit, I walked by the office of photographer Jodi Cobb, someone I knew from the “On Assignment” page at the back of each issue. There she was, editing a pile of transparencies. When she noticed me lurking in the doorway, she invited me in. 

When I told her why I was there, she said, “Hey, do you want to go to Tipper Gore’s house to talk about Blurb and making books?” A few hours later, I was talking with Tipper. 

I’ve always felt the camera is a passport of sorts, putting you in places you might not otherwise be. I feel the same about Blurb. Books are a passport, too.

The next 20 years of story

So, why am I still here after fifteen years? Maybe I could have convinced Soderbergh to cast me, and my life would be private jets and after parties. Or maybe I could have stayed in Australia and become a Bondi Beach lifeguard. 

I stayed at Blurb because I love it, and I stayed because print matters. 

The modern world is a world of noise, but books serve as a silent reminder of what truly matters. Books last. Books force you to provide critical thought, and books are confrontational because they force you to put your mobile phone down. Books demand the currency of the modern world: undivided attention.

The future excites me. Not just for Blurb, or for myself, but for us, humanity. 

We’ve been telling stories since our species emerged, and I see no signs of this slowing down anytime soon. Our tools and options are improving, and we have more avenues to share than ever before. The power of the individual storyteller can and does shape and change the world. All of us have something to say. You, me, us, them. 

So, if you haven’t put your story in print, now is the time to try.

***

Dan Milnor has spent years turning stories into beautiful books and helping creatives like you do the same. With Blurb, you have everything you need to bring your story to life: design, print, and share it with the world, all on your terms. Start today.

The post Dan Milnor on why stories still matter (20 years later) appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Print-on-demand (POD) was one of those. The technology that lets you print a single, bookstore-quality book on demand didn’t suddenly emerge; it matured in small increments—digital presses gained resolution, software streamlined pre-press, and logistics networks learned to ship anything anywhere.

In 2006, Blurb stepped into that convergence and asked a simple question: What if anyone could publish a professional-quality book with on-demand printing, rather than begging a publisher for a deal?

Founder Eileen Gittins had tried (and failed) to self-publish her coffee table photography book affordably. Her frustration became a business plan, first sketched on a coffee shop napkin and later codified into Blurb, the company that allowed creators to design, proof, and order a single copy from their laptop. The timing was perfect: internet speeds could handle large file uploads, printers had become precise enough to produce professional-quality books, and online shopping had made click-buy-ship second nature.

“Why,” Gittins insisted in early interviews, “should anyone have to take out a second mortgage and hire a small army just to publish a few copies of their own book?”

The question resonated. It still does.

The right tech at precisely the right moment

Print-on-demand didn’t appear overnight; it evolved over time. By the late 1990s, commercial digital presses (like HP Indigo) had finally reached the sweet spot where a single copy could rival offset color without significantly increasing the cost. Behind the scenes, standardized ICC color profiles and new RIP software, which converts a page layout into the tiny dots a press can read, kept those prints predictable from run to run. At the same time, e-commerce made one-click ordering standard, and mail carriers could track a single book as easily as a pallet.

What still blocked most creators wasn’t the printing process—it was getting to print. Complicated page-layout tools used words like bleeds and traps, and missing one checkbox could derail an entire job. And costs were beyond prohibitive. BookSmart, released by Blurb in 2006, closed that gap. It wrapped professional controls—live spine width, CMYK soft proofs, and templates—inside a drag-and-drop interface and added a checkout button with accurate and affordable pricing for one or one hundred books. 

Creators loved the tool and the Blurb Bookstore, which allowed them to sell books directly to their audience without relying on traditional gatekeepers. Design studios mailed lookbook proofs for client review, illustrators built and shared their portfolio overnight, and bloggers stitched a year of posts into sellable books. A few years later, BookSmart evolved into Blurb BookWright, alongside plugins for Lightroom and InDesign. We also added ISBN support and global distribution—all while maintaining a minimum order of one.

Over the past two decades, Blurb creators have produced over 11 million projects, which have been sent to 140 countries, totaling more than a billion printed pages. Nearly 43 percent of makers come back for another project—proof that once you hold your work in print, new ideas arrive fast.

Print-on-demand never exploded; it quietly crossed a threshold. Hardware, color science, logistics, and software matured together. Blurb stepped in precisely when those lines met, translating professional print craft into everyday creative freedom—and the center of gravity in publishing tilted, permanently, toward the creator.

Before and after print-on-demand: how the walls came down

For most of the twentieth century, publishing followed a rigid script. You raised thousands of dollars for an offset run, gambled on boxes of inventory that might never sell, and often surrendered creative choices—title, trim size, cover art—to suit a publisher’s market formula. The model served blockbusters and textbooks but left personal, experimental, and niche projects on the cutting-room floor.

Print-on-demand rewrote that script. With Blurb’s one-copy minimum, a 30-page family cookbook can exist beside a 500-copy art monograph. A skate-culture zine printed in San Diego can reach readers in Reykjavík the same week. No pallets, no warehouses, no design compromises. A designer can tweak a spread on Tuesday and hold a perfect-bound proof by Friday, confident that a customer in Tokyo will receive the identical book.

As Toronto creative director Rafid Naeem puts it, “Creating books used to be complicated and inaccessible. Blurb has truly revolutionized self-publishing by giving artists an easy way to share their stories in a tangible format.”

The shift from up-front risk to on-demand freedom didn’t just lower the bar—it removed it. Today, the next idea can be as big or as small as its creator wants, and it can go to press the moment it is ready.

The road ahead

Print-on-demand already gives anyone the power to print one copy at a time. Next is making that single copy even better with more product offerings, smarter tools, and a lower carbon footprint.

• Fancier finishes, one copy at a time: Digital presses keep leveling up. Today’s technology can handle thicker papers and feed sheets straight into foil, spot UV, and other specialty embellishment units. What once required a 500-copy offset run for a foil title will soon be possible on a single art book without breaking the bank.
• Smarter, more connected workflows: Book-building apps already flag low-res images, but the next wave of tools will balance white space, edit layouts, and check color contrast for accessibility. Press and bindery integration is also advancing, and we see a future where blank paper goes in and a fully bound, finished book comes out, with fewer steps but the same high craftsmanship and even greater control for creators.
• Scalable customization: On-demand printing is getting smarter about personalization. Soon, a family historian could print a unique dedication for every cousin, or an artist could number and sign a 40-copy limited run—no extra setup, no press stops.
• Sustainability by default: Print-on-demand already eliminates overstock waste by printing only what’s needed, so unsold inventory never enters the equation. The next sustainability gains will come from printing even closer to readers, switching to certified papers (like FSC, SFI, or PEFC), adopting water-based inks, and leveraging the transportation sector’s shift to electric vehicles.

Taken together, these trends keep the minimum order at one while raising the ceiling on what a single copy can be: fancier, smarter, lighter on the planet, and tailored to exactly the audience you have in mind.

A new era for storytelling

Print-on-demand hasn’t just changed how we make books. It has changed who gets to make them and, even more importantly, what stories get told. Gutenberg gave text to the masses, and POD hands complete control to individual creators. Over the past two decades, millions of people have turned ideas into millions upon millions of tangible print projects with Blurb.

Why does print still matter? Because paper slows us down in the best possible way. Sequence is fixed, images breathe, pages invite touch. And because each copy is produced only when someone wants it, that sensory pause comes without overstock or waste, just the right number of books finding the right hands.

As pro photographer Christelle Enquist notes, “Blurb democratized publishing. It gave independent creators the tools to share their work without needing a traditional publisher. That freedom has opened doors for so many voices.” 

The next voice could be yours.

***

Blurb is a self-publishing platform that lets creators design, print, and sell professional-quality books and magazines, one copy at a time or at scale. Stories that Bind is our ongoing campaign celebrating two decades of creator-led publishing and the people who’ve turned ideas into print. Ready to add your story to the shelf? Create a free account and start your book today.

The post How print‑on‑demand technology revolutionized self‑expression appeared first on Blurb Blog.

To enter:

1. Post an Instagram Story with your answer to: How has self-publishing (or Blurb) shaped your creative journey?
2. Tag @BlurbBooks and use #StoriesThatBind and #Contest.
3. Like our Instagram post or Story and follow @BlurbBooks.
4. Bonus: Share a photo of you and your book for extra points.

Our judging panel will select three winners based on story impact, clarity, and presentation. They’ll award Blurb one-time-use Blurb promo codes for a $250 grand prize, $100 second-place prize, and $50 third-place prize.

The contest runs from September 3 through September 17, 2025. Winners will be DMed on September 19, 2025. U.S. only.

*Make sure your profile is public so that we can see your entry! Tags and hashtags must be included in the text caption of the Story to be valid.

**If you’re unable to enter via Instagram Story, email socialmedia@blurb.com with your answer and Instagram handle for alternative entry during the contest period.

***

OFFICIAL RULES (“Official Rules”)

NO PURCHASE NECESSARY TO ENTER, WIN OR CLAIM PRIZES. A PURCHASE OR PAYMENT WILL NOT INCREASE AN ENTRANT’S CHANCES OF WINNING. THE PROMOTION IS IN NO WAY SPONSORED, ENDORSED, ADMINISTERED BY, OR ASSOCIATED WITH INSTAGRAM.

THESE OFFICIAL RULES CONTAIN AN ARBITRATION AGREEMENT, WHICH REQUIRES THAT ALL DISPUTES BE RESOLVED SOLELY BY BINDING ARBITRATION, AND ENTRANTS AGREE TO ONLY PURSUE CLAIMS AGAINST SPONSOR AND SPONSOR ENTITIES AND/OR SEEK RELIEF ON AN INDIVIDUAL BASIS, AND ENTRANTS WAIVE THE ABILITY TO BRING CLAIMS IN A CLASS ACTION FORMAT, OR AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR REPRESENTATIVE ACTION OR PROCEEDING.

VOID WHERE PROHIBITED OR RESTRICTED BY LAW.

Blurb’s Stories that Bind Contest (“Promotion”) is sponsored by RPI Print, Inc., (“Sponsor”), 3325 S. 116th Street, Suite 161, Tukwila, Washington 98168.

1. PROMOTION PERIOD: The Promotion begins September 3, 2025, at 12:01 AM Pacific Standard Time (“PST”) and ends on September 17, 2025 at 11:59 PM PST (“Promotion Period”). The Sponsor’s computer is the Promotion’s official clock. The Promotion is structured as a contest with three (3) Promotion winners who will be selected by a judging panel at the end of the Promotion Period.

2. ELIGIBILITY: This Promotion is offered only to individuals who are at least eighteen (18) years old at the time of entry and are legal residents of the fifty United States or the District of Columbia, excluding Rhode Island. Employees of Sponsor, and any of its owners, parent companies, affiliates, directors, subsidiaries, franchisees, representatives, advertising, promotion and production agencies, agents (collectively, the “Promotion Entities”) and their immediate family members (i.e., spouse, parent, child, sibling, and the “steps” of each) and persons living in the same household of each (whether related or not) are not eligible to participate in the Promotion. Void where prohibited or restricted by law. All federal, state and local laws apply. Participation constitutes entrant’s full and unconditional agreement to these Official Rules and Sponsor’s decisions, which are final and binding in all matters related to the Promotion. Winning a prize is contingent upon fulfilling all requirements set forth herein. Entrants and/or potential winners may be required to provide proof of identification and eligibility as required by Sponsor. If it is discovered or suspected that an entrant has registered or attempted to register for the Promotion using multiple identities, all of that entrant’s entries will be declared null and void and any prize such entrant might have been entitled to win will not be awarded to and may be revoked from such entrant. Use of any automated system or any like methods to participate in the Promotion is prohibited and will result in disqualification of any entrant attempting such use.

3. HOW TO ENTER: Sponsor will publish one (1) post and one (1) Story on the @BlurbBooks Instagram account (Instagram.com/blurbbooks), with directions on how to enter the Promotion (a “Promotion Post”). To participate, entrants must complete ALL the following steps during the Promotion Period: 

(i) Follow @BlurbBooks on Instagram;

(ii) Like the Promotion Post on the @BlurbBooks Instagram account;

(iii) Post an Instagram Story;

(iv) Include an original caption on their entry Story (each, an “Entry” collectively, “Entries”) that:

    a. Includes both hashtags #StoriesThatBind and #Contest

    b. Tags @BlurbBooks

    c. Includes their answer to: How has self-publishing (or Blurb) shaped your creative journey?

(v) Bonus: Share a photo of you and your book.

The Entry must meet the following “Entry Guidelines”: (i) the Entry must not include text or subject matter that is deemed by the Sponsor to be obscene, profane, pornographic, libelous or otherwise objectionable; (ii) the Entry must not disparage Sponsor or any other person or entity; (iii) the Entry must not contain material that is political; (iv) the Entry must not contain material that promotes bigotry, racism, hatred or harm against any group or individual or promotes discrimination based on race, gender, religion, nationality, disability, sexual orientation, or age; and (v) the Entry must not contain material that is unlawful, in violation of, or contrary to the laws or regulations in any state. (vi) Each entrant’s social media account must be public to participate in the Promotion.

IMPORTANT: Your Entries must include both hashtags #StoriesThatBind and #Contest in your comment or reply to be eligible. Entries must tag @BlurbBooks. Entries that do not include both hashtags and the tag will be disqualified and ineligible to receive a prize.

Limit: one (1) Entry per person per Promotion Post during the Promotion Period. If it is discovered or suspected, in Sponsor’s sole discretion, that an entrant receives or attempts to receive more than the stated number of Entries, all of that entrant’s Entries, in Sponsor’s sole discretion, may be declared null and void and any prize(s) he/she might have been entitled to will not be awarded to and may be revoked from him/her. In the event of a dispute as to the identity of an entrant, the Entry will be declared made by the primary account holder of the account associated with the email address designated in the social media account used to enter the Promotion. The “primary account holder” is the natural person assigned an email address by an Internet access provider, online service provider or other organization responsible for assigning email addresses for the domain associated with the applicable email address. The potential winner may be required to show proof of being the holder of the email address designated in the social media account used to enter the Promotion.

Sponsor’s Use of Entries: By posting, commenting, sharing, or uploading an Entry entrant consents to and hereby grants to Sponsor a royalty-free, irrevocable, perpetual, non-exclusive license to use, reproduce, modify, publish, create derivative works from, and display the Entry on a worldwide basis, and to incorporate it into other works, in any form, media or technology now known or later developed, including for promotional or marketing purposes. If requested, entrant will sign any documentation that may be required for Sponsor or its designees to make use of the non-exclusive rights entrant is granting to use the Entry. Sponsor reserves the right to remove (and to require that entrant remove) and to disqualify Entries that violate the guidelines outlined above, violate these Official Rules, or for which a DMCA notice or other infringement claim is received.

4. PRIZE: Three (3) winners will be selected by a judging panel to receive one (1) unique code each of $250 (grand prize), $100 (second-place prize), or $50 (third-place prize) to redeem towards their next Blurb book. The total ARV of all available prizes in the Promotion is $400.00. Prize codes must be redeemed in a single purchase within 6 months of issuance. The gift card value must be used in its entirety in one transaction and cannot be split across multiple purchases. Any unused portion of the gift card value in the transaction will be forfeited. Gift card codes cannot be combined with other promotional codes, offers, or gift cards. If the purchase total exceeds the gift card value, the winner is responsible for paying the difference.

There is no substitution for any Prize, except Sponsor who reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to substitute a prize or portion of prize of comparable value. Prizes are not transferable or redeemable for cash, except in the sole discretion of Sponsor. All Prize details are at Sponsor’s sole discretion. Incidental expenses and all other costs and expenses which are not specifically listed as part of a Prize in these Official Rules, and which may be associated with the award, acceptance, receipt, and use of all, or any portion of the awarded Prize are solely the responsibility of the Prize winner. All federal, state, and local taxes associated with the receipt or use of the Prize are solely the responsibility of the Prize winning entrant. In no event will more prizes than are stated in these Official Rules be awarded. Odds of winning depend on the number of eligible Entries received during the Promotion Period.

5. SELECTION AND NOTIFICATION: Assuming a sufficient number of eligible Submissions are received, at the end of the Promotion Period, a judge or group of judges selected by Sponsor in its sole discretion (in either case, the “Judging Panel”) will judge the entries received throughout the Promotion Period. For avoidance of doubt, the Judging Panel will only review and evaluate the entrant’s submitted entry, except as noted in the Judging Criteria (defined below). Decisions of the Judging Panel are final and not subject to appeal. 

Judging Criteria: The Judging Panel will select three (3) winners based on the following criteria: (i) Story Impact (33%); (ii) Clarity (33%); and (iii) Presentation (33%) (the “Judging Criteria”). Entries with a photo will gain an additional 10 points. In the event of a tie between two or more entries, the tie will be broken in favor of the tied entrant whose Submission received the highest score for Story Impact in the initial scoring by the Judging Panel.

Potential winners will be notified via Instagram Direct Message (“DM“) from the @BlurbBooks Instagram account within five (5) business days following the judging. Potential winners must respond to the Instagram DM notification within 48 hours.

Before being declared a winner the potential winner may be required to execute an Affidavit of Eligibility, Liability Release, tax acknowledgment, and, except where prohibited, a Publicity Release (“Affidavit”). If requested by Sponsor, the potential Prize winner must return a fully executed Affidavit to the Sponsor or its authorized designee within seven (7) calendar days from the date it is sent to the potential winner or the Prize may (in Sponsor’s sole discretion) be forfeited. If a potential winner is disqualified, found to be ineligible or not in compliance with these Official Rules, declines to accept a prize, or in the event that the potential winner fails to return an executed Affidavit within the seven (7) calendar day deadline (if applicable), the Prize may be forfeited. If the Prize is forfeited, the Prize may be awarded to an alternate winner, who will be randomly selected from the eligible remaining Entries. Sponsor shall not be held responsible for any delays in awarding a prize for any reason. If, after three (3) good faith attempts to award the Prize to potential winners, Sponsor is unable to award the Prize, the prize may not be awarded.

ALL FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL TAXES IMPOSED ON THE ACCEPTANCE OF A PRIZE ARE SOLELY THE RESPONSIBILITY OF WINNER.

Sponsor will attempt to notify the potential winner as set forth above, but Sponsor is not responsible for any undelivered messages or other communications, including without limitation messages or other communications that are not received because of a winner’s privacy or spam filter settings which may divert any Promotion messages or other communications, including any winner notification message or other communication. Prizes that are unclaimed, unredeemed, or returned as undeliverable will not be awarded. All other costs and expenses not expressly set forth herein shall be solely the winner’s responsibility. Promotion Entities shall not be held responsible for any delays in awarding the Prize for any reason. The Prize will only be awarded to a verified winner.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: By participating in this Promotion entrants (and if 18+ but a minor in their state of residence, their parents or legal guardians) agree that the Promotion Entities, and their respective affiliates, parents, subsidiaries, representatives, consultants, contractors, legal counsel, advertising, public relations, promotional, fulfillment and marketing agencies, website providers, Web masters and their respective officers, directors, employees, representatives, shareholders, designees and agents (“Released Parties”) are not responsible for lost, late, incomplete, stolen, misdirected, postage due, or undeliverable notifications or mail; or for any computer, telephone, satellite, cable, network, electronic or Internet hardware or software malfunctions, failures, connections or availability; or garbled, corrupt or jumbled transmissions, service provider/Internet/website/use net accessibility, availability or traffic congestion; or any technical, mechanical, printing, or typographical or other error; or unauthorized human intervention; or the loss, access, or acquisition without authorization, or incorrect or inaccurate capture of registration information; or the failure to capture, or loss or disclosure of, any such information. The Released Parties are not responsible for any incorrect or inaccurate information, whether caused by any website users, tampering, hacking or by any of the equipment or programming associated with or utilized in the Promotion and assume no responsibility for any error, omission, interruption, deletion, defect, delay in operation or transmission, communications line failure, technical error, theft or destruction or unauthorized access or acquisition of the website, any Promotion-related website(s), or entrant information. The Released Parties are not responsible for any injury or damage, whether personal or property, to participants or to any person’s computer related to or resulting from participating in the Promotion and/or accepting or using a prize. The Released Parties shall not be responsible or liable for entries that are entered by any automated computer, program, mechanism or device, for any entries in excess of the stated limit or for entries that are late, forged, lost, misplaced, misdirected, tampered with, incomplete, deleted, damaged, garbled or otherwise not in compliance with the Official Rules, and all such entries may, in Sponsor’s sole discretion, be disqualified. If, for any reason, the Promotion is not capable of running as planned, Sponsor reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to cancel, terminate, modify or suspend the Promotion and/or proceed with the Promotion, including the selection of winner in a manner it deems fair and reasonable including the selection of the winner from among eligible Entries received prior to such cancellation, termination, modification or suspension. In no event will more prizes be awarded than are stated in these Official Rules. If for any reason, including but not limited to an administrative, printing, production, computer or other error or due to technical difficulties or incorrect announcements of any kind, more winning messages are distributed, or more prizes are claimed than are intended to be awarded according to these Official Rules, the intended prizes will be awarded among all verified prize claims received based on the judging criteria stated in these Official Rules. This Promotion is subject to all federal, state, and local laws and regulations.

By entering the Promotion, each entrant (and if a minor, his/her parent or legal guardian) agrees: (i) to be bound by these Official Rules and by all applicable laws and by the decisions of Sponsor, which shall be binding and final; (ii) to waive any rights to claim ambiguity with respect to these Official Rules; (iii) to waive all of his or her rights to bring any claim, action or proceeding against any of the Released Parties in connection with the Promotion; and (iv) to forever and irrevocably agree to release and hold harmless each of the Released Parties from any and all claims, lawsuits, judgments, causes of action, proceedings, demands, fines, penalties, liability, costs and expenses (including, without limitation, reasonable outside attorneys’ fees) that may arise in connection with: (a) the Promotion, including but not limited to any Promotion-related activity or element thereof, and the entrant’s Entry, including any information provided, participation or inability to participate in the Promotion, (b) the violation of any third-party privacy, data security, personal, publicity or proprietary rights, (c) typographical or printing errors in these Official Rules or any Promotion materials, (d) acceptance, attendance at, receipt, travel related to, participation in, delivery of, possession, defects in, use, non-use, misuse, inability to use, loss, damage, destruction, negligence or willful misconduct in connection with the use of a prize (or any component thereof), (e) any change in the prizing due to unavailability or due to reasons beyond Sponsor’s control, including but not limited to by reason of any acts of God, any action(s), regulation(s), order(s) or request(s) by any governmental or quasi-governmental entity (whether or not such action(s), regulation(s), order(s) or request(s) prove(s) to be invalid), equipment failure, threatened or actual terrorist acts, earthquake, war, fire, flood, explosion, unusually severe weather, hurricane, embargo, labor dispute or strike (whether legal or illegal), labor or material shortage, transportation interruption of any kind, work slow-down, civil disturbance, insurrection, riot or any other cause beyond any of the Released Parties’ control, or as otherwise permitted in these Official Rules, (f) any interruptions in or postponement, cancellation or modification of the Promotion, (g) human error, (h) incorrect, unauthorized, or inaccurate transcription, receipt or transmission of any part of any Entry , (i) any technical malfunctions or unavailability of the website or any telephone network, computer system, computer online system, mobile device, computer timing and/or dating mechanism, computer equipment, software, or Internet service provider, or mail service utilized by any of the Released Parties or by an entrant, (j) interruption or inability to access the Promotion, the website or any other Promotion-related websites or any online service via the Internet due to hardware or software compatibility problems, (k) any damage to entrant’s (or any third person’s) equipment used to access the Promotion and/or its contents related to or resulting from any part of the Promotion, (l) any lost/delayed data transmissions, omissions, interruptions, defects, and/or any other errors or malfunctions, (m) any late, lost, stolen, mutilated, misdirected, delayed, garbled, corrupted, destroyed, incomplete, undeliverable or damaged Entries, (n) any wrongful, negligent, or unauthorized act or omission on the part of any of the Released Parties, (o) lost, late, stolen, misdirected, damaged or destroyed prizing (or any element thereof), or (p) the negligence or willful misconduct by entrant.

Without limiting the foregoing, everything regarding this Promotion, including the website and prize components, are provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or non-infringement. Some jurisdictions may not allow the limitations or exclusions of liability for incidental or consequential damages or exclusions of implied warranties, so some of the above limitations or exclusions may not apply. Check local laws for any restrictions or limitations regarding these limitations or exclusions.

7. DISPUTES AND ARBITRATION; CLASS ACTION WAIVER: This Promotion is governed by, and will be construed in accordance with, the laws of the state of Washington without regard to any choice of law or conflicts of law rules, and the forum and venue for any dispute shall be in Seattle, Washington.

IF THE CONTROVERSY OR CLAIM IS NOT OTHERWISE RESOLVED THROUGH DIRECT DISCUSSIONS OR MEDIATION, IT SHALL THEN BE RESOLVED BY FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION ADMINISTERED BY THE AMERICAN ARBITRATION ASSOCIATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS ARBITRATION RULES AND PROCEDURES OR SUBSEQUENT VERSIONS THEREOF (“AAA RULES”). THE REMEDY FOR ANY CLAIM SHALL BE LIMITED TO ACTUAL DAMAGES, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL ANY PARTY BE ENTITLED TO RECOVER PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR HAVE DAMAGES MULTIPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCREASED, INCLUDING ATTORNEYS’ FEES OR OTHER SUCH RELATED COSTS OF BRINGING A CLAIM, OR TO RESCIND THIS AGREEMENT OR SEEK INJUNCTIVE OR ANY OTHER EQUITABLE RELIEF.

ENTRANTS AGREE THAT THE RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF ANY ENTRANT AND/OR PROMOTION ENTITIES AND/OR ANY OTHER PARTY SHALL BE RESOLVED INDIVIDUALLY, WITHOUT RESORT TO ANY FORM OF CLASS ACTION, AND ENTRANTS WAIVE THE ABILITY TO BRING CLAIMS IN A CLASS ACTION FORMAT, OR AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR REPRESENTATIVE ACTION OR PROCEEDING.

ANY DEMAND FOR ARBITRATION MUST BE FILED WITHIN ONE (1) YEAR FROM THE END OF THE PROMOTION PERIOD, OR THE CAUSE OF ACTION SHALL BE FOREVER BARRED.

8. PRIVACY POLICY: Any information collected during an entrant’s participation in the Promotion will be collected by Sponsor or designee and used by Sponsor, affiliates, designees, agents and marketers for purposes of the proper administration and fulfillment of the Promotion as described in these Official Rules and in accordance with Sponsor’s Privacy Policy as stated at https://www.blurb.com/privacy.

9. PUBLICITY RIGHTS: By participating in the Promotion and/or accepting a prize, each entrant (and if a minor, his/her parent or legal guardian’s) grants Sponsor and Sponsor’s designee the perpetual right to use his or her name, social media user name (handle), biographical information, photos and/or likeness, and statements for promotion, trade, commercial, advertising and publicity purposes on a worldwide basis, at any time or times, in all media now known or hereafter discovered including without limitation live television, social media, and on the World Wide Web and Internet, without notice, review or approval and without additional compensation, except where prohibited by law.

10. GENERAL: Any attempted form of participation in this Promotion other than as described herein is void. If it is discovered or suspected in Sponsor’s sole and absolute discretion that an entrant has registered or attempted to register more than once using multiple email addresses, accounts, multiple identities, proxy servers or like methods, all of that entrant’s entries will be declared null and void, and that Entrant will be ineligible to win a prize. Also, if it is discovered that any entrant attempts to receive additional entries in excess of the stated limitation, that entrant may, in Sponsor’s sole discretion, be disqualified from the Promotion. Sponsor reserves the right to disqualify any individual found, in its sole opinion, to be tampering with the operation of the Promotion, to be acting in violation of these Official Rules or to be acting in an unsportsmanlike manner or with the intent to disrupt the normal operation of a Promotion. Any use of robotic, automatic, macro, programmed, third party or like methods to participate in the Promotion will void any attempted participation affected by such methods and the disqualification of the individual utilizing the same. CAUTION AND WARNING: ANY ATTEMPT TO DELIBERATELY DAMAGE ANY WEBSITE OR TO UNDERMINE THE LEGITIMATE OPERATION OF THIS PROMOTION IS A VIOLATION OF CRIMINAL AND CIVIL LAWS. SHOULD SUCH AN ATTEMPT BE MADE, SPONSOR RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SEEK DAMAGES OR OTHER REMEDIES FROM ANY SUCH PERSON(S) RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ATTEMPT TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. If any provision of these Official Rules or any word, phrase, clause, sentence, or other portion thereof should be held unenforceable or invalid for any reason, then that provision or portion thereof shall be modified or deleted in such manner as to render the remaining provisions of these Official Rules valid and enforceable. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of these Official Rules or the prize documents will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision. Sponsor’s interpretation of these Official Rules is final and binding in all matters related to the Promotion. Sponsor or Released Party’s failure to enforce any term of these Official Rules shall not constitute a waiver of that provision and such provision shall remain in full force and effect. All Promotion Entries and/or materials submitted become the property of Sponsor and will not be returned. In the event of any conflict with any Promotion details contained in these Official Rules and Promotion details contained in any promotional materials (including but not limited to point of sale, television and print advertising, promotional packaging, social media, email communications, and other promotional media), the details of the Promotion as set forth in these Official Rules shall prevail.

11. SOCIAL MEDIA RELEASE AND DISCLAIMER. Each entrant acknowledges and agrees that this Promotion is in no way sponsored, endorsed or administered by, or associated with Instagram. By entering the Promotion each entrant hereby releases and agrees to hold harmless these entities completely from any liability in connection with the Promotion. Any questions, comments or complaints regarding the Promotion should be directed to Sponsor and not these social media platforms. By participating via any applicable social media platform, Entrants are also subject to such platform’s terms of use.
12. TO RECEIVE WINNERS LIST OR OFFICIAL RULES: The Official Rules (available during the Promotion Period) and Winners List (available after winner is confirmed) will be available on Blurb.com for a period of sixty (60) days after the close of the Promotion Period.

The post Blurb Stories that Bind Contest appeared first on Blurb Blog.

The post Terms & conditions appeared first on Blurb Blog.

The post Terms & conditions appeared first on Blurb Blog.

For consultants, agencies, and growing businesses, custom books have become a quiet power move. They’re more than gifts—they’re tools for deepening partnerships, showing your expertise, and staying top of mind when new opportunities arise.

This post shares seven ways businesses are using books to strengthen client loyalty and elevate their brand, along with practical tips to help you create one of your own, no design degree required.

Book ideas that build brand loyalty

1. Strengthen client loyalty with a personalized year-in-review book

After a great year with a client, there’s nothing more rewarding than looking back on everything you’ve achieved together and seeing your impact. A year-in-review book gathers milestones, results, and behind-the-scenes moments in a format clients will flip through long after the wrap-up call. It’s one of the simplest business gifts for clients that quietly builds brand loyalty.

Photographer Adam Fakult’s Endless Summer shows how effective this can be. His layflat photo book spans three seasons at a summer camp and captures what he calls “camp magic—friendships being born, memories being made, fears being tackled.” Fakult shared the book with staff and campers, and now he uses it as a portfolio piece to spark fresh commissions.

This isn’t just a recap, but one of the smartest client appreciation ideas you can implement—and a case study to share with future clients. Whether you choose a luxe layflat photo book or cost-effective trade book, the result is a high-end gift clients keep in reach, not buried in a drawer.

2. Share your expertise with a custom industry insight guide

Sharing hard-won expertise in a printed guide is one of the fastest ways to signal credibility (and win more business). Fill it with benchmarks, frameworks, and short case studies to show—rather than tell—how you solve their problems and why they should trust you.

A custom industry insight guide is also one of the most effective business gifts for clients who want to stay ahead of the curve. It’s your branded playbook—part thought leadership, part practical toolkit—in a format they’ll use and keep. More than a PDF or whitepaper, it’s a tangible representation of your expertise and value, positioning you as a trusted advisor.

Take a look at 344 Questions by Stefan G. Bucher, a bestselling journal helping creatives find their success—and Bucher elevate his brand. “344 Questions found such a great audience because it’s my most immediately helpful book, Bucher states. “It directly addresses pains and worries we all share, and it helps you find a way forward.”

Repurpose existing articles, talks, or research into a clean layout, add data visuals, and drop in a QR code that links to deeper resources. You can even use creation tools in your current workflow, like Adobe InDesign. The result is a practical business gift that keeps reinforcing your expertise long after the first meeting.

3. Show what sets you apart with a behind-the-scenes process book

Give clients a true sense of the strategy, effort, and creativity behind every project with a behind-the-scenes process book that brings your work to life. This is the perfect business gift for clients (soon-to-be and existing) who value transparency and craftsmanship. Capture your unique approach—from early sketches to final outcomes—and highlight your team’s creativity, care, and problem-solving in a way that’s honest, engaging, and hard to forget.

Creative Lament by artist Harmony Eccles is a standout example of documenting the messy, magical side of creativity. It’s raw, real, and deeply human, just like the best client partnerships. Harmony’s book gives her fans and buyers a rare window into her process and serves as something she can share at galleries, events, and online, offering people another way to connect with her work.

Among client appreciation ideas, this one stands out for its authenticity. It helps clients feel like collaborators, not just customers. And it gives them a deeper appreciation for the work that often goes unseen and the value you add.

4. Capture shared moments with an event commemoration book

From retreats and conferences to gallery openings and milestone launches, the best events deserve more than a quick thank-you email. A commemoration book captures the energy and key moments in a format clients can revisit and share.

This kind of book does more than recap—it highlights your client’s role, reinforces their impact, and becomes a keepsake that extends the event’s value. Guests can engage with it during the experience and take it home as a lasting reminder.

Philadelphia International Tea Bowl Exhibition by Shelby Smith and Mark Tyson is a perfect example. The exhibition lives on through a carefully curated book of images and reflections, turning a temporary event into a legacy piece. You can do the same with your next summit, workshop, or launch.

When you share a client’s part in the story, you strengthen the partnership. And here’s the upside: clients share these books with colleagues and decision-makers, keeping your work top of mind long after the event.

5. Say thank you like you mean it with a premium client appreciation book

You just wrapped a big project. The results were strong. The collaboration was seamless. The client was delighted.

This is the moment to set yourself apart.

A thank-you email or bottle of wine might check the box, but a custom appreciation book goes further. Filled with project highlights, behind-the-scenes moments, and a personal note, it acknowledges the client’s role and the impact of the work you achieved together. This kind of gesture builds trust, loyalty, and relationships that last long after the project ends.

What to include: curated photo spreads, before-and-after moments, client quotes, key results, or even a spread outlining future opportunities. Keep it simple but meaningful.

Layflat photo books are ideal for this format, with seamless panoramic spreads that showcase edge-to-edge visuals. Paired with premium finishes like dust jackets, archival paper, and a sleek gift box, they’re designed to impress.

Thoughtful thank-yous don’t just close projects on a high note. They open the door to the next one.

6. Build trust and attract referrals with client success story book

Your happiest clients are your strongest advocates, but are their stories working as hard as they could?

Too often, digital case studies get scrolled past. A client success story book changes that. Professionally bound and thoughtfully designed, it’s tangible proof of your creative impact and one of the smartest tools for attracting new business.

Think of it as a branded mini-series: short, compelling narratives that show the problems you solved and the value you delivered. Leave it behind after a meeting, gift it to a client as a thank-you, or display it in your studio to spark conversations.

You’ll want to feature projects that represent the full breadth of your capabilities or focus on a niche you want to grow. Consider themed editions tailored to specific services or audiences to make the book even more relevant. Highlight standout client journeys with quotes, visuals, and measurable outcomes. When prospects see themselves in the pages, trust follows naturally.

Pro tip: Add a closing spread inviting clients to share the book or explore future collaborations.

7. Stay top-of-mind (without trying too hard) with branded notebooks and journals

Not every client gift needs to be bold. Sometimes the smartest move is staying quietly present in your client’s daily life.

A branded journal or notebook does exactly that. Sleek, practical, and intentionally designed, it’s a gift clients will actually use—whether for meeting notes, brainstorming sessions, or personal reflections. And every time they pick it up, your brand is right there with them.

Unlike throwaway trinkets, a quality notebook reflects care and attention to detail. The Higher Self Journal by Tal | Yogatation is a great example. Designed not just as a thoughtful client gift, it is also a sales item to expand her business, creating a product her community wanted to use and share.

For an even bigger impact, consider doing the same—turn custom notebooks into a revenue stream while building brand loyalty.

Tips for creating impactful business books

You probably already have everything you need to get started. With a little intention and the right tools, you can create professional-quality client books that stand out and strengthen your brand.

Repurpose what you already have

That project deck, case study, or blog post? It’s all valuable content. Dig into presentations, photo archives, testimonials, and even old emails. Use what’s already working to build a client gift book with substance and ease. Need some inspiration? Check out our blog on how businesses are doing more with less.

Keep the story authentic

Your book doesn’t need to be perfect—it needs to be personal. Focus on real stories, honest reflections, and moments that mattered. The best client appreciation ideas come from genuine connection, not perfection.

Stick to clean, consistent layouts

Visual clarity builds trust. Use simple templates (like those in Blurb BookWright) to help keep your fonts, spacing, and brand colors uniform. 

Ask yourself:

• Am I communicating exactly what I want?
• Is there rhythm and consistency in my layout?
• Do I have enough contrast, and is my design accessible?
• Is everything evenly spaced and visually balanced?
• Are all my design rule-breaks intentional?
• Do I need to edit or remove text or imagery that feels redundant?

For more tips, check out our blog post on designing layouts.

Opt for high-end finishes

Details matter. Premium paper, quality binding, and a sturdy cover can turn even a simple project into a standout business gift.

Add a personal touch

A handwritten note, a page dedicated to the client, or a callout of a shared win can make your book feel intentional and memorable. These small details go a long way in building relationships that last.

FAQs

Still wondering if custom books are the right move? Here are answers to common questions about using books as business gifts for clients—and why they’re one of the smartest ways to build brand loyalty.

How can books strengthen client relationships?
Books create lasting, tangible impressions. Unlike emails or branded giveaways, they offer depth and storytelling that reflect real partnership. Whether it’s a project recap, a thank-you gift, or a case study collection, books show clients they’re seen and valued. Explore the benefits of a business book for relationship-building.

What kinds of businesses should use custom books?
Any business that values long-term relationships: freelance photographers, artists, designers, creative agencies, consultants, realtors, SaaS companies, and more. If your work thrives on trust and repeat business, custom books can help. 

Are custom books affordable for small businesses?
Yes. You can create a premium, high-impact client book starting at around $20 (and even less for custom magazines). Blurb offers free bookmaking tools, volume discounts, and print-on-demand options—so whether you need one book or one hundred, you only ever print what you need. 

What content works best?
Use what you already have—project milestones, client testimonials, case studies, behind-the-scenes images, and more. Then shape it into a story your client will connect with.

Let these ideas spark new ways to engage clients, thank them meaningfully, and make your brand stand out. Dive deeper with 10 ways to stand out using books and start turning your everyday work into something worth printing.

Create the gift they’ll never forget

Forget the branded pens, forget the fruit baskets. A custom-made book stands out for all the right reasons. It’s thoughtful. It’s lasting. And it says more about your brand than a thousand coffee mugs ever could.

Whether you’re thanking a long-time partner, onboarding a new client, or simply looking for a more meaningful way to stay top of mind, a professionally crafted book delivers impact that goes beyond the ordinary. It shows that you value the relationship and that you’re willing to invest in it.

So why wait? Your next client connection could start with a single page.

***

Blurb empowers creative professionals to build their brand and business through high-quality, professional printed materials. Whether you’re showcasing your portfolio, creating a client gift, or designing a branded book, Blurb gives you the tools to present your best work and make a lasting impression. Create a free account and get started today. 

The post Seven creative ways to use books to build brand loyalty appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Portrait photography seems simple at first glance: one subject, one frame, one fraction of a second. But as any photographer knows, the leap from a decent likeness to a photograph that feels alive happens in the small, intentional choices made behind the lens. In our recent live event, Image Breakdown: Portraiture, Blurb’s creative ambassador Dan Milnor reviewed community-submitted portraits live, sharing his tips on the mindset and technical adjustments that can elevate any image.

“If you have any intention of getting into the professional space of photography, having the skills to make portraits is essential, because everybody needs portraits,” Dan stated.

Missed the session? Watch the full replay and explore Dan’s seven key portrait photography tips below. 

1. Portraits scale fast—use them to build a body of work

For photographers looking to grow their portfolios quickly, portraits offer a unique advantage. “One of the best things about portrait photography is that in a very short amount of time, you can amass an incredible body of work,” Dan explained during the session. Because you’re working with a single subject and a contained environment, it’s possible to produce a surprising number of strong images, even in a brief session.

Dan shared the story of one photographer who scheduled back-to-back portrait sittings over a single weekend and walked away with nearly fifty publishable images. This approach can work for anyone. 

Consider blocking off an afternoon to photograph a few friends or collaborators and challenge yourself to capture ten unique images per sitter. Change outfits, shift your location slightly, or experiment with angles to quickly create variety. Over time, these sessions can grow into a cohesive body of work ready for a printed book or gallery submission.

2. Connection beats perfection

Even the most technically perfect photograph can fall flat if your subject appears uncomfortable or detached. “Talking to people is the best,” Dan said. “When you walk up to someone and want to make a picture of them and you say, ‘Can I make your portrait?’ that sounds really different than ‘Can I take a picture?’”

Even more than the word choice you use, he suggests spending the first few minutes talking without your camera in hand. Ask questions, listen attentively, and create space for your subject to get comfortable and relax. Laughter and genuine conversation often translate into natural expressions and relaxed postures. These small human moments are what elevate a portrait from a mere likeness to a photograph that feels emotionally engaging.

3. Light tells the story

Lighting can make or break a portrait, and Dan returned to this point throughout the session. “Catch lights give humans life,” he noted. These small highlights in the eyes make your subject feel more present and alive. Without them, even the most carefully composed portrait can feel flat or lifeless.

He suggested starting with the light you already have: pivot your subject until that catch light pops into their eyes. When ambient light falls short, Dan often uses a small strobe or LED to add sparkle back into the scene without flattening it, or employs a subtle backlight to separate the subject and create a halo. Then quiet the background: darken any hot spots or slide your subject forward so nothing competes with their expression.

4. Keep backgrounds clean and intentional

It’s easy to lock onto your subject and forget what’s happening behind them, but stray highlights, clashing colors, or an off-kilter horizon can quietly steal attention. Throughout the session, Dan stressed a simple checklist: Scan the frame edges, decide if anything competes with the face, and fix it before you press the shutter. Sometimes that means taking one step left or right; other times it means walking your sitter a pace forward so the wall behind them falls out of focus.

He also encouraged pre-scouting whenever possible—finding a neutral wall, a patch of open shade, or a repeating pattern that adds mood without shouting for attention. If a bright object still creeps in, he’ll either crop it out later or darken it in post so the eye stays on the subject. The result is a portrait that feels timeless and portfolio-ready, because nothing in the background distracts from the story you worked so hard to capture.

5. Crop and edit with purpose

Cropping is a surgical tool, not a rescue mission. Dan’s mantra during the session was to trim distractions at the edges, burn down bright patches, and, when necessary, pull a frame entirely if it weakens the sequence. 

“Always look for pictures inside your pictures,” he urged, before demonstrating how a subtle in-camera crop or a decisive cut in the edit keeps the viewer’s eye where it belongs.

His broader editing advice is just as uncompromising: evaluate every frame for how it advances the narrative, maintain a consistent visual rhythm, and don’t be afraid to jettison an otherwise good shot if it breaks the flow. The result is a portfolio or a printed book where each image earns its spot, and the story feels intentional from cover to cover.

6. Shoot with gear that excites you

The best camera isn’t always the most expensive one—it’s the one you can’t wait to pick up. “If the iPhone is what gets you excited about photography, in the field, and to make portraits, use an iPhone,” Dan shared during the session. Passion for the process will take you farther than any lens upgrade ever could.

Instead of chasing every new release, aim for a setup that feels simple and intuitive. Dan often reaches for a lightweight body with a 50 mm prime, a “conversation lens” that frames portraits naturally without intimidating the sitter.

Your portrait photography starter kit, inspired by Dan’s tips:

• A camera (or phone) you’ll actually carry
• A 50 mm prime (or your own comfortable focal length)
• Small reflector or brim tweak for instant catch-lights
• Open shade or a plain wall to keep the frame clean
• A friend or assistant to keep the mood light

Whatever you choose, the key is to stay consistent. Familiarity with your tools means you can focus on connection and composition instead of fumbling with settings.

7. Design for print while you shoot

Dan encourages you to keep your final book in mind, but not at the expense of the moment. His rule: Make the strongest photo first, then take a quick extra frame that leaves breathing room for title text or page margins. Sometimes that means stepping back a pace or switching to a wider focal length—other times it’s tilting the camera to give a clean strip of negative space.

Capture a mix of wide establishing frames, mid-range interactions, and tight emotive close-ups, and worry about sequencing once you’re at the editing table. Approach every session this way and you’ll walk away with images that drop neatly into a polished, professional book.

From pixels to pages: Bring your portraits to life

Great portraits deserve more than a fleeting moment on a screen. Printing your work gives it permanence and allows you to see your progress in a new light. Whether it’s a zine, a portfolio book, or a small collection for friends and collaborators, holding your images in your hands is a reminder of how far you’ve come.

And when you’re ready to make the leap from digital to print, Blurb BookWright gives you the tools to design your project exactly the way you envisioned it.

Keep learning

• Subscribe to our YouTube channel for even more education.
• Follow @BlurbBooks on Instagram and Facebook for future events.

***

Dan Milnor is Blurb’s longtime creative ambassador—a documentary photographer, educator, and self-publishing expert who helps creators like you tell meaningful stories. Blurb is the self-publishing platform trusted by photographers, visual creators, and storytellers around the world. Create your free account today and bring your work to life in print.

The post 7 portrait photography lessons from Dan Milnor’s Image Breakdown appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Print can be slow, semi-costly (depending on what you print), and complicated when you add in the edit, sequence, typography, page design, and trim size. But the payoff is when print lands on the desk of someone who makes decisions and understands the importance of those things. 

Phones down. Books up. Based on my personal experience, printed pieces linger on places like the desks of editors, agents, and art buyers. The desks of decision makers.

Before print, no one was looking at my work

My first encounter with the power of print to secure a job dates back to New York City in 1996. I made my first trip as a wannabe photographer, and like the total novice I was, I made a myriad of bad decisions. 

I wore a tie with cameras on it, thinking this would endear me to New York editor types. I also had hair down to my shoulders and spent as much time partying with my friends as I did attempting to visit the photo authorities. And I also neglected to bring anything in print. My entire approach was based on a single page of 35mm transparencies. I thought I was cool, awesome, and supremely talented. Wrong again, on all counts.

I assumed that the photo authorities would all be equipped with ultramodern light tables or slide projectors, or some other high-tech device I had yet to be exposed to, but no, not at all. In fact, many did not have any kind of viewing device. 

They held up my beloved work to desk lamps, windows, or any other feeble light source emitting from their office spaces. I realized quickly they were not seeing my work. The top two rows of my slides were singles, and the bottom three rows were a story. Not one person figured it out. Gut punch.

Even before I left New York, I was already thinking, “There must be a better way.” And there was. I decided to make my own magazine. 

There were a few initial issues, however. I did not own a computer, had no design skills, and no idea how to start. Oh, and I had no money. Other than that, it was easy. 

The turning point in my photography career: making my first magazine

I asked the design department at the newspaper I worked for to help build my magazine, and they told me not to come back or ask them again. I asked other photographers, who mostly brushed me off. I ended up at a reprographics house, far out on the dusty fringe of the city. The entire place smelled like ink and glue. 

Fortunately for me, the repro house had a “computer kid” in the back who took a liking to my photography, and he offered to help me in exchange for one of my images. And this is how my print career began.

Three months later, I had my first magazine—an oversized, laminated thing that featured three stories and basic, rudimentary layouts. 

I can’t explain how empowering this felt. In short, creating this one-off print piece changed my life, and the payoff began as soon as I started mailing them out. 

I could only afford ten copies, so I chose the ten most desirable clients I could think of. All the people I thought would never show any interest in me: The New York Times Magazine, German Geo, and The National Geographic, amongst others. I mailed them off and waited.

When the handwritten letter from the Director of Photography at The National Geographic arrived, my first thought was “Oh no, I must have done something wrong.” Why would he, a legend, reach out to me, a nobody? I was so shocked to receive something from National Geographic that I had forgotten I had sent the magazine. 

The letter was complimentary and cordial, inquiring as to how I had created my “thing.” The letter said, “We haven’t seen anything like this before.” 

Shortly after the letter arrived, my phone rang, and the person on the other end had a heavy, German accent. “We don’t normally work with young photographers,” she said. “But we are intrigued by your portfolio and your story on Guatemala.” It turns out the voice belonged to the photo editor at German Geo Magazine. 

The copy I mailed to a Magnum photographer arrived back at my house with a letter encouraging me to keep going and inquiring about how I had crafted my magazine. By creating my own publication, I had created a much-needed professional spark.

What made the magazine work

The magazine worked for a variety of reasons. First, it was new. The technology needed to make what I did was uncommon at the time. Most personal computers were slow, software was basic, and print options were nothing like they are today. 

The magazines also worked because they showed off a diverse skill set. They showed I could edit, sequence, write, design a page, and tell a story. They also showed I was at least semi-consistent and could photograph a wide range of subject matter, both domestic and international.

The second publication: creating a series

Since publishing my first magazine, I’ve printed hundreds of different pieces, many as roadmaps for other creatives. I’ve made books, magazines, edition-of-one art books, collaborations, and lo-fi zine publications. 

However, one of the most important to my career was a small book series that paid tribute to the original Life Magazine, a publication that played a significant role in my development as a photographer. Each time I would do a story, I would create a small book—forty pages, softcover, nothing fancy or expensive. I titled the series Essay, and the cover design is a black-and-white copy of the original Life Magazine design.

After printing four issues, the little stack began to take on a life of its own. Even though they were non-precious—softcover books with basic design and a limited number of images—the fact that there were four issues made them seem like more than the sum of their parts. 

I cannot remember why I brought them to a party, but I did. At the end of the night, I went to collect my books, and a man was looking at them. 

“I’d like to hire you for one year to make this kind of work for our company,” he said. 

“I don’t know anything about your company or your industry,” I replied, being the great salesperson that I am. 

“Doesn’t matter,” he said. “I think you can do it.” So, I did. (I would give myself a C.)

Practical advice: how to build a photo book to get hired

These days, I no longer do photography assignments, but I still make quite a few books. I highly recommend you do so as well, especially if securing professional creative jobs is part of your plan. 

If it seems daunting, take a deep breath and remember, bookmaking should be fun, not stressful or compromising in any way. Start now, today. Here’s how.

1. Start simply: Decide on the photographs or body of work you want to print. That is enough for one day. Sleep on it.
2. Don’t overdesign: If your work is decent, you don’t need to overdesign or stylize anything. Give your work space and let it carry the piece.
3. Design your cover last: Remember to take your time. This is the first impression (and maybe the only one), so make it count.
4. Think in series: Like my Essay publications, a few books with the same ingredients allow you to build out what feels like a library of your best work.
5. Include your contact info: Add your email, phone number, and website—not just your social handles. Many high-end clients won’t communicate through social channels, so you need traditional methods as well.
6. Make a bunch: Small books, large books, and everything in between. 
7. Share them: Take them to meetings, mail them out, and give them away when it makes sense.

Make your breakthrough book now

One last thing: Forget about perfection. I completely understand wanting to make the best work possible, but thinking you must make a perfect book before you hit print holds many people back. 

I have not seen a perfect book, and if I did, I fear it might be slightly boring. When someone engages with your book, they are also engaging with you and your story. Do you have something to say? Are you an interesting person? These are, at least in my mind, on the same importance level as the work itself.

Getting work in 1996 was difficult, and it is still difficult today. Printing your work will put you in the minority now, a wonderful place to be. Will it work every time? No, but the benefits far outweigh the effort or expense. 

I’ve also discovered something about print people. They tend to move more slowly, are more thoughtful than most, and when they engage, they tend to do so at depth. They know what it takes to make a book, and they appreciate taking one’s time. 

Landing any photography job is an incredible feeling. Landing one based on a combination of both your talent and your printed vision feels even better.

***

Dan Milnor has made hundreds of books as Blurb’s creative ambassador. He helps creatives like you gain the confidence and skills to make their first book. With Blurb, you can design, print, and distribute your work—all on your own terms. Get started today.

The post Hit the Books with Dan Milnor: How Printing Got Me Hired as a Photographer appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Portfolios are often seen as a professional necessity—something you put together when you’re applying for a job, trying to get gallery representation, or pitching clients. But in our recent Create with Me: Portfolios workshop, Blurb’s creative ambassador Dan Milnor reframed the concept entirely.

“This is one of my favorite aspects of being a photographer,” he shared. “Making a portfolio and the trials and tribulations that come with it—that’s the fun part!”

Thinking of making your own creative portfolio? You can download BookWright for free and get started today.

Here are five takeaways from the workshop that’ll help you get started—or even just inspired.

1. A creative portfolio is for you, not just your audience

You don’t need a commercial reason to make a portfolio. In fact, Dan recommends treating it as a personal artifact—a curated selection of work that reflects where you are creatively, right now.

“Making a portfolio is a smart move,” Dan explains, “because it forces you to apply critical thought to your photography. It forces you to say what is the absolute best—and only the absolute best.”

That shift can take a lot of pressure off. Portfolios don’t have to be polished, public-facing, or tied to a job search. They can simply be a way to see your own work more clearly so you can make connections, recognize patterns, and explore ideas. It’s not about selling your work, it’s about staying in conversation with it.

2. Your edit can make or break your book

Throughout the workshop, Dan emphasized that editing holds more power than many creators realize. It not only shapes what your creative portfolio includes, but (often more importantly) how your work unfolds across the page and how the viewer experiences it.

“Editing is an art form. It can make you—or it can break you.”

That’s why Dan recommends printing thumbnails and laying them out physically to get a full view of your narrative arc before committing to a final flow. Seeing your work all at once, rather than one image at a time on a screen, often reveals what belongs and what doesn’t.

3. Structure helps, even if you’re not a planner

If you’re feeling overwhelmed about how to organize your work, start with a simple theme. During the session, Dan walked through several portfolio structures that work for just about any kind of creator.

• Series-based: Create a collection of smaller books, each focused on a different subject or project, but designed to feel like a cohesive set.
• Audience-specific: Tailor your portfolio to the person you’re sharing it with. A book for an art buyer might look different from one for a photo editor.
• Design-inspired: Let the visual language lead. Dan showed one portfolio modeled after Life magazine, using its iconic style as a design foundation.

Each of these approaches can offer clarity, not just for your viewer, but for you. When you organize your work into a sequence, you begin to see how your images speak to each other and what kind of narrative they form. Structure doesn’t limit creativity—it supports it.

Having a theme gives your book cohesion, even if the content spans different times or styles. It helps your portfolio feel intentional rather than scattered, and can make the editing process more focused from the start.

4. Print changes everything

It wouldn’t be a Dan Milnor workshop without a plug for the power of print. But this isn’t about nostalgia. It’s about seeing your work differently and, often, more honestly.

When your images live only on screens, it’s easy to scroll past inconsistencies or miss how photos relate to one another in context. Print slows you down. It makes decisions feel more permanent. It invites you to spend time with your work, not just review it, but really experience it.

Dan shared examples of how printed portfolios have helped him secure creative opportunities, simply because they left a stronger impression. Whether you print a layflat photo book for in-person meetings or a small trade book to keep in your bag, the act of printing transforms your work into a physical artifact, and that carries weight.

Even printing a single copy can reveal things you didn’t notice before. How pages flow. Where rhythm falters. What images feel essential. It’s a shift in perspective that’s hard to replicate digitally.

5. You evolve every time you make one

The portfolio isn’t just a product. It’s a process. And that process, Dan believes, is what makes it so valuable.

When you take the time to gather, edit, and organize your work into a book, patterns start to emerge. You might notice recurring themes, see a change in tone or approach, or identify gaps you want to fill. It becomes a way to reflect—not just on what you’ve made, but on where you’re headed.

Dan encourages creators to make portfolio-building a regular part of their practice. It doesn’t have to be a major project. Even once a year is enough to track your evolution and shape your next creative chapter.

Final thoughts: Just start

There is no one right way to create a portfolio. But starting with intention, curiosity, and the work you already have is always a good move.

If you’re unsure where to begin, take stock of your work over the last few months. What images are still on your mind? What stories are starting to form? Use those as your foundation. The specifics will follow.

To close the session, Dan walked through the process of building a portfolio in real time using photos from a recent trip to Berlin. He discussed sequencing, layout, and the type of decision-making that transforms a loose collection of images into a cohesive book.

You can watch the full session below, and follow along as you begin building your own creative portfolio.

Watch the full workshop

***

Dan Milnor is Blurb’s longtime creative ambassador—a documentary photographer, educator, and publishing expert who helps creators tell meaningful stories. Blurb is a self-publishing platform trusted by photographers, designers, and storytellers around the world. Ready to start your own portfolio? Download BookWright for free and bring your work to life in print. For more inspiration, subscribe to Blurb’s YouTube channel.

The post 5 Takeaways from Dan Milnor’s creative portfolio workshop appeared first on Blurb Blog.

We caught up with Medina to learn how a teenage band name turned into a lifelong creative identity, what he’s learned from a career spanning political campaigns and entertainment, and why print still holds a special place in his process. Don’t forget to check out his work on Instagram @the_mystery_parade and find The Wan Chai Times in the Blurb Bookstore.

Your career has spanned political campaigns, entertainment marketing, and editorial design. Can you walk us through your design journey and how it led to The Mystery Parade?

The Mystery Parade started out as a teenage band fantasy, but since I have zero musical talent, I kept the name over the years to use as a pseudonym to credit my personal work, instead of my real name (I suppose I’m personally not about being famous). I became a graphic designer because of the Duran Duran “Rio” album cover—its design is, incidentally, credited to Assorted Images. Perhaps that’s the inspiration to use The Mystery Parade as a design credit. 

My first job was art directing a national martial arts magazine, but I eventually got the chance to live my dream for a bit: designing in the music industry. When digital music piracy began to cannibalize record label budgets, I transitioned to home video packaging for a while before that dried up as well. After moving from Los Angeles to San Francisco, I fell into political design through a mutual friend, and that’s the bulk of my rent-paying work these days.

As The Mystery Parade, I’m constantly designing projects for myself and the San Francisco band Halou (I’ve designed a few Blurb-published books for them, with a new one currently in the works). The existence of DIY companies like Blurb has been instrumental in making this possible.

What’s the biggest thing your client work has taught you about making personal art?

Client work is essentially a means to an end. There are usually rigid parameters, and I always do my best to create a great solution (I have standards!), but ultimately, there isn’t much room for creative license. I think I do personal design projects in the same way other people have hobbies.

What sparked the idea for The Wan Chai Times?

I had stumbled on an archive of old Chinese newspapers. I am kind of obsessed with Chinese typography, and not being able to read or speak the language, the next best thing is to design a project using its letterforms. To make it more visually interesting, I found the old poems. 

I still needed another element, and I think I just exploited the fact that A.I. constantly comes up with bizarre, grotesque human imagery. Giant page numbers, because why not? 

Lastly, I wanted to break down the CMYK print process. In the end, it’s almost three or four books in one. 

I got to visit Hong Kong years ago, and there is a Wan Chai district, although I’m not sure how that resurfaced. The title was also partly inspired by the Oasis song “The Hindu Times.”

The book feels experimental and intentional at the same time—what was your workflow like? Did you sketch it all out, build spreads iteratively, or something else?

I tend to follow my instincts when designing for myself. I definitely enjoy experimenting!

While I do a fair amount of experimentation and trial-and-error, there is usually a point where the design just feels correct. I try to avoid investing more time than I need to, which can potentially be consequential to the design. Trust your instincts!

Give us your best book design advice.

1. Lock down your blueprint. Know exactly how the book will lay out before you begin.
2. Make sure you have press-quality assets. Even if your book is just text, you still need great cover art.
3. If you’re not a professional graphic designer, hire one. I think the work you put into your book’s content deserves the best possible presentation.

You sell books, t-shirts, clocks, prints. How do you reach the people who are most excited to buy your work?

I basically only post on Instagram. I’m well aware of how esoteric a lot of my work is, so I have low expectations of people being interested. But when I do get any interest, it’s definitely flattering.

You’ve created 19 books with Blurb (!). What keeps you coming back to the platform, and how has your approach evolved over time?

As a graphic designer, the biggest advantage of Blurb to me is the InDesign plugin. The workflow makes it really easy to design books with Blurb.

What advice do you have for artists who want to self-publish and sell their books or zines?

I think you really owe it to yourself to respect your hard work and present it properly. If you’re not a professional graphic designer, hire one to help you. If you have ambitions of selling a lot of books, use any resources available online, including social media.

What drives you to make books instead of just sharing your work online?

I guess I’m old school. I prefer having tangible objects rather than just access to pixels. No electricity required!

How it’s made: The Wan Chai Times

• Format: Softcover Trade Book
• Size: 6×9 in, 15×23 cm
• Paper type: Standard Color
• Tool: Blurb plugin for Adobe InDesign

***

Have a personal project you’ve been meaning to bring to life? Blurb makes it easy to turn your ideas into a professional-quality book, whether you’re designing with InDesign like Maximillian or just getting started. There’s no perfect formula, and that’s the beauty of self-publishing. Experiment, stay curious, and make something uniquely yours. Get started today.

The post The Wan Chai Times: Behind the Book with Maximillian Medina appeared first on Blurb Blog.

If I had a dollar for every time I’ve heard this statement, I could buy a mid-level Toyota Camry. I might not be able to get the top-of-the-line model, but I could certainly afford the one with a sunroof and upgraded interior. 

There is only one problem with that statement. I don’t know what perfect means. What is perfect photography, or a perfect photography book? 

I own over three hundred publications, but wouldn’t classify any of them as perfect. I’ve even spoken to the designers behind these publications, and they don’t see them as perfect either. So, if there is no such thing as perfect, why are so many people obsessed with the idea?

There’s the hunt for the perfect camera, bike, fly rod, tires, desk setup—the only thing that’s stopping you from succeeding. Then, just as you think you’ve found the Holy Grail, you find something even better. Suddenly, you are gripped by the fear of missing out, or paralysed by the thought that something better is just around the corner. 

Ultimately, it’s easier not to do anything—and it’s definitely easier not to hit print.

The kind of perfect that makes you feel nothing

Someone sent me a link to the Instagram page of a European photography collective. The collective was landscape and nature-based. Up popped a perfect wall of color. Sunsets through clouds, dripping rainforest branches, and incredible oceanic activity. There were paddlers and hikers and riders, all in picture-perfect conditions. 

I love nature. I love the outdoors. I love physical activities. This site should have been perfect for me. And yet, I felt nothing at all. And when I say nothing, I mean the page left me feeling hollow. 

It was perhaps the best example of content I’d ever seen. The kind of thing we see all day, every day. Safe, sanitised, and expected. The style of photography that will soon be consumed by artificial intelligence. 

But what if I told you there was another option? 

Instead of chasing perfection and ending up with ordinary, you can search for mood and feel in your work.

Feeling over formula

Creating with mood and feel might mean you end up with perceived imperfections, like a book with a cover that doesn’t look like it is expected to.  A book of portraiture with a still life on the cover, or maybe a landscape book with a cover portrait. Or maybe a book filled with images that break the rules we photographers love so much. 

Mood and feel are unique to the artist, meaning your mood and feel might not look like anyone else’s. And it’s never going to be perfect. 

Now, I want you to reflect. Consider the past images you’ve encountered in your lifetime, those peculiar moments captured by anyone, not necessarily a professional photographer. 

My mind goes to a 3×5 print I discovered in a box of images my mother made while visiting friends in the Caribbean. The images were what you would expect: random, questionable exposures, odd cropping, and composition. All but one, and that one stopped me in my tracks. 

The image was a portrait of sorts, with the subject off-center to the left, showcasing a nice falloff. The light came from the right, illuminating the subject, who was focused on a book they held. The background featured a classic Caribbean cottage–light blue and adorned with island ephemera. I couldn’t stop looking at it. The picture had such an impact. It felt like the only image I needed to understand what her trip was like. Was this a picture that would have won a photography contest or garnered massive views or likes? No. But it had feeling.

There are two kinds of photographers

The professional photography industry is filled with a wide range of talented individuals, but they generally fall into two groups. Technical perfectionists who can solve any visual problem, but produce work that might not leave a lasting impression, and the others who produce imperfect work you can’t stop thinking about. 

Perfectionists will adhere to things like critical focus, rule of thirds, symmetry, and filling the frame, while imperfectionists will react to what’s there, regardless of the technical aspects. If something is slightly out of focus, so be it. If the crop isn’t perfect, that’s okay. It boils down to feeling. Weird over perfect. Often, moody images happen during in-between moments when our guard is down. They can happen in a fraction of a second and never again. 

Making moody images with feel is about experimentation, reaction, and calculated risk. Photographers who know how to capture mood and feel often use the camera as a sketch pad. They are the opposite of methodical. They move quickly from moment to moment, scene to scene, knowing that those moments of feeling are fleeting and fickle. These photographers aren’t afraid of failure. They embrace it.

Try weird. Try fast. Try now.

If you want to inject new life into your photography, give yourself an assignment with one camera, one lens. And a few other things.

• Forget the rules and react to what’s there. 
• Work quickly without thinking about perfect composition or focus. 
• Try what you would shy away from. (If you love long lenses, swap to a wide angle. If you pose your subjects, try shooting without scripting.) 
• Forget about the book you think you are supposed to make, and make the book your feelings tell you to make. 

Start now. Today. Don’t put this off until you have the perfect scenario to experiment. This is too important. If you have an upcoming travel adventure or will be spending time with family, then now is the time to allow yourself to forget what you know and focus on mood and feel. You might not make as many photographs, but you might make better photographs.

***

Dan Milnor is a professional photographer and Blurb’s creative ambassador. He writes monthly on the art of bookmaking, photography, and the messy magic of the creative process. Blurb is your platform for turning ideas into beautifully printed, self-published books—made to share, sell, or simply keep. Start your project today. 

The post Hit the Books with Dan Milnor: Give Me Mood Over Perfection appeared first on Blurb Blog.

If you’ve ever dreamed of making a book but felt overwhelmed, this challenge is for you. Whether you’re printing your first portfolio, coming home from a trip, capturing a creative streak, or organizing years of your child’s artwork, the seven-day challenge helps you move from “I’ve been meaning to…” to “I made this.”

Over the next seven days, you’ll follow a clear, step-by-step plan to get your first book done—without burning out or obsessing over details. The goal isn’t perfection. It’s progress.

By the end of the week, you’ll have a finished book ready to print. 

Why most first books never happen

If you’ve been sitting on folders of photos or an idea you keep revisiting, you’re not alone. Here’s what tends to get in the way:

• Perfectionism: Waiting for the perfect time, perfect content, or perfect skills.
• Overwhelm: Bookmaking can look complicated, so it’s easy to avoid starting.
• The blank page: Even with great material, it’s hard to know where to begin.
• Time pressure: Or rather, the idea that you need a full week off to even attempt it.

This challenge is designed to push past all of that. It offers structure, pacing, and a built-in deadline—not to create pressure, but to create momentum. Each day, you’ll complete a small, doable task that moves your book forward.

Why seven days work

You don’t need more time—you need fewer choices. A one-week framework helps you focus, simplify decisions, and finish a project you’ve been putting off for too long.

In our experience (and we’ve made a ton of books as a team), short-term creative sprints reduce procrastination, help you maintain motivation, and make it easier to take risks without overcommitting. You’ll be working fast enough to stay engaged, but not so fast that you burn out.

Each day builds on the last, and each task can be completed in under 30 minutes (or even 15, if you’re short on time). Think of it like guided creative momentum.

Let’s go!

Day 1: Quick prep

Daily tip: One story. One idea. One week. Keep it simple. Completion is the goal.

Making a book in seven days might sound ambitious, but it’s completely doable if you begin with the right scope. Today is all about setting expectations, picking your format, and gathering just enough content to get started.

Choose your book format

Think about the kind of book you want to hold in your hands at the end of this bookmaking sprint. Your book format should reflect your content, not the other way around.

• Photo book: Best for clean, visual storytelling—great for travel recaps, portfolios, or family yearbooks.
• Magazine: Ideal for lookbooks, leave-behinds, and zine-style storytelling. Good for mixed media, hobby highlights, or short visual essays.
• Trade book: Great for writing-heavy projects like memoirs, poetry collections, or art paired with text, like cookbooks or children’s books.

Don’t worry about picking the perfect format—just choose the one that fits your idea.

Keep your scope small

This is where a lot of first-time bookmakers overreach. Instead of trying to include every photo, sketch, or idea you’ve ever considered, zoom in on something self-contained. A short travel recap. A sampler of your artwork. A few favorite pieces of writing from this season of your life.

You’re not trying to make your definitive book—you’re making a book. Small projects are more likely to get finished.

Gather the content you already have

Do a quick content sweep. Pull together about 20 photos, sketches, notes, or text files that support the idea you’re working with. You don’t need to organize them yet. Just drop everything into a folder so it’s easy to find tomorrow.

You can absolutely create something meaningful using content that’s been sitting in your camera roll or notes app.

Pick your bookmaking tool

Use the tool that best matches your comfort level and workflow:

• Blurb BookWright: Blurb’s free desktop app, great for full layout control and custom designs.
• Blurb plugin for Adobe InDesign: Ideal if you’re designing in Adobe InDesign and want a streamlined export-to-print process.
• PDF Uploader: Best if you’re already comfortable with Canva, Word, or another bookmaking tool.

Once you’ve chosen your tool, open it up, and make sure it’s ready to go. You’ll start building tomorrow.

15-Minute Sprint

If you’re short on time today, choose your book format, define a focused project idea, and gather about 20 images or pieces of content into one folder. That’s all you need to call Day 1 a success.

Day 2: Project setup

Daily tip: Templates are your friend. Use them to save time and reduce decision fatigue.

Now that you’ve chosen your book type and pulled together your content, it’s time to get your project off the ground. Today is just about setting up your workspace.

You’re not designing yet. You’re putting the structure in place so the creative work can flow more easily later.

Create your project

Open your chosen tool—whether that’s BookWright, the Blurb plugin for Adobe InDesign, or your PDF design platform—and create a new project file. Give it a name, pick your size and format, and double-check things like page count and paper type. (Don’t stress about making the right choice—Blurb lets you preview and adjust later.)

If you’re using BookWright, you’ll have the option to start with a template. Do it! This is a huge time-saver, especially if you’re not sure how to lay things out. You can always customize it later, but starting with a structure helps you keep moving.

Upload your content

Drag your initial photos or text from the file you created yesterday into your new project. Don’t worry about placing anything yet. This is just about getting your assets into the system so they’re easy to access as you build.

Think of this as your digital workspace. It’s much easier to experiment when everything’s already loaded and ready to go.

Set yourself up for success

The goal this week isn’t to do everything at once. It’s to break the project into manageable pieces. Today’s job is set up. That’s it.

If you’ve got extra time or momentum, feel free to do a little organizing—reorder your image tray, group related content, or jot down a few notes on page or cover ideas. But don’t get stuck trying to perfect anything yet. That’s what the rest of the week is for.

15-Minute Sprint

Create your project in your chosen tool, upload your initial batch of content, and preview a template layout to get a feel for the flow.

Daily tip: Decisions now make everything easier later. Rough is fine—just get your structure in place.

With your content uploaded and your project file set up, it’s time to start shaping your story. Today is all about sequencing—putting things in a rough order so your book has flow.

This isn’t about a perfect layout or final captions. It’s about answering one question: How do I want this to unfold?

Start with a loose outline

Think of your book like a conversation. It needs a beginning to draw people in, a middle to develop your story or idea, and an ending to close things out. That might look like a chronological trip through your photos, a series of sketches grouped by theme, or a zine-style narrative with a few surprising turns.

You don’t need to map every single page right now. Just sketch out a general structure:

• What comes first?
• What feels like a natural middle?
• What’s a strong way to end?

Once you’ve got that, start dragging content into rough order.

Sequence your content

Use your tool’s preview or page management view to begin placing images or text. Focus on key anchor points: a strong opening, a turning point in the middle, and a closing page that leaves an impression.

If your book is mostly visual, think about visual pacing: group similar colors or scenes together, break things up with variety, or use full-bleed images to create rhythm.

For text-based books, now’s a good time to drop in chapter markers or titles if you have them.

The point here is not to perfect anything—it’s to avoid the blank page problem later. Giving your book a basic structure will make design and editing much smoother.

Adjust and experiment

Once everything is in rough order, quickly scroll through your project and take notes. Ask yourself: Does this feel like a progression? Do I need to shift anything around? Is anything missing?

There’s no need to fix every issue today, but flag anything that feels off. You’ll finesse it later.

15-minute sprint

Roughly sequence the first, middle, and last pages of your book. Focus on a clear beginning, crux, and end—even if it’s messy.

Day 4: Adding text and context

Daily tip: Imperfect words today are better than perfect words someday.

Your book is starting to take shape—work is in order, the layout is underway, and now it’s time to bring in some words. Whether your book is visual or copy-driven, this is the moment to provide context and ground the story. 

You don’t need to be a professional writer—just get your thoughts down in a way that feels authentic. The goal is to add enough text to engage the reader, but without overthinking it.

Start small and stay conversational

It might feel intimidating to fill the blank caption box for an image or to summarize your writing with an introduction. Imagine you’re explaining things to a friend—natural, unpolished, and honest. That’s often the tone that resonates the most with readers, whether it’s a caption, reflection, or entire chapter.

You don’t need to write entire essays or clever headlines unless that fits your style. A single sentence or short phrase can work wonders—don’t try to be profound. Just be present and real.

Choose your moments

Not every page needs text. Some layouts only require visuals, so choose pages where a bit of extra context actually adds meaning. 

Thoughtstarters include:

• Quotes that inspired the image or writing
• Backstory that the reader wouldn’t otherwise know
• A personal anecdote that ties everything together

When in doubt, go without. The key is to add just enough writing to support the content, not overwhelm it.

Keep your voice consistent

Whether you’re going for poetic, playful, or plainspoken, try to keep your tone steady. This isn’t about sticking to a strict writing style—it’s about helping your reader stay grounded in the rhythm of the book.

If one caption is humorous and the next is deeply serious, think about how to bridge that transition. You don’t have to rewrite anything—just be mindful of how your tone shapes the reading experience.

15-minute sprint

Write five image captions, titles, or paragraphs (depending on your book style) that help clarify or connect key parts of your book. Don’t worry about perfect grammar or punctuation—just focus on getting the words down.

Day 5: Designing, simplified

Daily tip: Good design doesn’t mean complicated. Clean and consistent always wins.

You’ve got your content in order. You’ve added context. Now it’s time to bring it all together with design—but before you dive in, remember, less is more.

This isn’t about flexing your graphic design skills or obsessing over every font pairing. It’s about making choices that support your story and help your book feel cohesive from start to finish.

Embrace white space

White space isn’t wasted space—it’s what gives your pages breathing room. Resist the urge to fill every corner. A single image on a page can often have more impact than a collage.

White space also makes your book easier to read and your visuals easier to appreciate. When in doubt, pull back. A cleaner page helps the important things stand out.

Stick to a consistent look

Pick one or two fonts and use them throughout. The same goes for page layouts. Choose a handful of layouts you like and rotate between them, rather than switching up the structure on every page.

Consistency doesn’t mean boring—it means your reader won’t be distracted by design. They’ll stay focused on your narrative.

Don’t get stuck in fine-tuning

This is where many creators lose momentum: zooming in, tweaking alignment by a few pixels, and second-guessing every spacing choice. Don’t let design perfection slow your progress.

Aim for done, not flawless. There’s plenty of time to refine your next project. For now, your focus is on completing the book and creating an experience that feels thoughtful, not overworked.

15-minute sprint

Apply a consistent layout to five pages in your book. Keep the fonts simple, let the visuals breathe, and don’t overthink the details.

Day 6: Polishing

Daily tip: Done is better than perfect. Good enough is good enough.

You’re almost there. Today is about reviewing your book with fresh eyes—not to tear it apart or start over, but to give it a final round of thoughtful edits.

Think of this as a tune-up, not a teardown. You’re scanning for anything that might pull the reader out of the experience: typos, missing captions, duplicate photos, or design elements that feel out of place.

Focus your review

Start by flipping through your entire book from start to finish. Try to do this in one sitting so you can spot inconsistencies and catch things that interrupt the flow.

Ask yourself:

• Does the order make sense?
• Are there any pages that feel cluttered or unfinished?
• Did you miss any obvious errors (like a blank page or typo)?
• Are the fonts and layouts consistent?

Again, you’re not aiming for perfection—you’re looking for ease. If anything feels awkward or confusing, make a quick fix and move on.

Catch the common mistakes

Most first-time book creators run into the same few issues. Watch for:

• Images that are stretched, pixelated, or too close to the edge
• Content in the gutter (middle of the book) that gets lost
• Text that runs off the page or is too small to read
• The same photo or phrase repeating unintentionally
• Layouts that look noticeably different from the rest (unless it’s on purpose)

If you’re not sure whether to fix something, ask yourself: Would this bother me if I saw it in someone else’s book? If the answer is yes, adjust it. If not, leave it and keep moving.

Leave space for future you

It’s normal to spot things later that you’ll want to change. That doesn’t mean this version isn’t worth printing. Finishing this book creates momentum and confidence for the next one.

Treat this version as a complete draft, even if it’s not your final masterpiece.

15-minute sprint

Flip through your book and make small corrections as needed. Don’t let yourself get pulled into redesign mode—just clean up what’s clearly out of place.

Day 7: Hitting print and celebrating

Daily tip: Printing your book is a creative milestone—hit publish, then celebrate the win.

You made it. Seven days, one idea, and a finished book. Even if it’s not perfect (and it never will be), getting this far is a huge accomplishment. Today’s about following through, placing your order, and—just as important—taking a moment to recognize what you’ve created.

Build your cover

The cover is a crucial part of your book—it’s the first thing your audience will experience, so make sure it captures the essence of the project you’ve worked so hard on. That’s why it comes at the end of this process!

Choose a design that reflects the spirit of your book, whether it’s simple or bold. If you’re using a tool like BookWright, you’ll have access to templates to help guide you, or you can create your own from scratch. The key is to keep it straightforward and ensure the cover aligns with the story inside.

Do a final check

Take one last look through your book. You’re not making big changes at this point—just giving yourself the peace of mind that everything’s ready to go.

Check that:

• Your cover looks the way you want it to
• Your text is readable and free of obvious errors
• Your visuals are placed and sized consistently
• You’ve chosen the right paper type and book size for your needs

If you see something that feels truly off, adjust it. Otherwise, move forward. Books evolve over time—what matters most is completing this one.

Place your order

Once you’re happy with your file, go through the order process. If you’re using BookWright or our plugin for Adobe InDesign, you’ll be guided step by step. Preview your book carefully, upload your design, choose your quantity, and set your shipping speed.

This is a good time to save notes on what worked well, especially if you think you’ll make more books in the future. (Spoiler: you probably will.)

Plan your next step

After you order your book, give yourself a moment to enjoy the win. This is no small feat. You’ve moved a book from idea to reality in just one week—something most people never do.

Once you’ve celebrated, you might find yourself already thinking about your next project. That’s great. Keep the momentum going. Whether it’s a follow-up, a deeper dive, or something totally new, you’ve already proven you can do it.

15-minute sprint

Finalize your book cover, double-check your preview, and hit publish. Then take a moment to celebrate—a book made in a week is worth pausing for.

FAQ

What if I don’t have enough photos?
You probably have more than you think. A great book doesn’t need hundreds of images—just a few strong ones that tell a story. If you’re short on visuals, consider a smaller format like a zine or magazine, or pair the images you do have with writing.

What if I’m not a good writer or designer?
That’s okay. This challenge is about making, not mastering. Templates exist to help you, and your own voice is more than enough. The goal isn’t to create a perfect book—it’s to create a real one.

What if I make mistakes?
You might—and that’s part of the process. Most first books have a typo, a fuzzy image, or a layout that could be better. But they also have something far more important: momentum. You’ll improve by doing, not by waiting.

Is seven days really enough time to make a book?
Yes, as long as you keep your project small and your expectations realistic. The daily structure is designed to help you make steady progress without burning out.

How much will this cost?
That depends on the format, page count, and paper you choose. If you’re working to a budget, we’d suggest starting with a magazine or softcover trade book.

Your first book is just the beginning

You’ve just taken a project from idea to completion in one week—and that’s something to be proud of. It’s proof that you don’t need perfect timing, perfect content, or perfect skills to create something meaningful. You just need a little structure, a clear path, and the decision to start.

Whether you end up printing your book today or polishing it a bit more, you’ve done the hard part: you showed up, day after day, and turned a loose idea into a finished piece.

This challenge is meant to be repeatable. You can come back to it with your next idea, your next folder of photos, or your next creative spark.

Want a copy of the challenge checklist?
Download the printable version below and use it anytime you want to start another project. You can even share it with a friend who’s stuck on “someday.”

***

Blurb is here to empower you throughout your bookmaking journey. We provide the tools and resources you need to turn your ideas into reality, whether you’re creating your first book or your fiftieth. From easy-to-use design tools to seamless printing options, Blurb helps you create and share your work with the world. Get started now!

The post The Just Start Challenge: How to make a book in just 7 days appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Inspired by the guests they welcomed and the recipes they shared, the pair created an illustrated cookbook, Tempe and Nasi Campur, to preserve and pass on the flavors of their home.

In this conversation, the mother-daughter duo explains how their self-published cookbook organically took shape over time and has since become an integral part of the lasting connections they forge with their clients. Short of joining them in Bali, this cookbook is the next best way to get a taste of authentic Indonesian cuisine.

Tell us more about your family business and how you started working together.

Ayu began teaching cooking classes for guests visiting our island, Bali, starting from our family-run guest house. Years ago, some of our guests were very interested and amazed by the traditional dishes we served for breakfast. Indonesian cuisine offers a wide variety of flavors, with each island showcasing its own unique culinary traditions. Balinese food, in particular, is known for its bold and aromatic spices like ginger, chili, garlic, and shallots. Most dishes are prepared to complement rice, which is the staple of every meal. 

Irene has always loved cooking. Professionally, she is an illustrator and graphic designer, but she also helps manage the family business. She supports her mom as a co-host in the cooking classes.

After the cooking class, participants used to receive a plain text version of the recipes in a Word document. Irene had the idea to offer something more special, something guests could take home and actually use, a meaningful souvenir. That’s when she came up with the concept of an illustrated cookbook.

We began creating the book, and it was well-received in our classes. Later, one of our guests introduced us to Blurb, a platform for self-publishing books. It turned out to be a great fit, offering print-on-demand services that made it easy to share our cookbook with people around the world.

Why did you choose the title Tempe and Nasi Campur?

These are the recipes we cook in our cooking classes.

Tempe is a fermented soybean cake originally from Indonesia, and is a staple in the everyday meals of many Indonesians. Once considered just an affordable source of protein, it’s now gaining global recognition as a superfood thanks to its many health benefits. In our opinion, the best way to enjoy tempe is by preparing it the traditional way, just as we do in our classes and write in this cookbook.

Nasi Campur, which literally means “mixed rice,” is a dish made by serving rice with a variety of side dishes such as meats, vegetables, and sambals. It’s a beloved meal across Indonesia, something people can eat every day, and something they often miss deeply when living abroad.

Can you share more about your inspiration for the cookbook?

It all started with a love for sharing authentic flavors from our home, Bali. Through our cooking classes, we met so many wonderful people who wanted to bring a little piece of Bali back with them. This cookbook is our way of extending that experience beyond our kitchen and celebrating the stories, traditions, and tastes we grew up with.

Ayu had long dreamed of creating a cookbook. Irene suggested using artwork instead of photographs, not only to give the book a distinctive look, but also to incorporate a personal artistic touch that reflects our love for both food and creativity. That’s how this project came to life.

More people are becoming aware of the importance of eating healthy, and both Tempe and Nasi Campur are not only nutritious but also full of flavor. As Indonesians, we feel there’s still so much of our food culture that remains undiscovered by the world. Many people don’t yet realize just how rich and delicious our cuisine truly is. Through this book, we hope to share a bit of that cooking wisdom.

What was your approach to illustrating and designing the cookbook?

Both photography and illustration have their own strengths. In our case, illustration added a sentimental and personal touch.

We started by gathering inspiration and reviewing samples. We always begin with brainstorming on paper: making mood boards, sketching layouts, and thumbnailing illustrations.

Our goal was to stay true to our brand, Canang Sari, which is inspired by the heart of classic Bali. We chose a rustic watercolor style, warm color tones, and vintage-style typography to reflect that theme.

If you choose illustration, planning the layout carefully is crucial; consider how text and images interact on the page. Maintaining consistent color tones, textures, and styles throughout the book also helps create a harmonious feel. It’s important that the book stays visually beautiful but also easy to read.

For more planning, design, and layout tips, check out our blog post, How to make a cookbook. 

Besides distributing your cookbook to guests and cooking class attendees, are you distributing your cookbook more widely?

At the moment, we aim to sell our cookbook through Blurb, and we will do some promotions so that more people will buy it. We focus on promoting the cookbook to the right audience. Since it was originally created for our cooking class participants, verbal promotion has been very effective. In addition, we use our Instagram and TikTok pages to share updates and a link to the book. 

What advice would you give to others considering publishing a cookbook?

Trust the process. Since we self-published and are not professional book publishers, we considered ourselves beginners. Throughout the journey, there were mistakes and revisions, but every step was a valuable learning experience. It’s important to be patient, stay open to feedback, and enjoy the creative process.

Has publishing this cookbook benefited your cooking class business?

Publishing the cookbook has helped create a deeper connection with our audience. Some people have booked our cooking classes after reading the book, while others have sent us photos of the recipes they’ve recreated at home. It’s so heartwarming to see how our home-cooked recipes can bring joy to kitchens around the world.

If readers want to learn more about your cooking classes or follow along for your next cookbook project, where should they go?

You can follow our updates on Instagram at @canangsariexperience.bali and on TikTok @canangsariexperience. We’d love to have you join our journey!

Finally, what are each of your favorite foods to make?

Ayu: I love making Tempe Mendoan because it’s such a simple yet satisfying dish. It’s light and crunchy, but still packed with protein.

Irene: My favorite is Tempe Manis. The cooking process takes a bit longer, but as we all know, it’s worth trusting the process. The result is always delicious and brings back memories of my childhood.

How they made it: Tempe and Nasi Campur

• Format: Softcover trade book
• Size: 8×10 in, 20 x 25 cm
• Paper type: Standard color
• Tool: PDF Uploader

 ***

Do you have some recipes you’ve been meaning to collect and share? With Blurb, making your own cookbook can be easier than making dinner! Well, maybe not quite. But let us help you get started today.

The post Tempe and Nasi Campur: Behind the Book with Ayu Martiasih and Irene Vania appeared first on Blurb Blog.

The post Terms & Conditions appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Zines are fast, scrappy, and unapologetic. They’re self-published booklets about whatever lights you up—music, memories, memes, or the mysteries of the universe. The only rule? There are no rules.

To celebrate Zine Month, we’re launching a quick-fire challenge:

Make a new zine between July 11 and 25, 2025, and you could get it printed for free.*

Here’s how to join in:

1. Make a zine using BookWright or your own design tools.
2. Leave a comment on our Instagram challenge post with your zine’s title and a short summary.
3. Don’t forget to tag @BlurbBooks and use #BlurbZineMonth2025 and #Giveaway.
   

That’s it. You’re in.

*Tell us you finished by July 25, 2025, at 11:59:59 pm PT. We’ll pick twenty (20) winners and direct message all winners with a coupon to print and ship their zine for free (up to 15 USD total).

***

OFFICIAL RULES (“Official Rules”)

NO PURCHASE NECESSARY TO ENTER, WIN OR CLAIM PRIZES. A PURCHASE OR PAYMENT WILL NOT INCREASE AN ENTRANT’S CHANCES OF WINNING. THE PROMOTION IS IN NO WAY SPONSORED, ENDORSED, ADMINISTERED BY, OR ASSOCIATED WITH FACEBOOK OR INSTAGRAM.

THESE OFFICIAL RULES CONTAIN AN ARBITRATION AGREEMENT, WHICH REQUIRES THAT ALL DISPUTES BE RESOLVED SOLELY BY BINDING ARBITRATION, AND ENTRANTS AGREE TO ONLY PURSUE CLAIMS AGAINST SPONSOR AND SPONSOR ENTITIES AND/OR SEEK RELIEF ON AN INDIVIDUAL BASIS, AND ENTRANTS WAIVE THE ABILITY TO BRING CLAIMS IN A CLASS ACTION FORMAT, OR AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR REPRESENTATIVE ACTION OR PROCEEDING.

VOID WHERE PROHIBITED OR RESTRICTED BY LAW.

Zine Month Challenge (“Promotion”) is sponsored by RPI Print, Inc., (“Sponsor”), 116th Street Suite 161, Tukwila, Washington 98168.

1. PROMOTION PERIOD: The Promotion begins on July 11, 2025 at 12:01 AM Pacific Standard Time (“PST”) and ends on July 25, 2025, at 11:59:59 PM PST (“Promotion Period”). The Sponsor’s computer is the Promotion’s official clock.

2. ELIGIBILITY: This Promotion is offered only to individuals who are at least eighteen (18) years old at the time of entry and are legal residents of the fifty United States or the District of Columbia. Employees of Sponsor, and any of its owners, parent companies, affiliates, directors, subsidiaries, franchisees, representatives, advertising, promotion and production agencies, agents (collectively, the “Promotion Entities”) and their immediate family members (i.e., spouse, parent, child, sibling, and the “steps” of each) and persons living in the same household of each (whether related or not) are not eligible to participate in the Promotion. Void where prohibited or restricted by law. All federal, state and local laws apply. Participation constitutes entrant’s full and unconditional agreement to these Official Rules and Sponsor’s decisions, which are final and binding in all matters related to the Promotion. Winning a prize is contingent upon fulfilling all requirements set forth herein. Entrants and/or potential winners may be required to provide proof of identification and eligibility as required by Sponsor. If it is discovered or suspected that an entrant has registered or attempted to register for the Promotion using multiple identities, all of that entrant’s entries will be declared null and void and any prize such entrant might have been entitled to win will not be awarded to and may be revoked from such entrant. Use of any automated system or any like methods to participate in the Promotion is prohibited and will result in disqualification of any entrant attempting such use.

3. HOW TO ENTER: To participate, entrants must complete the following steps during the Promotion Period: (i) Create a new zine (as defined herein) and post the name and summary to social media as instructed during the Promotion Period. For purposes of this Promotion, a zine will consist of a magazine on any topic of your choosing (the “zine”) that can be printed by Blurb. In order to enter, you must create a new zine using either Blurb’s free software (BookWright) or your own software (ii) and share the title and a summary of the zine on Instagram via comments on a Blurb post using the hashtags #BlurbZineMonth2025 and #Giveaway, and tag @BlurbBooks, all during the Promotion Period (an “Entry” or “Zine Entry”). 

The Entry must meet the following “Entry Guidelines”: (i) the Entry must not include text or subject matter that is deemed by the Sponsor to be obscene, profane, pornographic, libelous or otherwise objectionable; (ii) the Entry must not disparage Sponsor or any other person or entity; (iii) the Entry must not contain material that promotes bigotry, racism, hatred or harm against any group or individual or promotes discrimination based on race, gender, religion, nationality, disability, sexual orientation, or age; and (iv) the Entry must not contain material that is unlawful, in violation of, or contrary to the laws or regulations in any state. (v) Each entrant’s social media account must be public to participate in the Promotion.

IMPORTANT:  Entries must tag @BlurbBooks AND include #BlurbZineMonth2025 and #Giveaway in the Instagram comment in order to be valid. Entries that do not include this account and hashtag will be disqualified and ineligible to receive a prize.

Limit: one (1) Entry per person per Promotion Post during the Promotion Period. If it is discovered or suspected, in Sponsor’s sole discretion, that an entrant receives or attempts to receive more than the stated number of Entries, all of that entrant’s Entries, in Sponsor’s sole discretion, may be declared null and void and any prize(s) he/she might have been entitled to will not be awarded to and may be revoked from him/her. In the event of a dispute as to the identity of an entrant, the Entry will be declared made by the primary account holder of the account associated with the email address designated in the Email Entry or in social media account used to enter the Promotion for the Zine Entry. The “primary account holder” is the natural person assigned an email address by an Internet access provider, online service provider, or other organization responsible for assigning email addresses for the domain associated with the submitted address. The potential winner may be required to show proof of being the holder of the email address used to enter or designated in the social media account used to enter the Promotion.

Submission Content Permissions and Restrictions

Permissions:
Entrants and Winners must have permission from any recognizable individuals who appear (or whose name(s) appears) in a Zine Entry and to grant the rights set forth herein. Minors’ images and names may only be included in a Zine Entry if entrant is their parent or legal guardian. If requested, entrant must be able to provide such permissions or proof in a form acceptable to Sponsor.

Content Restrictions:
Entrants’ and Winners’ Zines must comply with the Blurb Terms & Conditions located at www.blurb.com/terms, which are incorporated herein by reference. Without limiting the foregoing, Entrant’s Zine may not include “Prohibited Content” as defined in Section 11.1 of such Terms & Conditions.

Sponsor’s Use of Entries: By posting, commenting, sharing, or submitting an Entry entrant consents to and hereby grants to Sponsor a royalty-free, irrevocable, perpetual, non-exclusive license to use, reproduce, modify, publish, create derivative works from, and display the Entry, in whole or in part, on a worldwide basis, and to incorporate it into other works, in any form, media or technology now known or later developed, including for promotional or marketing purposes. Entrant also agrees that Sponsor may tag Entrant and/or Entrant’s Entry on social media. If requested, entrant will sign any documentation that may be required for Sponsor or its designees to make use of the non-exclusive rights entrant is granting to use the Entry. Sponsor reserves the right to remove (and to require that entrant remove) and to disqualify entries that are off-topic, violate the Content Restrictions, violate these Official Rules, or for which a DMCA notice or other infringement claim is received.

4. PRIZE: Twenty (20) winners will each receive a coupon to print and ship your Zine for free. Approximate Retail Value (“ARV”): $15 (ARV for printing a Zine and economy shipping) (the “Prize”). The coupon has no cash value and expires November 30, 2025. The coupon is subject to standard coupon terms and conditions, can only be redeemed at www.blurb.com, and cannot be combined with other promotion codes or gift cards. Printing portion of prize is for one (1) copy of a short premium magazine size 8.5×11 in (22×28 cm). Shipping component of prize is economy shipping to an address in the fifty United States or District of Columbia. Prize must be redeemed in full by November 30, 2025. The total ARV of all available prizes in the Promotion is $300.00. Prizes will be provided only to verified winners. There is no substitution for any Prize or any portion of a Prize, except Sponsor who reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to substitute a prize or portion of prize of comparable value. Prizes are not transferable or redeemable for cash, except in the sole discretion of Sponsor. All Prize details are at Sponsor’s sole discretion. Incidental expenses and all other costs and expenses which are not specifically listed as part of a Prize in these Official Rules and which may be associated with the award, acceptance, receipt, and use of all or any portion of the awarded Prize are solely the responsibility of the Prize winner. All federal, state, and local taxes associated with the receipt or use of the Prize are solely the responsibility of the Prize winners. The actual value of prizes is subject to price fluctuations in the consumer marketplace based on, among other things, any gap in time between the date the ARV is estimated for purposes of these Official Rules and the date the prize is awarded or redeemed. In such a case, winner will not receive difference between actual and ARV. In no event will more prizes than are stated in these Official Rules be awarded. Odds of winning depend on the number of eligible Entries received during the Promotion Period.

5. SELECTION AND NOTIFICATION OF WINNER: On or around July 26, 2025, twenty (20) winners will be selected in a random drawing of all eligible entrants (each a “Winner”). All decisions of Sponsor are final and binding on all entrants. The Entrants who have been selected to potentially receive a prize will be notified on or after July 26, 2025 by direct message on Instagram.

Before being declared a winner the potential winner may be required to execute an Affidavit of Eligibility, Liability Release, tax acknowledgment, and, except where prohibited, a Publicity Release (“Affidavit”), in which case potential winner must return a fully executed and notarized Affidavit to the Sponsor or its authorized designee within seven (7) calendar days from the date it is sent to the potential winner or the Prize may (in Sponsor’s sole discretion) be forfeited. If a potential winner is disqualified, found to be ineligible or not in compliance with these Official Rules, declines to accept a prize, or in the event that the potential winner fails to return an executed Affidavit within the seven (7) calendar day deadline (if applicable), the Prize may be forfeited. If a Prize is forfeited, the Prize may be awarded to an alternate winner in a random drawing from among the remaining entries. Sponsor shall not be held responsible for any delays in awarding a prize for any reason. If, after three (3) good faith attempts to award the Prizes to potential winners, Sponsor is unable to award any Prize, such Prize may not be awarded.

ALL FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL TAXES IMPOSED ON THE ACCEPTANCE OF A PRIZE ARE SOLELY THE RESPONSIBILITY OF WINNER. Sponsor will attempt to notify the potential winner as set forth above, but Sponsor is not responsible for any undelivered messages or other communications, including without limitation messages or other communications that are not received because of a winner’s privacy or spam filter settings which may divert any Promotion messages or other communications, including any winner notification message or other communication. Prizes that are unclaimed, unredeemed, or returned as undeliverable will not be awarded. All other costs and expenses not expressly set forth herein shall be solely the winner’s responsibility. Promotion Entities shall not be held responsible for any delays in awarding the Prize for any reason. Prizes will only be awarded to verified winners.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: By participating in this Promotion entrants (and if 18+ but a minor in their state of residence, their parents or legal guardians) agree that the Promotion Entities, and their respective affiliates, parents, subsidiaries, representatives, consultants, contractors, legal counsel, advertising, public relations, promotional, fulfillment and marketing agencies, website providers, Web masters and their respective officers, directors, employees, representatives, shareholders, designees and agents (“Released Parties”) are not responsible for lost, late, incomplete, stolen, misdirected, postage due, or undeliverable notifications or mail; or for any computer, telephone, satellite, cable, network, electronic or Internet hardware or software malfunctions, failures, connections or availability; or garbled, corrupt or jumbled transmissions, service provider/Internet/website/use net accessibility, availability or traffic congestion; or any technical, mechanical, printing, or typographical or other error; or unauthorized human intervention; or the loss, access, or acquisition without authorization, or incorrect or inaccurate capture of registration information; or the failure to capture, or loss or disclosure of, any such information. The Released Parties are not responsible for any incorrect or inaccurate information, whether caused by any website users, tampering, hacking or by any of the equipment or programming associated with or utilized in the Promotion and assume no responsibility for any error, omission, interruption, deletion, defect, delay in operation or transmission, communications line failure, technical error, theft or destruction or unauthorized access or acquisition of the website, any Promotion-related website(s), or entrant information. The Released Parties are not responsible for any injury or damage, whether personal or property, to participants or to any person’s computer related to or resulting from participating in the Promotion and/or accepting or using a prize. The Released Parties shall not be responsible or liable for entries that are entered by any automated computer, program, mechanism or device, for any entries in excess of the stated limit or for entries that are late, forged, lost, misplaced, misdirected, tampered with, incomplete, deleted, damaged, garbled or otherwise not in compliance with the Official Rules, and all such entries may, in Sponsor’s sole discretion, be disqualified. If, for any reason, the Promotion is not capable of running as planned, Sponsor reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to cancel, terminate, modify or suspend the Promotion and/or proceed with the Promotion, including the selection of winner in a manner it deems fair and reasonable including the selection of the winner from among eligible Entries received prior to such cancellation, termination, modification or suspension. In no event will more prizes be awarded than are stated in these Official Rules. If for any reason, including but not limited to an administrative, printing, production, computer or other error or due to technical difficulties or incorrect announcements of any kind, more winning messages are distributed, or more prizes are claimed than are intended to be awarded according to these Official Rules, the intended prizes will be awarded among all verified prize claims received based on the judging criteria stated in these Official Rules. This Promotion is subject to all federal, state, and local laws and regulations.

By entering the Promotion, each entrant (and if a minor, his/her parent or legal guardian) agrees: (i) to be bound by these Official Rules and by all applicable laws and by the decisions of Sponsor, which shall be binding and final; (ii) to waive any rights to claim ambiguity with respect to these Official Rules; (iii) to waive all of his or her rights to bring any claim, action or proceeding against any of the Released Parties in connection with the Promotion; and (iv) to forever and irrevocably agree to release and hold harmless each of the Released Parties from any and all claims, lawsuits, judgments, causes of action, proceedings, demands, fines, penalties, liability, costs and expenses (including, without limitation, reasonable outside attorneys’ fees) that may arise in connection with: (a) the Promotion, including but not limited to any Promotion-related activity or element thereof, and the entrant’s Entry, including any information provided, participation or inability to participate in the Promotion, (b) the violation of any third-party privacy, data security, personal, publicity or proprietary rights, (c) typographical or printing errors in these Official Rules or any Promotion materials, (d) acceptance, attendance at, receipt, travel related to, participation in, delivery of, possession, defects in, use, non-use, misuse, inability to use, loss, damage, destruction, negligence or willful misconduct in connection with the use of a prize (or any component thereof), (e) any change in the prizing due to unavailability or due to reasons beyond Sponsor’s control, including but not limited to by reason of any acts of God, any action(s), regulation(s), order(s) or request(s) by any governmental or quasi-governmental entity (whether or not such action(s), regulation(s), order(s) or request(s) prove(s) to be invalid), equipment failure, threatened or actual terrorist acts, earthquake, war, fire, flood, explosion, unusually severe weather, hurricane, embargo, labor dispute or strike (whether legal or illegal), labor or material shortage, transportation interruption of any kind, work slow-down, civil disturbance, insurrection, riot or any other cause beyond any of the Released Parties’ control, or as otherwise permitted in these Official Rules, (f) any interruptions in or postponement, cancellation or modification of the Promotion, (g) human error, (h) incorrect, unauthorized, or inaccurate transcription, receipt or transmission of any part of any Entry , (i) any technical malfunctions or unavailability of the website or any telephone network, computer system, computer online system, mobile device, computer timing and/or dating mechanism, computer equipment, software, or Internet service provider, or mail service utilized by any of the Released Parties or by an entrant, (j) interruption or inability to access the Promotion, the website or any other Promotion-related websites or any online service via the Internet due to hardware or software compatibility problems, (k) any damage to entrant’s (or any third person’s) equipment used to access the Promotion and/or its contents related to or resulting from any part of the Promotion, (l) any lost/delayed data transmissions, omissions, interruptions, defects, and/or any other errors or malfunctions, (m) any late, lost, stolen, mutilated, misdirected, delayed, garbled, corrupted, destroyed, incomplete, undeliverable or damaged Entries, (n) any wrongful, negligent, or unauthorized act or omission on the part of any of the Released Parties, (o) lost, late, stolen, misdirected, damaged or destroyed prizing (or any element thereof), or (p) the negligence or willful misconduct by entrant.

Without limiting the foregoing, everything regarding this Promotion, including the website and prize components, are provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or non-infringement. Some jurisdictions may not allow the limitations or exclusions of liability for incidental or consequential damages or exclusions of implied warranties, so some of the above limitations or exclusions may not apply. Check local laws for any restrictions or limitations regarding these limitations or exclusions.

7. DISPUTES AND ARBITRATION; CLASS ACTION WAIVER: This Promotion is governed by, and will be construed in accordance with, the laws of the state of Washington without regard to any choice of law or conflicts of law rules, and the forum and venue for any dispute shall be in Seattle, Washington.

IF THE CONTROVERSY OR CLAIM IS NOT OTHERWISE RESOLVED THROUGH DIRECT DISCUSSIONS OR MEDIATION, IT SHALL THEN BE RESOLVED BY FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION ADMINISTERED BY THE AMERICAN ARBITRATION ASSOCIATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS ARBITRATION RULES AND PROCEDURES OR SUBSEQUENT VERSIONS THEREOF (“AAA RULES”). THE REMEDY FOR ANY CLAIM SHALL BE LIMITED TO ACTUAL DAMAGES, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL ANY PARTY BE ENTITLED TO RECOVER PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR HAVE DAMAGES MULTIPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCREASED, INCLUDING ATTORNEYS’ FEES OR OTHER SUCH RELATED COSTS OF BRINGING A CLAIM, OR TO RESCIND THIS AGREEMENT OR SEEK INJUNCTIVE OR ANY OTHER EQUITABLE RELIEF.

ENTRANTS AGREE THAT THE RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF ANY ENTRANT AND/OR PROMOTION ENTITIES AND/OR ANY OTHER PARTY SHALL BE RESOLVED INDIVIDUALLY, WITHOUT RESORT TO ANY FORM OF CLASS ACTION, AND ENTRANTS WAIVE THE ABILITY TO BRING CLAIMS IN A CLASS ACTION FORMAT, OR AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR REPRESENTATIVE ACTION OR PROCEEDING.

ANY DEMAND FOR ARBITRATION MUST BE FILED WITHIN ONE (1) YEAR FROM THE END OF THE PROMOTION PERIOD, OR THE CAUSE OF ACTION SHALL BE FOREVER BARRED.

8. PRIVACY POLICY: Any information collected during an entrant’s participation in the Promotion will be collected by Sponsor or designee and used by Sponsor, affiliates, designees, agents and marketers for purposes of the proper administration and fulfillment of the Promotion as described in these Official Rules and in accordance with Sponsor’s Privacy Policy as stated at https://www.blurb.com/privacy.

9. PUBLICITY RIGHTS: By participating in the Promotion and/or accepting a prize, each entrant (and if a minor, his/her parent or legal guardian’s) grants Sponsor and Sponsor’s designee the perpetual right to use his or her name, social media user name (handle), biographical information, photos and/or likeness, and statements for promotion, trade, commercial, advertising and publicity purposes on a worldwide basis, at any time or times, in all media now known or hereafter discovered including without limitation live television, social media, and on the World Wide Web and Internet, without notice, review or approval and without additional compensation, except where prohibited by law.

10. GENERAL: Any attempted form of participation in this Promotion other than as described herein is void. If it is discovered or suspected in Sponsor’s sole and absolute discretion that an entrant has registered or attempted to register more than once using multiple email addresses, accounts, multiple identities, proxy servers or like methods, all of that entrant’s entries will be declared null and void, and that Entrant will be ineligible to win a prize. Also, if it is discovered that any entrant attempts to receive additional entries in excess of the stated limitation, that entrant may, in Sponsor’s sole discretion, be disqualified from the Promotion. Sponsor reserves the right to disqualify any individual found, in its sole opinion, to be tampering with the operation of the Promotion, to be acting in violation of these Official Rules or to be acting in an unsportsmanlike manner or with the intent to disrupt the normal operation of a Promotion. Any use of robotic, automatic, macro, programmed, third party or like methods to participate in the Promotion will void any attempted participation affected by such methods and the disqualification of the individual utilizing the same. CAUTION AND WARNING: ANY ATTEMPT TO DELIBERATELY DAMAGE ANY WEBSITE OR TO UNDERMINE THE LEGITIMATE OPERATION OF THIS PROMOTION IS A VIOLATION OF CRIMINAL AND CIVIL LAWS. SHOULD SUCH AN ATTEMPT BE MADE, SPONSOR RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SEEK DAMAGES OR OTHER REMEDIES FROM ANY SUCH PERSON(S) RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ATTEMPT TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. If any provision of these Official Rules or any word, phrase, clause, sentence, or other portion thereof should be held unenforceable or invalid for any reason, then that provision or portion thereof shall be modified or deleted in such manner as to render the remaining provisions of these Official Rules valid and enforceable. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of these Official Rules or the prize documents will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision. Sponsor’s interpretation of these Official Rules is final and binding in all matters related to the Promotion. Sponsor or Released Party’s failure to enforce any term of these Official Rules shall not constitute a waiver of that provision and such provision shall remain in full force and effect. All Promotion Entries and/or materials submitted become the property of Sponsor and will not be returned. In the event of any conflict with any Promotion details contained in these Official Rules and Promotion details contained in any promotional materials (including but not limited to point of sale, television and print advertising, promotional packaging, social media, email communications, and other promotional media), the details of the Promotion as set forth in these Official Rules shall prevail.

11. SOCIAL MEDIA RELEASE AND DISCLAIMER. Each entrant acknowledges and agrees that this Promotion is in no way sponsored, endorsed or administered by, or associated with Instagram. By entering the Promotion each entrant hereby releases and agrees to hold harmless these entities completely from any liability in connection with the Promotion. Any questions, comments or complaints regarding the Promotion should be directed to Sponsor and not these social media platforms. By participating via any applicable social media platform, Entrants are also subject to such platform’s terms of use.

12. TO RECEIVE WINNERS LIST OR OFFICIAL RULES: The Official Rules (available during the Promotion Period) and Winners List (available after winner is confirmed) will be available on Blurb.com for a period of sixty (60) days after the close of the Promotion Period.

The post Zine Month Challenge appeared first on Blurb Blog.

I hear this at least once a week, typically when someone sees me reading and decides to let me know that even though they like and appreciate reading, they just don’t have time for it.

Upon further questioning, it becomes clear that most often, they do have time. It’s that they choose not to read or choose not to prioritize it. There are many reasons for this, but the primary reason, at least from my perspective, is that they are watchers, not doers. It feels like we are increasingly transforming into a culture of passive observation over active engagement. This includes a wide range of activities, not just reading.

Of course, there are only so many hours in the day, but what will you do with them? I read between 60 and 80 books a year, and when I share this with strangers, they often respond with disbelief. “It’s simple,” I tell them. “Don’t surf the web, and don’t do social media. Suddenly, you will find you have all the time you need.” This is where the excuses begin. Cat videos, gear reviews, and last night’s sports highlights are all “critical updates” that can’t be avoided. Watching, not doing.

The difference between doers and watchers

How does this impact photographers and bookmakers? The best creators are doers. Doers are proactive risk-takers who act, create change, and manage setbacks. Doers are also the ones setting the trends because their actions allow them to test and experiment, breaking the mold of what’s been done before. Doers are goal-oriented and typically produce in both quality and volume. Many doers are proof that quality often comes from volume.

Watchers, by contrast, are passive observers who flip from channel to channel, app to app, screen to screen, all without truly engaging with much of anything or taking any real action. You see them on planes and in airports, coffee shops, museums, libraries, restaurants, movies, schools, on public transit, beaches, park benches, at the DMV, and almost every other location. Open Instagram, scroll, close Instagram. Open TikTok, scroll, close TikTok. Open Facebook, scroll, close Facebook. Email. Twitter. Slack. Discord. Wherever else a notification might be hiding. 

Repeat for hours, days, weeks at a time. On a recent flight to Japan, I watched in disbelief (yes, I too am a watcher sometimes) as the person next to me scrolled through TikTok for 12 hours straight.

YouTube is perhaps the most potent kryptonite for watchers. Although YouTube can be a remarkable educational tool, it can also be the worst nightmare for the passive watcher who bounces from video to video, wasting incredible amounts of time that could go toward doing instead of watching others doing (or watching others talking about doing). 

Photography, the field I know best, is a minefield for watchers. Gear reviews are at the height of popularity, but these films talk about everything except using the gear, everything except photography. Many of the watchers of these films bounce from review to review with no intention of ever buying or using the equipment. The doers are out using the gear they already have. Their focus is not on the camera. Their focus is on the work that comes from using the camera.

When I was very young, my cousin built a canoe with a sail mount and sailed from the top of the Ohio River to South America. The trip took several years. He was robbed numerous times, nearly died in a hurricane, and had countless other mishaps and adventures. Until recently, I never had a chance to ask him about his preparation. In my mind, I imagined him spending months, if not years, poring over maps to grasp the extreme level of logistics. When I called and asked about his preparation, he replied, “I think I had a paper map. But really, I just started sailing. I’m not much for preparation.” Doer.

The Internet is an incredible place. It has everything. With the Internet at our fingertips, a trip like my cousin’s runs the risk of never happening because of the amount of material one could watch before departure. Which canoe to buy? What sails to use? What paddle is most efficient? How to DIY that rig? What route to take? What kind of clothing works best in the tropics? Which insect repellent? What are the three top things to do in any city along the way, or all cities along the way? If that weren’t enough, you could just stay at home and watch all the films from others who have made similar voyages.

Watchers risk stagnation, erosion of critical thinking skills, and apathy toward the world itself. Too much watching and slowly, the world outside begins to feel slow and boring. Comfort and ease become driving factors. Next comes a lack of initiative, originality, and innovation. 

Photographers talk about what piece of gear to buy next, but haven’t used the gear they already own. Bookmakers fail to hit “print.” Instead, they search for new companies, papers, or cover options. They watch films about which software is best. They watch films about what might be coming soon in the book world, waiting and watching the world go by.

Break the cycle right now

The platforms that allow us to watch are some of the most incredible systems ever designed. They are extremely difficult to turn away from, but if you want or need to, I have a suggestion. Start now. Set an alarm for tomorrow morning, one hour earlier than usual. When that alarm sounds, do not reach for your phone. 

Do something. A run, a walk, a ride—maybe even open up Blurb BookWright and start to design. If you can’t do an hour, try 30 minutes. Try reading instead of scrolling. A half hour of reading per day means at least a book a week. A half hour of page design adds up, and before long, your own book will emerge before you.

The key is breaking the cycle, pattern, or routine of choosing to watch as the first option. Doing takes effort and a plan. It’s like exercising, you don’t get in shape right away. It could take weeks or months, but the payoff is tangible. 

Personal experience, professional gains, tightly edited groups of photographs, and printed books stacked nicely on the bookshelf. That’s at the end. Along the way, you’ll have a first-person, real-time life. The kind that only approaches you when you put down the screen, open the door, and take that first step into the light.

So what are you waiting for? Let’s get started.

***

Dan Milnor is a professional photographer and Blurb’s creative ambassador. He shares his photography and bookmaking expertise here monthly. Ready to make your first book? Blurb is here to help. We’ll get you set up and printing your work in no time!

The post Hit the Books with Dan Milnor: Do, Don’t Watch appeared first on Blurb Blog.

But even as I hold respect for powerful single images, ultimately, a set of disconnected images leaves me wanting more. Random images, on their own, do not tell a story. And as they say in entertainment, business, marketing, and personal communication: Story is king. 

Moving from scattered, street-style frames to narrative photography is a natural evolution—but that doesn’t mean it happens on its own. Moving from the one to the coherent many requires changing the way we photograph.

My shift from photojournalism to documentary photography

My initial foray into photography was in photojournalism. My goal was to become a war photographer. I had only a superficial understanding of war photography, but that was my original, uninformed intention. All of that changed when I got shot at while covering a story during the final year of my studies. One minute, I was standing and taking pictures; the next, I was cowering behind a car as incoming rounds pinged off the sheet metal around me. I didn’t take a single photograph.

My photography up to that point had been the photojournalistic equivalent of street photography. Single images about a wide assortment of people, places, and things. But when the gunfire ended and the scene around me returned to normal, my question was: How could this have happened?

At that very moment, I realized I didn’t want to be a photojournalist. I wanted to be a documentary photographer. My primary interest was not in the shooting itself, standing amidst single, whizzing bullets. I was much more interested in the scope of interconnected systemic failures that could have led to such an event. 

From single shots to complex narratives

In this case, family structures, gun control, law enforcement, the legal system, and socioeconomic policies all combined to precipitate this singular moment. I was not driven to capture only the what; I was compelled to understand the how and the why. Such a complex story could not be explained in a single image. It required far more. I changed my focus to becoming a documentary photographer, that is, someone working on long-form projects who would deliver photographic essays comprised of dozens of photographs (and often, accompanying text).

There was a casual freedom in street photography. I might have been tied to a place with my street-style imagery, but there was no deeper narrative or overarching theme. There were the “Streets of Paris,” or the “Streets of New York,” but that was the extent. This feeling of only going surface level disappeared when I began working in the documentary tradition. Telling stories with images required me to create pictures that weren’t necessarily aesthetically beautiful, but were informational and could help the reader delve deeper, then transition from one chapter of the story to the next.

The range of what I needed to photograph expanded dramatically. Suddenly, I needed to make portraits, urban landscapes, intimate close-quarters, fly-on-the-wall style, wide-angle reportage, and details of everything around me. Transitioning to documentary work showed me how little I knew about photography and how little I knew about telling stories with my camera.

I continued to do newspaper assignments, which helped keep my single-picture story skills honed and ready to deploy at any moment. But my passion was spent working on longer-form projects, tackling more complex issues. Two years after switching to documentary photography, I still felt something was missing. I improved as a photographer, editor, and storyteller, but I continued to present my work with a single page of color transparencies. Editors required a loupe and a light table to see my imagery, and I was continually surprised how many did not have these essential tools.

How the photography book changed my approach

Enter the photography book. A fellow photographer purchased a computer and the first generation of desktop inkjet printers. We began designing our work into spreads like we saw in our favorite magazines. We placed the spreads on the floor and walked around them, attempting to determine the correct sequencing. Eventually, we laminated and bound the spreads into small books. This experience changed my photographic life.

Making a photo book was instrumental in helping me become a better documentary photographer because it showed me precisely what I had and didn’t have with my story. As I built the book, I saw glaring holes in my narrative. I saw strong beginnings and weak endings. I saw muddled middle passages where a viewer could easily get lost. The books showed me the importance of writing, typography, and page design.

Very soon, every project or assignment I did was completed in book form. Over three hundred photo books later, I’m still doing the same thing. My time limitations are quite different now, and I no longer do assignments, but I always self-assign the task of encapsulating a shoot by putting it in print. Almost all of my publications are created in Blurb BookWright or the Blurb plugin for Adobe InDesign. Even small shoots end up as softcover trade books or magazines. Occasionally, when I have the time to produce a more complete project, I will create a hardcover photo book or even a layflat book like I did with my recent trip to Antarctica. (Take a peek at Dan’s book here.) 

Today, when people ask me what kind of photography I do, regardless of what my primary focus is at the time, my answer is always: I’m a documentary photographer. Once you decide to study the world in detail, there is no turning back, no way to turn off the heightened sense of curiosity and observation. 

Despite this ode to the tradition of documentary, I do believe that all photography is good photography. Whether you decide to focus your life on portraiture, landscapes, street, or documentary photography, the important part is the practice, patience, and the will to put your stamp on whatever story you are attempting to tell. 

An older colleague told me, “As a photographer, you will live in one year what the average person lives in ten.” I am lucky enough to say from experience that this statement is true. Viewing the world through a square or rectangle brings an intimacy and insight into your surroundings that few will ever know. Embrace this privilege and see where it takes you.

***

Dan Milnor is a professional photographer and Blurb’s creative ambassador. He shares his photography and bookmaking expertise here every single month. Are you ready to turn your photography into a photo book? Join us at Blurb.

The post Hit the Books with Dan Milnor: From Capturing Moments to Telling Stories appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Here we will explore how self-publishing can serve as a powerful tool to help you navigate these transitions and ultimately help you find new, fulfilling, and authentic creative and professional paths.

Step one: Embrace change and transition

The emotional landscape of transitioning careers is rich and varied. Feelings of fear may tug at your heart, while excitement flutters in your chest. Uncertainty can cast shadows of doubt in your mind, while grief lingers as you let go of what once was. It’s essential to acknowledge these emotions and understand that they are a natural part of the journey.

And career changes are just one aspect of a broader landscape of life transitions. Relocating to a new city or experiencing shifts in personal relationships can significantly influence your career decisions. Perhaps there are even larger forces at play, far beyond your control: technological innovations, new political priorities, or seemingly stable institutions suddenly succumbing to starkly different realities. All of these can force change upon you more abruptly than you could have foreseen. Whether for big or small reasons, recognizing the interconnectedness of these forces can help you frame your career pivot within a larger context. 

The only constant is change. The question is: What can you do to feel some agency?

Adopt a growth mindset

Although a sudden shift can make you feel like hard-won past experiences are simply out the window, everything you have done up until now is cumulative. It might not seem like it at the moment, but taking a step back will allow you to leverage your varied experiences as you forge your new path. 

Difficult as they may first appear, each transition presents an opportunity to reassess your goals and align them with your evolving identity. Life transitions are not obstacles but rather gateways to learning and growth.

Adopting a growth mindset invites you to view change as an opportunity for self-discovery and reinvention. Each step forward, no matter how small, paves the way for positive transformation. When you embrace change, you open yourself up to new experiences, skills, and perspectives. The journey toward your new career can be an exciting adventure that leads you to uncharted territories of personal fulfillment and creativity.

Step two: Identify your transferable skills

Transitioning to a new career requires a deep dive into your skill set. It’s essential to look beyond your formal work experience and recognize the wealth of skills you’ve developed through hobbies, volunteer work, and life experiences. Whether you’ve honed your abilities through creative endeavors, community service, or personal projects, these skills are valuable assets in blazing a new trail.

Take inventory of the unique talents you have cultivated. You may be surprised at how transferable these skills are to entirely new industries. If this seems daunting at first, sit down and do a formal skill assessment activity. It can help you identify your strengths and transferable skills. 

To begin, consider a few of the following activities:

• Self-reflection questions: Ask yourself what tasks you enjoy most, what challenges energize you, and what accomplishments make you proud.
• Skills inventories: Create a list of your skills, categorizing them into hard skills (technical abilities like data analysis) and soft skills (like communication, leadership, empathy). Cast an especially wide net at first, and then you can narrow it down over time.
• Personality assessments: Utilize tools like the Myers-Briggs Type Indicator or the StrengthsFinder assessment (there are good, free versions of both online) to uncover insights into your natural talents and inclinations. Remember: a quick, multiple-choice assessment should not feel like an ironclad box that will determine your future. Rather, it can point you toward renewed perspectives on your strengths and tendencies.

These exercises can pave the way for deeper self-awareness and guide you toward career paths or creative outlets that resonate with your authentic self.

Connect your skills to passions

Once you’ve identified your skills, the next step is connecting them to your interests and values. Reflect on what excites you and what deeply matters to you. This alignment will help you identify potential careers or creative pursuits that not only utilize your skills but also reflect your passions.

Consider crafting a visual mind map to map out your skills, interests, and values. This creative exercise can help you visualize potential career trajectories and clarify your goals.

To create a visual mind map, start with a blank sheet of paper or a digital tool like MindMeister or Canva. In the center, write your main theme, such as “Career Aspirations.” From there, branch out with primary categories like “Skills,” “Interests,” and “Values.” Use different colors for each branch to enhance visual appeal and engagement. Then, delve deeper by adding sub-branches with specific examples—e.g. under “Skills,” list particular skills you possess. Don’t hesitate to incorporate images, icons, or even doodles to represent your thoughts more vividly. This method not only organizes your ideas, but also sparks inspiration as you explore untapped possibilities.
More examples of mind mapping can be found in Stefan G. Bucher’s book, 344 Questions, shown below.

Translate your skills to other industries

Reframing your skills for a new career can feel intimidating at first, but it’s a crucial step in your pivot. Start by evaluating how your skills apply to a new, desired field. For example, if you have strong project management skills from a previous job in event planning, consider how these skills can translate into managing projects at a tech startup or marketing agency. Perhaps you managed the social media accounts of a large corporation. What if you used these skills to help raise awareness about a cause you feel deeply about? Or what if the product you were selling, instead of being produced by others, was your own creative output?

Step three: Document your journey

As you embark on the transformative path of transitioning careers, maintaining a record of your experiences becomes vital. Documentation not only serves as a means of self-reflection but also acts as an invaluable archive of your evolving identity. By capturing your thoughts, emotions, and significant milestones, you create a catalog and chronicle of your growth and insights throughout your journey. This process will not only help you clarify your goals but also provide tangible evidence of your progress as you move forward.

Journal for self-reflection

Throughout your career transition, keeping a journal can be a powerful tool for self-reflection and creative confidence. Document your thoughts, feelings, and experiences. Journaling encourages clarity and can illuminate patterns in your behavior, helping to reveal insights about your evolving identity. 

To start you off, here are a few journaling prompts to spark reflection:

• What fears or uncertainties are surfacing as I embark on this transition?
• What past experiences have prepared me for this new chapter?
• How do I wish to feel at this stage of my career?

If these feel too narrow or directive, we can also recommend the practice of morning pages, adopted from Julia Cameron’s timeless book The Artist’s Way. Try it, it’s quite simple!

• Buy a simple notebook. No need to get fancy.
• Put it next to your bed, alongside a pen (better than a pencil, you’ll see).
• First thing when you wake up in the morning—yes, before opening your phone—start writing! No prompt, just brain dump. 
• Fill three pages. You can describe your dreams, vent about anxieties, work through a creative idea, or just see where your thoughts take you. Don’t go back and edit. No erasing (hence the pen). If three pages is difficult at first, end once 30 minutes have passed.

That’s it! At first, it might not sound like much. But if you make a practice of it, you’ll see that starting your day with three pages of writing has a magical way of clarifying your thinking for the rest of the day. We can pretty much guarantee you’ll be left feeling better than 30 minutes of scrolling!

Express your creativity

In addition to journaling, explore other forms of creative expression. Creative outlets allow for exploration and processing of emotions, deepening your understanding of your journey.

Write poetry, compose music, or create visual art that encapsulates your feelings about this transition. Capture significant moments with photography or video to create a personal archive of your experiences.  Or visually map your career journey, highlighting key milestones, challenges, and achievements in your career. 

Other creative examples are more outward-facing. Document a journey you took (recently or in the past); produce a small publication on an important historic milestone; or get to work gathering some kind of archival material, whether from your family, locality, or community. Your efforts don’t need to be shared widely, but if you work with an audience in mind (could be just your family or close friends), it will give you a greater sense of motivation and purpose.
Blurb creator Lucas Bacardi-Shriftman did just that, harnessing the power of self-publishing to help raise funds for Best Buddies, a non-profit organization doing vital work to empower people with intellectual and developmental disabilities around the world. Remember, self-publishing doesn’t only have to be for yourself!

Step four: Showcase your expertise through self-publishing

In a world where personal branding and visibility are paramount, self-publishing offers a transformative platform for expressing your creativity and showcasing your skills. Whether you’re an artist, writer, entrepreneur, or professional looking to pivot your career, self-published books can serve as powerful tools for storytelling and self-promotion. 

By curating your unique projects, insights, and experiences into a cohesive format, you not only highlight your expertise but also create a tangible representation of your journey. Embrace the opportunity to share your narrative and make a memorable impact in your field!

Choose your book format

One of the most exciting aspects of self-publishing is the variety of book formats available. Depending on your goals and the nature of your work, different formats may be more suitable for showcasing your skills.

• Photo books: Great for visual storytelling, these books serve as stunning portfolios to highlight photography, design work, or any visually driven project.
• Trade books: A perfect format for professional guides, workbooks, or thought leadership pieces, trade books offer a way for you to establish expertise in your field.
• Magazines: Dynamic and engaging, magazines allow for project-based portfolios or industry-specific showcases, ideal for professionals wanting to present their latest work.

Design your portfolio

A well-designed portfolio can make a lasting impression, serving as your calling card in a competitive landscape. Whether for graphic design, photography, architecture, or your artistic work, a professional-looking portfolio will elevate your work. Here are some tips for creating a visually appealing and effective portfolio that encapsulates your skills and creative vision.

• Highlight your best work: Carefully curate a selection of your strongest visual pieces or projects, ensuring they showcase a diverse range of skills while representing your unique style. Quality over quantity is key—choose works that resonate deeply with your narrative.
• Align with career goals: Design your portfolio to reflect not only your past achievements but also your aspirations. Consider the industry standards of your target field and tailor your book to meet those expectations, making it clear how your work aligns with your future goals.
• Use professional layouts: Choose clean, coherent layouts that enhance readability and navigation. Leverage a mix of images, text, and white space to create a balanced visual experience, guiding viewers seamlessly through your work.
• Add personal branding: Infuse your creative portfolio with elements that showcase your personal brand, like your distinct color palette and typography. Consistency in design reinforces your unique voice and helps you stand out in a crowded market.
• Include contextual narratives: Accompany your work with brief explanations or anecdotes that provide insight into your creative process, challenges faced, and outcomes achieved. These narratives not only enhance the viewer’s understanding of your projects but also illustrate your problem-solving abilities and passion for your craft.

Build your personal brand

Establishing your personal brand is crucial in the currently crowded visual and informational ecosystem. Amidst an endless wash of online content, self-published books can serve as a powerful tool for communicating your unique identity and value proposition. Through your writing, visuals, and design, you can share your thoughts, experiences, and insights, helping to create a memorable narrative around your brand.

• Craft your narrative: Try to form a memorable narrative around your personal brand, making it easier for others to connect with your story and understand your work on a deeper level.
• More than a resume: Your personal brand extends beyond just your resume and job titles; it illustrates who you are and what you stand for. This narrative encompasses how you translate your skills into meaningful contributions, helping others understand your unique value.
• Utilize self-published books: Self-published books can serve as powerful tools for expressing your unique identity and value proposition. Taking the time to create a book allows you to clarify and refine your personal story. This focused effort not only strengthens your ability to communicate your brand but also enhances your credibility and authority in your field.
• Showcase your work: As you navigate creative career changes, consider showcasing your own projects, whether they are creative essays, collections of artwork, or guides based on your expertise. These projects provide a platform to tell a compelling story about your abilities and what makes you distinct in your industry.

Use your self-published book as a networking tool

In networking scenarios, standing out is essential. Instead of a business card, consider sharing a small book that encapsulates your journey, skills, and insights. Your self-published book can act as a conversation starter, opening doors to discussions that may lead to future opportunities. When you share your story through your work, you invite others to engage, leading to deeper connections.

• Present your career journey authentically: Sharing your career experiences through self-published books allows you to convey your personal brand in an authentic way. This narrative serves as more than just a portfolio; it illustrates who you are, what you value, and how you contribute to your field.
• Integrate your book into your online portfolio: By incorporating your self-published book into your online portfolio or website, you can enhance your professional presence. Showcasing your book provides potential employers with deeper insights into your skills and personality, making you a more compelling candidate.
• Strengthen your online presence: A robust online presence is vital for professional growth, and self-publishing fits seamlessly into this strategy. Creating a dedicated section on your website for your book that features a synopsis, excerpts, and testimonials enriches your narrative while establishing you as a thought leader in your industry.
• Enhance your social media feeds: Self-published books can significantly boost your social media engagement. As with your website, sharing snippets, quotes, or insights from your book invites interaction with your audience and can drive traffic to your website, ultimately leading to increased book sales.
• Widen Your Reach with Accessibility: Making your work accessible online broadens your reach and connects you with a larger audience. Providing the permanence of a published work gives your words or images added depth and staying power, ensuring they resonate with readers long after they first encounter them.

Self-published books represent more than just a means to disseminate information—they are multifaceted tools for networking, personal branding, and professional growth. By using them thoughtfully, you can leave lasting impressions, foster engaging conversations, and share your authentic story. 

The ever-evolving creative

Self-publishing offers an unparalleled opportunity to navigate career transitions and highlight the creative skills that define you. By embracing change, identifying transferable skills, documenting your journey, and showcasing your creativity, you can pivot effectively and authentically in your career.

Remember, you are an ever-evolving creative—embrace your journey, tell your story, and let your unique voice shine. The world is waiting for your contributions, so take that leap into self-publishing—you never know where it might take you!

***

Over the past two decades, Blurb has helped countless people transition into new careers or evolve their creative practices through self-publishing. We give you the tools and the platform to make this process as empowering as possible. Get started today!

The post The evolving creative: How self-publishing can help you pivot careers appeared first on Blurb Blog.

One of the most empowering parts of self-publishing is that you are in control from start to finish. You get to decide when to hit print. Not quite happy with the result? Go back and tweak to your heart’s content; add, delete, rearrange as your perspective shifts. Even when you feel finished, nothing stops you from revisiting the publication in a month, a year, or even longer. Instead of seeing books as the final culmination, books become living things that offer you space to grow, experiment, and evolve. 

In this spirit, we caught up with Blurb creator Greg Lehming, who produced two editions of his photo book, Iceland. Along the way, he also took a dip into bookbinding—before deciding he would rather spend his creative energies on other parts of the photographic and bookmaking process. Lehming shares a range of honest insights on his bookmaking process and the bumps along the way. As Iceland shows, the real beauty lies in the journey itself.

Let’s begin from the beginning: how did you first pivot (professionally) into the field of photography?

Up until 2022, I was paying my bills by working at a restaurant. A couple of years had passed since the COVID lockdowns started, so I went on a two-week trip with my wife (girlfriend at the time), sister, brother-in-law, and nephew. It was my first time travelling since 2019, and also the first time in a while that I had a chance to take some landscape photos.

During the trip, I had posted some of my photography on TikTok. In one particular video, I compared the edited versus unedited versions of my photos. Someone chose to comment, “Yeah, don’t quit your day job. If this is your day job, you’ll improve! Keep working hard.” 

It was a tough comment to read, but it made me stop and wonder, “Why couldn’t I make this my day job?” When I got back home, I realized I had been needing a change in career path for quite a while, so I handed in my notice and started looking for photography work. I haven’t looked back since!

What was the genesis of the Iceland project? When did you know, “This is more than a series of photos…this project has to be a book”?

Growing up, I can remember flipping through many family photo albums. My grandma often scribbled notes on the backs of prints explaining who was in the photo and where they were.

I had been watching a photographer on YouTube talk about creating photo books, not necessarily to sell, but to create a physical memento of a time or place that you can keep for yourself. It reminded me of all the albums I flipped through as a kid, and pushed me to consider making my own photo albums, but printed as a book.

I decided to use my photos from Iceland as my first photo book because it was a trip I took with my dad, who also loves photography, so it became a perfect blend of work I was proud of and memories with my family.

It was four years after my trip to Iceland that I decided to turn it into a book. I had been revisiting some of my photography edits and trying to apply new skills I had developed in an attempt to improve the work. However, with how much time had passed since the trip, I didn’t want to post the images to social media. 

I felt that the photos had a limited lifespan online, but by making a physical book, I wouldn’t have to let the images sit on a hard drive. Even if nobody purchased a copy, at least I would have a way of looking back on some of my favourite moments. 

Publishing the book boosted my confidence as a photographer in a lot of ways. Seeing my work in a physical form really moved me. I felt that I had created a proper body of work for the first time in my professional career.

Tell us more about your experience with producing the book’s first edition. What was your approach going into it, what did you learn, what went well, and what left you feeling frustrated?

In the first edition, I felt that a lot of things went well. My main intent was to create something that I would enjoy looking back through in the future, and to this day, I still feel that it holds up to my initial goal.

My biggest lesson was learning how to sequence my work. I opted not to write anything about the photos except for a foreword explaining who I was with and where we went, so I wanted to make sure the photos could tell some kind of story. I had thought about sequencing the photos in the order they were taken, but it made the book feel disjointed. I ended up going with a more subtle approach, using composition and color to guide the flow. I’m not sure there’s a real logic to it, but I followed my intuition and made something that felt good to flip through.

It was nearly a year after publishing the book that I felt something could be improved. 

You then decided to give bookbinding a go on your own as well. Walk us through this decision and all the steps you had to undertake. In retrospect, how do you see this as a step in your growth and evolution as a photographer?

As happy as I was with the final result of Iceland (first edition), I felt it needed to be more accessible cost-wise. With the expense of printing and publishing, I didn’t feel great about how much I would need to charge people to make any amount of profit from selling my book.

When I started putting together my next photo book, Duration, I tried to come up with a way to create something unique that people could support without having to break the bank. I already owned a printer by this point, so I decided to try learning how to bookbind.

I went through Kickstarter to act as a pre-sale and raise funds for bookbinding tools (paper, an awl, linen thread, needles, wax, book board, book cloth, glue, a bone folder, etc.). People who wanted to show support but couldn’t afford the price of the book were rewarded with prints and digital copies of the book, while those who had the extra funds were rewarded with a completely handmade copy of my book and some extra goodies.

I ended up making six copies of the 120-page hardcover book. The final product definitely has a homemade feel, but also a really nice polish that I’m quite proud of. At the same time, I ultimately lost a lot of time and money on the project; my printer broke at one point and cost a good chunk of change to repair. I battled perfectionism. I constantly worried about the fact that if I made a mistake anywhere along the process, I would have to scrap the copy, buy new materials, and start over.

Going down the bookbinding route was a great experience, regardless. I learned a lot about marketing a project, managing project scope, and budgeting for error. Plus, I gained a huge amount of respect for the craft of binding. Books are so commonplace in many lives, but having the experience of making them myself allowed me to value them so much more.

If I were to do it again, I would downsize the book significantly. I’m sure my craftsmanship could improve on another attempt, too, but I think for larger projects, I’m happy to go back to Blurb. 

Iceland, across its two editions, is a great example of how you saw your book as a work-in-progress, almost a living thing, that still had room to grow and evolve. Tell us more about how you approached the second edition and what you hoped to get out of another version.

Part of battling with a sense of perfectionism is certainly to just make the thing, but I think it’s important to revisit past work. New or developed skills can help refine the work to better express something you intended to share in the first iteration. Plus, I personally find that revisiting work helps me see how I’ve grown as an artist.

When I decided to create the second edition of Iceland, I had a collection of images I had revisited and rediscovered since publishing the first edition. There were photos I had abandoned because I didn’t think I could salvage them with an edit. Thanks to some technical improvements to Adobe Lightroom and some new editing tastes I had developed, I unearthed a solid number of photos I wanted to include in my book.

My main hope for the second edition was to create a version of the book that included a larger collection of photos while also being more affordable. When I made the first edition, I wanted it to be the best, most premium book possible. This time around, I decided that if I wanted to both include more photos and make a book that more people could afford, I had to take out some of the more premium options. 

Since I already had to reconsider the sequencing of images with the new additions, I took the opportunity to look for other ways to improve the book. I ended up re-editing many of the photos from the first edition. I switched from a luster to a matte paper, which I believe suits my photography better. I managed to reduce the paper cost so that more people would be able to afford a copy.

Now that I have this second edition, I get to see a physical example of how I’ve improved as a photographer and how my taste has adapted as I’ve gotten older. I hadn’t planned to make multiple editions of this book when I first created it, so it’s hard to know if this is the “final’ version. That’s a cool aspect of being an artist—sometimes inspiration hits, and you realize a project is ready for the world. At the same time, the work then becomes a part of you and can grow with you. It’s then a matter of deciding if you want to share that growth with the world.

For now, I’m very happy with this edition and proud to know it’s out there and available for others to enjoy.

What’s next for you as a creator? 

Through the process of producing my work on physical media, I have also been creating and selling prints, postcards, and posters.

Currently, I sell the postcards and posters out of a local Toronto shop called Arts Market and on Etsy. The limited-edition prints I sell on my website are printed on various materials like textured matte paper, brushed metal, and acrylic, which I would love to display in art shows or galleries. 

Beyond the physical side of my work, I offer lifestyle photography services for a variety of occasions. I like to spend some time with my clients before the photoshoot so I can get a better sense of their comfort and help them ease into it. In a world full of hustle and bustle, I like to slow things down and make sure my clients know I have the time for them.

Ultimately, I hope to create more photo books with emphasis on storytelling or themes, collaborate with more artists in my area, and perhaps branch out into other art forms. I’m curious by nature and would love to let that curiosity guide me forward in whatever future endeavors I take on. 

***

Have you been thinking about making a book but feel intimidated about where to start? Blurb offers all the tools you need to make the process easy and fun. Remember, no book is perfect on the first go-around. Start your publishing journey today.

The post Iceland (Second Edition): Behind the Book with Greg Lehming appeared first on Blurb Blog.